GW90 Manual

GASWorkS 9.
0 ™
User's Manual
Bradley B. Bean, PE
419 East Columbia Street, Colorado Springs, Colorado 80907 USA

Distributor: COMPUTERS & ENGINEERING
Holzmühler Weg 87-89, 35457 Lollar-Germany. www.comp-engineering.com
© 1991-1997, 2006 Bradley B. Bean, PE - All rights reserved.
GASWorkS 9.0 ™
Licensing...
GASWorkS, its options, and supplements are licensed for installation on only one computer per authorized
copy. That is, only one copy of the program is intended to be installed per license. Each purchased copy of
the program represents one license. We are relying on your honesty and integrity to ensure that multiply
copies of the program are not created.
In reference to this paragraph, the following definitions shall apply: Software shall mean the GASWorkS
program, documentation, and any associated options, enhancements, or supplements; User shall mean the
individual or organization purchasing the Software, the individual or organization employing the persons to
be using the Software, the individual or organization otherwise responsible for the administration of the use
of the Software, or any affiliate thereof; Developer shall mean Bradley B. Bean, PE. By use of the Software,
the User consents to accept full responsibility for the use of the Software including: Interpretations or
decisions based on any results derived from the Software; Any claims resulting from the use, accidental
misuse, or intentional misuse of the Software by the User; And for reimbursement of the original purchase
price to the Developer for each unauthorized copy of the Software generated from the User's authorized copy.
Depending on the specific version received by the User, the Software will use a certain copy protection
method. The method may require registration of the software with the Developer, installation of a physical
security device on the User’s equipment, or other method of protection. By installing the Software the User
consents to the means of copy protection.
It is the User's obligation to immediately return the Software, without installing it, if
they do not concur and consent to these Licensing requirements.
Trademark Notice...
GASWorkS, GASBase, and the "B-Cubed" logo are trademarks of Bradley B. Bean, PE. dBASE is a
trademark of ASHTON TATE a division of Borland International. AutoCAD is a trademark of Autodesk,
Inc. Arc/Info is a trademark of Environmental Resource Systems Inc. Windows (and it variations and
derivations) are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a trademark of Bentley System Inc.
Copyright Warning...
The GASWorkS software and User's Manual are protected under United States and international copyright
laws and treaties. Making unauthorized copies of either the software or the associated documentation is a
violation of United States and international law. Don't be a criminal, don't copy.
Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE
i
GASWorkS 9.0 ™
Guarantee...
If you are not fully satisfied with the performance of GASWorkS, uninstall the software, return the original
distribution materials, hardware key (if provided), and documentation within thirty days of the date of
receipt. We will promptly refund the original purchase price.
If during the useful lifetime of the software, GASWorkS or its options do not perform as claimed, notify us
of the deficiency and we will promptly address your concern and do our best to correct the problem.
Application Limit
The number of Users that can simultaneously run the GASWorkS software is dependent on the license style
purchased. This number is referred to as the application limit. A single User license allows only one User
at a time. A limited network license allows a fixed number of Users (depending on the purchase agreement).
An unlimited network license has no User limit.
GASWorkS keeps track of how many Users are using it. When it is executed, it checks the number of Users
currently using the software. If the application limit is not exceeded, the software will be started. If the
application limit is exceeded, a warning message will appear and the software will not start. If GASWorkS
is abnormally terminated, the User count will become corrupt and GASWorkS may erroneously report the
number of current Users – preventing additional Users from beginning execution. If this occurs, use the
following procedure to start GASWorkS.
Select the Windows Start button. The program menu list will appear. Select the Run item from the program
list. At the Open prompt type “\Program Files\GASW orkS 9\app\GW 90.exe” /-1. Include the quotation marks.
Note that there is a space between Program and Files, between GASWorkS and 9, and between the closing
quote (“) and the forward slash (/). The quotes must be included for Windows to properly process the
command.
Software Updates
From time to time the GASWorkS software is revised and updated to correct reported or discovered bug
fixes, to add User requested enhancements, and to perform other required maintenance. These updates are
available for download and installation from our website www.b3pe.com. Notification of updates is not
generally made to the User community, the User should occasionally check for new updates from this site.
Frequently asked questions are also posted on the website.
ii
GASWorkS 9.0 ™
About This Manual...

This manual attempts to provide the User with an understanding of the GASWorkS software by providing
extensive descriptions and documentation of its various features. The main body of the manual presents
descriptions of the various menu items and data screens. Separate sections are provided for several of the
more extensive features. The Appendix of the manual presents a primer on network analysis, along with
technical documentation of the various equations and data files used and supported by GASWorkS.
The use of italics is used extensively throughout the manual. Italicized words are used in two manners - one
to emphasize a word, the other to indicate the name of a menu item, command button, screen name, or
keyboard key.
In addition to the information contained in this manual, examples, how-to tips and instructions are included
in the GASWorkS On-Line help.
A copy of this manual in Portable Document Format (pdf) is contained on the GASWorkS installation CD.
With some versions of GASWorkS, the Demonstration Guide and User’s Manual are installed and viewable
using the Help menu. Additional information and documentation may be found on our website
www.b3pe.com.
iii
GASWorkS 9.0 ™
iv
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Table of Contents
GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Software Copy Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Uninstalling GASWorkS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Using GASWorkS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
GASWorkS Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Command Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Negotiating Data Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Accessing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Accessing On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Notes For International Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MENU ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
File - File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
New - Create A New Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
New Project - Create A New Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Open - Open An Existing Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Close - Close A Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Save - Save Model Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Save As - Save Model Changes To Another Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rename - Change The Name Of The Current Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Copy - Copy Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Delete - Deleting Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Append - Appending Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Bundle - (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Bundle A Model - Zipping A Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
UnBundle A Model - Unzipping A Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Purge - Removing UnRequired Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Preferences - (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Paths - Setting The Default File Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Property Tables - Setting The Default Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Options - Set User Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Facility Settings - Display/Edit Facility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Save Current Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Retrieve Saved Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
v
Restore A Model - Restoring Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Restore Samples - Restoring The Sample Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Quick Export - (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Exit GASWorkS - Leaving GASWorkS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Edit - Entering And Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Model Notes - Editing The Model Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Mass Update - Mass Updating Model Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Property Tables - Editing Look-Up Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Facility Settings - Display/Edit Facility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Analysis - Calculating Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Solve Single Model - Solving A Single Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Calculate Gas Properties - Calculating Gas Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
GASCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Report - Viewing And Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Standard (All) - Reporting Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Standard (Select) - (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Summary - Creating A Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Connectivity - Creating A Connectivity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Property Tables - Reporting Look-Up Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Data Check - Finding & Reporting Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Solution Log - Viewing A Solution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Set Report Options - Setting Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Graphics - Accessing The Graphic Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
View/Edit - Viewing & Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Settings - Changing Graphic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Background Settings - Set A Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Save Display As BMP - Saving The Displayed Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Save Display To Clipboard - Copying The Displayed Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Utilities - Using The Utility Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Set Defaults - Setting Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Customer (Submenu) - Customer Data Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Attribute File - Setting An Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Update External Loads - Assign And Update Node Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Execute SQL Statement - Update Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Pipe (Submenu) - Pipe Data Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Attribute File - Setting An Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Execute SQL Statement - Update Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Import/Export - Importing And Exporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Data Check - Checking Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Miscellaneous (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Check Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
vi
Renumber Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Calculate XY’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sort Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Window - Window (Screen) Access Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Arrange Icons - Arranging Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Arrange Windows - Arranging Open Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Windows List - Accessing Open Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Help - Using The On-Line Help Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Contents - Accessing The Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using Help - Instructions For Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Technical Support (Submenu) - How To Reach Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Request Registration Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Send Help Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
View Demonstration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
DATA SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Bundle Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connectivity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Customer Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Data Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Data Check Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Default Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Facility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Gas Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Header Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Mass Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Model Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Node Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Path Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pipe Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Preference Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Project Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Property Table Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Print Control - (long form) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Print Control - (short form) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Query Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Renumbering Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Solution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Solution Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
vii
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Summary Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
XY Calculation Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
GRAPHIC DATA INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

GDI Window Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
GDI Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
GDI Commands & Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Mouse Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Key Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Entering Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Attribute Valve Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Background Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Bitmap Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Color Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Customer Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Graphic Line Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Graphic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Graphic Symbol Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Multiple Edit Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Node Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Pipe Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Plot Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Set Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Set Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Shift Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Text Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tool Palette Edit Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Trace Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Trace Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Trace & Update Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
PROPERTY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Using Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Property Table Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Compressor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fitting Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Pipe Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Regulator Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Valve Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Well Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
viii
ATTRIBUTE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Attaching A Customer Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Attaching A Pipe Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Using SQL To Update Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
IMPORT & EXPORT ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Import/Export Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Import/Export File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
IMPORT ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Importing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Importing Column Format ASCII Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Importing Delimited Format ASCII Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Importing Customer X-Y Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Importing dBASE Format Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Importing DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Importing Shape Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Importing Node X-Y Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Importing Stoner PD & XY Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Importing XLS Format Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
EXPORT ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Exporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Exporting ASCII Customer Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Exporting ASCII Node Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Exporting ASCII Pipe Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Exporting dBASE Customer Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Exporting dBASE Node Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Exporting dBASE Pipe Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Exporting DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Exporting GASWorkS 7.0 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Exporting Microsoft Access Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Exporting Microsoft Excel Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Exporting Node X-Y Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Exporting Stoner Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Exporting Shape Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Using Non-Pipe Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Using The Pipe Sizing (Optimization) Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Using The Query Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Using Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Using Diversified Customer Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Convergence Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Using A Command Alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
ix
Program Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
How To Reach Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Network Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
GASWorkS Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Supported Dimensional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Standard GASWorkS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Pipe Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Regulator Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Valve Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Compressor Power Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Well Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Support Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Compressibility Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Temperature Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
GASWorkS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Standard Look-Up Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
x
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Getting Started
GETTING STARTED
1

Use the procedures outlined in this section to install GASWorkS and begin using it to model your gas system.
If you are a new User, working the example model contained in the “Demonstration Guide” will provide
instructions and examples of using the basic features of the GASWorkS software. If you are a current User,
you might browse the Release Notes section to review the new features contained in this version of the
software.
In addition to the example included with this manual, the On-Line Help system contains many other
examples and how-to tips (the Building Your First Model example is a good topic to start with).
A list of the commands available in the Graphic Data Interface is provided in that section of this manual. The
Menu descriptions section of this manual provides some abbreviated instructions on accessing and using
many of the routines found in the software.
GASWorkS is suitable for modeling a variety of distribution, gathering, transmission, and plant piping
systems containing most any compressible, single phase fluid. Many of the examples used in its
documentation refer to distribution type systems. However, please consider that the methods required to
create and solve these examples, are exactly the same as those required to create and solve a model of any
type of system.
If you encounter problems, or have specific questions, refer to the appropriate section in the manual for
detailed instructions, descriptions, and explanations. Or, use the On-Line Help topics to view examples and
how-to tips on performing a specific task. Feel free to contact us with your questions.
Installation...
To install the GASWorkS software...
From A CD:
If the software was received on a CD...
! An appropriate version of Windows must be running to install GASWorkS, if it is not, start Windows now.
! Place the CD in the appropriate disk drive. The installation program may or may not automatically start.
! To manually start the installation program, select the Start button on the Windows Task Bar. Select the
Run item from the Start menu list. Type the letter corresponding to the drive containing the GASWorkS CD,
followed by the word “setup”, then press the ENTER (5) key. For example, type “d:setup”, then press the
ENTER (5) key. Follow the instructions in the General Installation Instructions topic to continue the
installation.
3
From An Electronically Received File:
If the software was received electronically (email or download)...
! Download or copy the file to a temporary directory on the machine where GASWorkS is to be installed.
! If a faux extension is present (“.txt” or “.ok”) remove the extension.
! After removing the faux extension, double click on the “setup” filename. Follow the instructions in the
General Installation Instructions topic to continue the installation.
General Installation Instructions:
! After the installation program has been started, several screens will appear during the setup process. Read
the contents of each screen and respond appropriately.
! The Welcome screen will appear first. Read the contents of the screen carefully, then select Next to
continue with the installation or select Cancel to cancel the setup process.
! The Licensing screen will appear next. Read the terms of the License carefully, then select Agree to
continue with the installation or select Disagree to cancel the setup process.
! The Documentation screen will appear next. If you would like to install a copy of the Demonstration Guide
and User’s Manual select Yes. Otherwise respond No. If the documentation is installed it can be viewed from
the GASWorkS Help menu.
! The Location screen will appear next. If you would like to install GASWorkS in a different directory, enter
or select a different destination directory. Select Next to continue with the installation or select Cancel to
cancel the setup process.
! The Program Group screen will appear next. Select Continue to proceed, or change the program group and
then select Continue to continue installing, or select Cancel to end the installation.
! Various warnings and messages may appear during the installation process. When a warning or message
appears, read the message carefully, then select the appropriate option to either continue or terminate the
installation process.
! A message will appear when the installation process is complete. The message will indicate whether the
installation succeeded or failed - select the appropriate option to clear the message.
Upon successful installation, a "GASWorkS" program item will be created in the Start-Programs menu list.
Select the GASWorkS 9.0 item to execute the GASWorkS software.
4
Software Copy Protection...

GASWorkS uses several means of software copy protection. We understand that this may be offensive to
some Users, however it is essential to ensuring the commercial viability of GASWorkS. One of the following
methods may be used to protect the installed version of the GASWorkS.
Parallel (Printer) Port Hardware Key:
If a Parallel port hardware key is provided, place the key in an available parallel (printer) port. Insert the key
so that the end marked "COMPUTER" is connected to the computer's printer port. If a printer or other device
is attached, the key should be placed between the computer, and the printer cable or device.
Note...
When installing on a Windows NT based operating system (NT/XP/2000) additional installation steps
are required. See the “readkey.txt” file found on the GASWorkS distribution CD for additional
instructions.
USB Port Hardware Key:
If a USB port hardware key is provided, additional installation steps are required. See the “readkey.txt” file
located on the GASWorkS distribution CD for additional instructions. Once the software for the key has been
installed place the key in an available USB port.
When using hardware key (Printer or USB port) protection, GASWorkS may be installed on multiple
machines and the hardware key may be shared. However GASWorkS can only be used to “solve” a model
on the machine where the hardware key is installed. Only edit and view functions are available on the
machines which do not contain the key.
Registration:
Some versions of GASWorkS are required to be registered to allow access to its complete set of functions.
If the installed version of GASWorkS requires registration, a serial number will be displayed the first time
GASWorkS is executed. If this message appears select the Request Registration Number command button.
An email format request form will appear, complete the appropriate information and send the email to request
the required number. The number will be provided at our first convenience.
5
If you do not wish to request the number or if you want to access GASWorkS before you receive your
registration number, select the Continue command button to open GASWorkS in limited non-solution mode.
When using registration protection, GASWorkS may be installed on multiple machines, however it can only
be used to “solve” a model on the machine that has been registered. Only edit and view functions are
available on the machines which are not registered.
Execution...
To execute the GASWorkS software...
! An appropriate version of Windows must be running before GASWorkS may be executed. If Windows
is not running, begin its execution now.
! Select the Start button from the Windows Task Bar. Move the mouse pointer to the Programs item. The
Programs menu list will appear.
! Once the Program list is displayed. Select the GASWorkS program group from the list. Select the
GASWorkS 9.0 program item from the group list.
! The GASWorkS software will be started. After the software has been
loaded into memory, the GASWorkS Copyright Notice will appear -
click the Continue button or press the ENTER (5) key to continue.
! After clearing the notice, depending on certain preference settings, a

blank screen may appear, or the Graphic Data Interface screen may
appear. In either case choose the desired option from the pull-down
menus, GDI command list or toolbars - or select the Exit item from the
Files menu list to quit the program.
Uninstalling GASWorkS...
To uninstall (remove) the GASWorkS software...
! An appropriate version of Windows must be running before GASWorkS may be uninstalled. If Windows
is not running, begin its execution now.
! Select the Start button from the Windows Task Bar.
! Select the Settings item from the Start-up list. Then select the Control Panel item from the Settings list.
6
The contents of the Control Panel folder will be displayed.
! Click on the Add/Remove Programs icon. The Add/Remove Programs Properties screen will appear.
! Select the GASWorkS 9.0 item from the program list. Select the Add/Remove command button to proceed
with the removal. Several prompts will appear throughout the removal process, read the messages carefully
and respond appropriately. A message will appear when the removal process is complete. The message will
indicate whether the removal succeeded or failed.
! When done, select the OK command button to close the Add/Remove Program Properties screen.
When GASWorkS is installed, it creates various subdirectories directly under the main GASWorkS
application directory (for example “\Program Files\GASWorkS 9\Files”). These directories are used to
containing a variety of GASWorkS property, initialization, and model files. If new files have been added to
any of these directories, or any of the original files have been modified since installation (which is almost
always the case) the uninstall routine will not be able to remove the affected directory. If this occurs, the
directory and its contents can be manually removed using the Windows Explorer program.
Using GASWorkS...
GASWorkS 9.0 is designed to be easy and intuitive to use. However, there are a few general concepts that
need to be learned before becoming proficient with the software. There are two ways to get started with
GASWorkS.
One, the General section found later in this manual provides an introduction to many of the basic concepts
required to use GASWorkS. Review this section to obtain general information needed to use the software.
Once the general concepts have been learned, use the On-Line Help system to review the numerous examples
and how-to tips for instructions on performing the various tasks required to create, solve, report, and edit a
model of your piping system.
The other method is to work the example contained in the “Demonstration Guide” provided with this manul.
The guide will introduce the basic concepts required to create, solve, report, and edit a simple example
model. If time is short, we suggest that you start with the Demonstration Guide - then review the contents
of the manual when time is available.
7
Release Notes...
GASWorkS 9.0 represents a continued evolution of the GASWorkS software - however, as with all
evolutionary processes, things change. In this revision, the most noticeable change will be in the way that
the data is managed. The previous versions of GASWorkS used a database style management system - open
a data table, retrieve a record from the table, make a change, replace the record into the table. With this
method the data is continuously saved to disk storage. GASWorkS 9.0 uses an open, edit, save method of file
management, similar to the methods used in spreadsheet and wordprocessor applications. With this method
the model files are opened and loaded into memory. When changes are made they are only saved to the data
in memory, not the data in disk storage. When the work session is complete, the User may chose to save the
data changes or discard them. Remember to save your changes.
Numerous other changes were made, additional commands and functions were added and inevitably some
features were discontinued. A partial summary of the many feature changes is provided in the following
tables.
Data Management
The most noticeable change to existing Users will be how the data files are managed. Good or bad -
GASWorkS now uses the open, edit, save management scheme for handling its data files. Other data
management changes include...
Support for facility identification is provided. Pipes and associated customers can be grouped by facility
type, similar to layers in a CAD application. Individual facilities can be set to be reported, solved,
displayed - or set to “active” to allow or disallow editing. The User can revise the facility list.
Customers- A Link ID data item was added to enhance sharing of data with other applications. A unit
count item was added to allow a single customer feature to more easily represent multiple physical
customers. Support is now provided for “branch” customers. This allows one customer to “feed” from
another customer. Multi-segment service lines are now supported. For our UK customers, individual
diversity handling is now supported.
Pipes- A Link ID data item was added to enhance sharing of data with other applications. An external
database can now be attached to the pipe features in the model. A Facility Type data item has been added.
Fittings (valves, elbows and tees) can be attached directly to a pipe segment. The equivalent length is
automatically computed and used during calculation.
Nodes - Separate control for application of the Design Factor and status for base and external loads was
added. Long node names - up to 40 characters - are now supported.
Property Tables- The various property tables (pipe, valve, regulator, compressor, well, fitting) are accessed
using an improved spreadsheet style interface. Now has the Ability to save and retrieve specific tables.
Now has the ability to setup color and linetype specifications for individual pipe sizes and types. Pipe
sizes to include during pipe sizing (optimization) can now be more easily identified. See the Property
8
Data Management
Tables section for notes on using old look-up tables.
File Handling- GASWorkS 7.0 files are automatically imported when opened. A graphic preview of the
model is displayed in the file selection form. Implementation of open, edit, save style file handling.
Automatic save at User specified time intervals is supported.
Linked Database - A “linked” database feature has been added to replace the GASBase database. Pipe and
customer model data can be complimented by the use of linked database. The linked database is
automatically managed by GASWorkS - as model features are added or deleted, the associated (linked)
database feature is also updated. The fields in the linked database can be specified by the User based on
a “seed” file. The contents of the linked database can be manipulated using Standard Query Language
(SQL) manipulation commands.
Undo - An “undo” feature has been added to allow restoration of previous data or graphic changes. The
undo feature can be turned on or off by the User. The “oops” (undelete) routine has been expanded to
include Customer, User Graphic, and User Text features.
“Deleted” files are now automatically sent the Windows Recycle Bin instead of being permanently
deleted.
Customer Load Manipulation

Customer feature data. A multiple “unit” field has been added - a single customer feature can be used to
represent multiple customers (units). A “link identification” field has been added to allow enhanced
connection between the GASWorkS data model and an external database.
Diversity- For Users of the IGE diversity calculations, heating/construction type and annual usage can now
be set for each individual customer. Calculation in “looped” systems is now supported.
Graphic Data Interface

The graphical data interface was enhanced by the addition of many new commands and features. Listed
here in no particular order, the new features include:
One click access to the pipe, node, and customer data. To access pipe data, click the left mouse button on
a pipe feature. To access node data, SHIFT-click the left mouse button on a node feature. To access
customer data, CTRL-click the left mouse button on a customer feature.
Multi-segment service lines are supported. Customer features may have polyline type service lines. The
main tap location can be specified by the User.
9

Support for User graphic lines and symbols is now provided. Graphic (non-model) lines and symbols can
be included in the model graphics. Graphics are added by drawing or inserting the feature at User specified
locations. A new GDI toolbar has been added to allow management of the Graphic features.
Automatic assignment of supply main on customer entry. A command is provided for one click entry of
customer features - select a the customer location - the customer is automatically assigned to the nearest
main.
Automated insertion and addition of regulator, compressor, and valve elements. A set of commands has
been added which allows the addition and insertion of non- pipe elements. The insertion routine
automatically updates pipe lengths when the device is inserted into an existing segment.
Enhanced command list. The command list includes the traditional alphabetic listing and a new grouped
listing. The grouped listing groups commands by type in “toolboxes” for example the “add” commands
are grouped in one toolbox, the edit commands in another, etc. The lists have been expanded to included
all of the new and existing commands.
Plot preview. The plot image is displayed in a preview window before it is sent to plotter/printer when
plotting.
Plot to User specified scale. Plots may be made to “fit” the specified page size, or to a User specified
scale.
Enhanced arc handling. Arcs can now be adjusted after they have been entered. Pipe ends for arc type
pipes can be moved.
Additional symbol and line styles. New node symbols and line styles have been added. Non-continuous
line styles can be used with all line widths.
Improved flow arrow handling - style, size and display selection. Flow arrows can be displayed as the
traditional arrow heads or as chevrons at mid-section.
Automated header tap on lateral pipe entry. Using a CTRL-click selection at the From Node and To Node
prompt will automatically tap the pipe near the selected location.
Double the number of customer edit and entry commands. Numerous other commands have been added
for editing and entering customer data. The Customer toolbar is now two-tiered.
Calculation of pressure drop between graphically selected points. The pressure drop between a pair of
selected node points can be displayed based on a User selection.
Automated calculation of efficiency based on calibration values. The efficiency of the pipes along a route
between two User selected points can be automatically computed based on User specified calibration
values.
10

Calculation of item statistics for graphically selected data features. A summary of various data values can
be displayed based on a User selected set of features.
Extract, copy, and move pipe, node, and customer features based on a graphically identified selection set.
A portion of a system can be extracted from a model, based on a User specified set of features. Associated
pipes, nodes, and customers are included in the extraction and deletion routines.
Match hydraulic and graphic properties. The properties of a selected feature can be applied to other user
selected features.
Multi-segment measurement tool. Distance along a multi-segment route can be measured using the new
tool.
Support of branch customers. A grouping of “trunk” and “branch” customers can be created, allowing one
customer to be supplied from another.
Save and retrieve graphical views. A graphic view can be saved, then retrieved at a later time.
Multiple view tab (panels) are provided. The GDI supports three separate panels, each with the ability to
display a different view of the model.
Multiple previous and next zooms. Each GDI panel allows up to ten views to be saved and accessed using
the Previous and Next zoom commands.
Trace and update data values along a trace route. Pipe, node, and customer values can be changed along
a trace route.
Set hydraulic symbols independent of pipe length. Pipe symbol size for compressors, regulators, valves
and wells can be set independent of the actual element graphical length.
Save display to Windows Clipboard. The GDI display can be saved to the Windows clipboard and pasted
into supporting applications.
Calculate XY’s from latitude and longitude. Approximate planar coordinates can be calculated from
geographic coordinates.
Automatically set text display limit. The text display limit can be set to the current view by simply double
clicking the display limit data box.
Entry of pipe by length and User drawn angle. In addition to the previous entry methods, a pipe segment
can be entered by entering a desired length, then graphical selecting the desired angle.
Display pipe length during manual graphic entry. The pipe length can optionally be displayed during entry.
Automatically reset colors - useful after traces and queries.
Automatically find and delete zero length pipes - useful for data imported from CAD & GIS sources.
11

Pipe color and linetype can be set using values contained in the Pipe Properties table, based on size and
type values, or based on facility type.
Improved background handling including: Support for “blocks” in DXF backgrounds. Ability to set scale
and origin shift when attaching a DXF background. Turn display of individual background image off
without unattaching the image. Support for Shape file background images is now supported.
Support for typed commands. Support is now provided for manual entry of typed commands. This may
seem like a step backwards, but often it is quicker to type a command than to find and select it from the
command list. Full or abbreviated commands may be entered, and the User may create a command alias
list to use their known name for the GDI commands.
A routine to automatically identify and tap unbroken intersections has been added. This is especially
useful for cleaning up imported CAD and GIS data.
Overall improvement of display speed.
Right clicking the mouse while working in GDI, displays a pop-up menu allowing a command to be
repeated, the display to be panned or zoomed, or a feature edit command to be executed.
Solution Routine
Capacity- Support for increased model capacity - the solution, reports, and graphical display have been
tested and verified with models up to 250,000 nodes in size.
Optimization- A more robust pipe sizing routine now produces more accurate and consistent optimal pipe
size sets. Ability to set limit pressures at multiple condition nodes. A maximum velocity limit may be
imposed. The pipe table to use for new size selection can be specified independent of the model pipe table.
Flow Equations- Support for several additional pipe flow equations was added, including additional
versions of the AGA partially and fully turbulent equation, and the high and low pressure versions of the
IMC (Polyflo) equations.
Diversity- For Users of the IGE diversity calculations, heating/construction type and annual usage can now
be set for each individual customer. Calculation in “looped” systems is now supported.
12
Reports
The various report features have been enhanced in a number of ways - which include:
Standard Reports- Enhanced in-report data editing. Enhanced query routine allows a query specification
to be saved and retrieved. Improved print handling especially for wide reports. Inclusion of customer
model and attribute data. Inclusion of pipe attribute data. Automatic sort by node name or id number.
Ability to delete a feature from the report. Graphically find a feature from a record selected in a report.
Summary Report - Addition of a numerous items to the system summary option. The report is displayed
in a User revisable text window. Selected contents can be copied, cut, and pasted into other applications.
Data Check - Additional items and options have been added to the check routines. The report is displayed
in a User revisable text window. Selected contents can be copied, cut, and pasted into other applications.
Exclusion Report - Additional items and options have been added to the check routines. The report is
displayed in a User revisable text window. Selected contents can be copied, cut, and pasted into other
applications.
Other Features
Mass Update- Expanded item support including assignment and query of graphical properties. The ability
to save and retrieve query specifications was added.
DXF Import- Now allows assignment of multiple pipe layers. Specification of arc resolution. Specification
of length and coordinate units, and origin shift - allowing automatic scale and shift during import. Import
of pipe, valve, customer, and User text features has been incorporated into a single routine. The ability
to save and retrieve an import specification was added.
Utilities - An automated node reduction routine was added. This routine is especially useful when working
with CAD and GIS data that needs a bit of massaging/cleanup after importing. A routine has been added
to create a graphical model from a non-graphical model.
Quick Export - A set of quick export routines have been added to allow the export of data associated with
the current model to be exported to number of formats with a single click. All pipe, node, and customer
data is included in the export. Supported formats include, Microsoft Access database, Microsoft Excel
workbook spreadsheets, ESRI Shape file, GASWorkS 7.0, dBASE and ASCII text files.
13
Discontinued Features
Several features have been discontinued from the current GASWorkS release. Their exclusion was based
on their perceived usefulness with respect to the latest software functionality. These features include...
Model Edit Data Form - The fill in the blanks style model edit data form is no longer supported. This
routine was most useful for creating no graphical models. Non-graphical models are no longer supported.
Relate Features - The ability to relate separate models together has been discontinued. The main purpose
of the relate feature was to help manage large models. GASWorkS now supports large models in both its
report and analysis features, combined with the newly added Facility feature, combined models can now
be efficiently managed.
GASBase - The predefined customer and pipe attribute database included in previous version of
GASWorkS has been discontinued. Similar, and more robust features are provided by the new “Linked”
database feature. When a GASWorkS 7.0 model with an associated GASBase database is imported, the
GASBase database is converted to a Linked database. All of the data will be retained, however some of
the automated load manipulation functionality of GASBase will be lost.
Import/Export - Some import and export routines have been discontinued including the GasTool and Data
Dump formats, and some old versions of GASWorkS. If conversion from these formats is required, we
can process them for you.
We hope that you will be pleased with the many improvements and enhancements we have made to
GASWorkS. Please let us know if you have any comments, concerns, or questions regarding our latest
release...
14
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ General Information
GENERAL
INFORMATION
15

Hardware Requirements...
GASWorkS will operate on any computer configured to run Windows 98, 2000, ME, NT 4.0, or XP. The
machine must be equipped with a Compact Disk (CD) drive, and at least one parallel printer port (if hardware
key provided). The following optional equipment is also recommended:
Item Minimum Requirements Recommended Options

Processor Any class of Pentium Highest available Pentium
Installed RAM 128 Minimum Maximum available on machine
Available Hard Disk Program Only - 10 Mbyte
Capacity Data - .35 Mbytes per 1000 nodes and .8
Mbytes per 10000 customer records.
Monitor VGA-16 Color, 640x480 VGA-256 color, 800x600 or better
Mouse Microsoft compatible two or three
button mouse.
Printer Port One parallel
Printer None Any Windows compatible laser
printer 300 dpi or better
Plotter None Any Windows compatible color
raster plotting/printing device
Digitizing Tablet Node Any WinTab compatible device
Software Requirements...
GASWorkS requires the installation of the Windows 98, 2000, ME, NT 4.0, or XP operating system to be
functional.
17
GASWorkS Data Elements...

GASWorkS uses an intuitive set of data elements to represent the piping systems that it models. The basic
elements of its data structure are nodes, pipes, and customer data. Nodes represent the connections,
intersections, and terminations of pipes. Nodes are the points where flow is introduced into the system
(supplies) or taken out of the system (demands). Nodes can also used to represent customer connections and
to assign customer loads. Customer features provide an efficient and intuitive way of representing customer
locations and demands.
Pipes connect the nodes and carry flow

between them. Flow can be thought of
as going into or out of nodes.
However, flow only goes through
pipes. GASWorkS supports various
types of pipe elements - Line Pipe,
Regulators, Valves, Fittings,
Compressors, and Wells.
Both hydraulic and attribute pipe data

may be maintained. The hydraulic pipe data represents the items which affect the flow and pressure drop
through the pipes. For example, pipe diameter, length, connectivity, etc. The attribute data represents items
which do not affect the flow or pressure drop through the pipes.
The customer data contains information about the location and demand of the customers associated with a
model. The customer data can be divided into two types of information - model data which describes the
customer’s location, the supply main identity, the load application details, and the total customer load - and
a second type of information called attribute information, which can contain a variety of non-model data
associated with the customer.
All of the model files are accessed by way of a single “key” file known as the “Header” file. This file
contains some general information about the model and the solution control parameters and serves as the
access point for all of the other files.
A variety of other data are also used to support GASWorkS and its various routines. These include gas
properties, attribute valves, User text, and background images. Each is described in detail in various sections
of the GASWorkS documentation.
18
Menu Structure...
The GASWorkS routines are accessed through pull-
down menus and dialog boxes. The menus are grouped
under headings by functionality. The menu headings are
displayed near the top of the main GASWorkS screen.
Menu Access...
Menu items are accessed by selecting an item from a
menu list. The menu lists are activated by selecting the
appropriate menu heading. Menu headings and menu
items may be selected by one of the following methods:
! Position the mouse pointer over the desired heading or item, then press the left most mouse button. This
is referred to as clicking on the item.
! Or, use the TAB or Arrow keys to position the cursor on the desired menu heading or menu item, then
press the ENTER (5) key.
! Or, hold down the ALT key while pressing the key corresponding to the underlined letter of the desired
heading or item.
A menu list may be deactivated by pressing the Escape (ESC) key or selecting another menu heading.
Some menu items have submenus associated with them, these are accessed through submenu “headers”.
Submenu headers are followed by “...” and a “right arrow” symbol. Rest or click the mouse on the header
title to access the submenu. Multiple submenus may exist.
Command Execution...
Many dialog boxes and data screens contain controls known as “Command Buttons”. Command buttons may
be used to quickly access a specific function. The function associated with a command button is executed
when the button is selected. The OK button found on many of the message boxes displayed by GASWorkS,
is an example of a command button. Command buttons may be selected by one of the following methods:
! Position the mouse pointer over the desired command button, then press the left mouse
button. This is referred to as clicking on the button.
19
! Or, use the TAB keys to highlight the desired command button, then press the ENTER (5) key.
! Or, hold down the ALT key while pressing the key corresponding to the underlined letter in the caption
of the desired command button.
Negotiating Data Screens...

GASWorkS provides numerous data screens for entering, editing, viewing, and managing the data it requires.
Generally, a data screen will contain fields for entering individual data values, data lists for selecting
predefined data, option buttons and check boxes for selecting options, and command icons and command
buttons for executing commands. The TAB keys or mouse can be used to move between the various controls
contained on all screens.
On certain screens, some items are supported by data lists. Dimensional units are an
example of an item associated with a list. To activate a data list - click on the arrow
symbol next to the right side of the data field, then select the desired item from the list
by clicking on the item. Or, press an Arrow key while the cursor is in the desired field to
change the selected value. Or, press the character corresponding to the first letter of the
item description.
Where check boxes are used, a check mark (U)will appear in the box when the
item is selected. The status of a check box may be changed by clicking in the box,
or by pressing the Space Bar while the cursor is in the box.
Where option buttons are used, a dot "!" will appear inside the option circle when the
item is selected. Option buttons are found in groups. Only one option may be chosen at
a time. To change the status of an option button - click on the desired button, or use the
TAB keys to move between options. When the cursor is located on the desired option, press the ENTER (5)
key.
In addition to using command buttons to execute commands, some screens also use icons to access
their commands. An icon is a small image which represents the task that the command performs.
Icons can only be selected using the mouse. To select an icon and execute its command, click on
the icon by placing the mouse pointer over the icon image, then press the left mouse button. The
printer symbol found on many report screens, is an example of an icon.
Data fields or list values highlighted with a yellow background represent calculated data values, and in
general, can not be directly edited by the User - these values change when the one of the editable values are
changed and a solution is successfully executed.
20
When entering numbers in a data field, do not include the digit grouping identifier (thousands identifier). For
example, enter ten thousand as “10000" not as “10,000" (or “10.000" if a dot is used as the digit grouping
identifier).
The GASWorkS Graphics Data Interface (GDI) provides a unique set of access methods, refer to the Graphic
Data Interface section for specific notes and instructions on its use.
Accessing Files...
A common file dialog box is used by all GASWorkS routines to enter required file names. The dialog box
allows the drive, directory, and name of the desired file to be selected or entered.
To select a drive:
! Move to the Drives list using the TAB keys or the

mouse.
! Change the selected drive by pressing the key

corresponding to the desired drive letter, by pressing the
Up or Down Arrow keys to change the selected drive, or
by clicking the arrow symbol next to the drives data list
and then selecting the desired drive.
To select a directory:
! Move to the Directories list using the TAB keys or the mouse.
! Change the selected directory by pressing the key corresponding to the first letter of the desired directory
(until the correct directory is selected), by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to change the selected
directory, or by clicking the arrow symbols or adjusting the scroll bar next to the list to select the desired
directory. Double click on a directory to display its contents.
To select a file:
! Move to the Files list using the TAB keys or the mouse.
! Change the selected file by pressing the key corresponding to the first letter of the desired file (until the
correct file is selected), by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to change the selected file, or by clicking
the arrow symbols or adjusting the scroll bar next to the list to select the desired file.
21
To manually enter a file name:
! Move to the Filename data field using the TAB keys or the mouse.
! Type the desired drive, path (directory), file name, and extension in the file name data field. GASWorkS
model files are managed through their associated header file. The header file uses an “.hdr” extension,
consequently the ".hdr" extension must be included when manually entering a model's header file name.
To select a recently opened file:
! Move to the Filename data field using the TAB keys or the mouse.
! Select the desired file by clicking on the arrow symbol adjacent to the data field. Then click on the name
of the desired file using the mouse.
After the desired file name has been entered or selected - click the Continue command button to proceed. To
leave the File Selection dialog box and terminate the function that invoked the dialog - click the Cancel
command button.
Note: Each time GASWorkS starts, it automatically opens the last model file that was worked on. This
feature can be disabled by closing the model before leaving GASWorkS.
Accessing On-Line Help...

GASWorkS has an extensive On-Line Help system. The topics contained in the help system provide
numerous examples and how-to tips. To access the help system, select the Contents item from the Help menu
list. The Contents screen will appear, select the Index tab to display a listing of the topic subjects contained
in the help system. Select an item from the index list to view the associated topic documentation.
If you are not familiar with using On-Line Help systems, select the Using Help item from the Help menu list
for a complete description on how to use the On-Line Help system.
If you can’t find what you need in the help system, or in the manual, or just don’t want to look for it - call,
fax, or e-mail us for help. Our contact information is:
Toll-free Telephone: 800-391-9391 (US Only)

Telephone: 719-578-9391
Fax: 719-578-9394
e-mail: [email protected]
22
Notes For International Users...

By default GASWorkS initially starts up using “US” units of measure. Please don’t let this discourage you,
GASWorkS supports a wide range of dimensional units which can surely meet your needs. You can set the
appropriate values by considering the following instructions.
To change the default units to be used when creating new models, select the Default Values item from the
Utilities menu list. The Default Values screen will be displayed. Select the Dimensional Units tab, the
contents of the tab will be displayed. On the Dimensional Units tab select the desired unit settings. After the
settings have been made, select the Apply Displayed Values command button to change the values in the
currently open model, or select the Save Settings command button to save the current settings for future use.
The values contained in the “standard” Property tables are entered using “US” units of measure. These values
will automatically be converted to the proper units when used with pipe elements possessing another set of
units. For example, diameter values contained in the Pipe Properties table that are entered in “Inches”, will
be converted to the equivalent size in millimeters if a pipe segment’s diameter units are set to “Millimeters”,
when required by a report or display routine. When new items are added to the Property tables, their
dimensional units can be set to any desired unit.
Note: The example models provided with GASWorkS all use “US” units of measure. To obtain valid results,
these examples must be worked using the US units. When working these examples, the default data values
and coordinate units must be set to their original US values.
GASWorkS can accommodate either a comma (,) or a dot (.) as the decimal identifier - or a comma (,) or a
dot (.) as the digit grouping identifier depending on the associated Windows setting. For example, one
thousand ten can be displayed as “10,000.10" or as “10.000,10" depending on the Windows setting.
23
24
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Menu Items
MENU ITEMS
25

This section provides a general reference for using the GASWorkS menu items. Grouped by functional topic,
procedures are described for using each of the items available in the GASWorkS menu lists. Most of the
menu items will launch a data screen or dialog box. Further information describing the use of the data screens
and dialog boxes is provided in following sections of this manual.
Some menu items have submenus associated with them, and are accessed through submenu “headers”.
Submenu headers are followed by “...” and a “right arrow” symbol. Rest or click the mouse pointer on the
header title to access the submenu. Multiple submenus may exist.
Certain menu items will be displayed if a model is not open.
File - File Management...

The GASWorkS model file management routines are grouped under the File menu heading. The routines
located under this heading are used to manage the model files only. That is, these routines manipulate the
files directly associated with a model. The contents and use of each of the GASWorkS files are described
in the Appendix of this manual.
Access to the GASWorkS support files, such as the Property Tables, is handled by the individual routines
that access or manipulate those specific files. Management routines such as copying and deleting the support
files must be performed manually by the User.
A GASWorkS model consists of a number of files each possessing the same name but varying extensions.
Some of the files represent the header, pipe, node, and customer data associated with each model, others
represent support, or other data files. A full list of the specific file extensions is contained in the Appendix.
GASWorkS manages the model files based on the name of the header file. When prompting for a model
name, GASWorkS expects the ".hdr" extension of the header file to be present. Be sure to include the ".hdr"
extension when manually entering a model name.
Only one model may be open at a time. The name of the currently opened model is displayed near the top
of the GASWorkS interface screen. Certain menu items and commands will prompt for a file name if a
function which affects a model file is executed, and a model has not already been opened. Once a model has
been opened, execution of subsequent model related routines will apply to the open model. The routines
found in the File menu list are described on the following pages...
New - Create A New Model...

The New menu item creates a new set of model files. To create a new GASWorkS model:
! Select the New item from the File menu list. The File Selection dialog box will appear.
27
! In the File dialog box, select or enter the name of the new model. If the name of an existing model is
selected or entered, a warning will appear. To overwrite an existing model, select the Yes command button.
To return to the File Selection dialog without overwriting the existing files, select the No command button.
If you choose to overwrite the model files, the contents of the original files will be sent to the Windows
Recycle Bin.
! In the File dialog box, click the Continue command button to accept the specified file name, or click the
Cancel button to exit without selecting a file.
When a valid file name has been selected or entered, GASWorkS will create and open a new header file, and
a set of empty data and support files. The contents of the header file will be similar to the last “saved” model.
The GDI will automatically open. The Graphic Data Interface window will appear. Use the appropriate GDI
commands to enter the data associated with the new model. If the GDI is not automatically opened, select
the View/Edit item from the Graphics menu list.
As new pipe and node features (records) are added, the values initially populating the new items are extracted
from the default values. The default values may be set by using the Set Defaults routine found in the Utilities
menu list.
If the path name is omitted when entering a new file name, the current drive and directory will be assigned
as the path. If the extension is omitted, the ".hdr" extension will be automatically applied.
New Project - Create A New Model...

The New Project menu item is similar to the New item, it creates a new set of model files, but also allows
various settings to selected before creating the model. To create a new GASWorkS model:
! Select the New Project item from the File menu list.
The Project Specification screen will appear.
! On the specification screen, select or enter the name

of the new model. Select the desired support file
settings. Select any desired background files to attach.
Select the Continue command button to create the
model, or click the Cancel button to exit without
selecting a file.
28
If the name of an existing model is selected or entered, a warning will appear. To overwrite an existing
model, select the Yes command button. To return to the File Selection dialog without overwriting the existing
files, select the No command button. If you choose to overwrite the model files, the contents of the original
files will be sent to the Windows Recycle Bin.
GASWorkS will create and open a new header file, and a set of empty data and support files. The contents
of the header file will be similar to the last “saved” model.
The GDI will automatically open. The Graphic Data Interface window will appear. Use the appropriate GDI
commands to enter the data associated with the new model. If the GDI is not automatically opened, select
the View/Edit item from the Graphics menu list.
As new pipe and node features (records) are added, the values initially populating the new items are extracted
from the default values associated with the specified Default Data file.
Open - Open An Existing Model...

The Open menu item opens an existing model for editing, reporting, or solution. To open an existing model:
! Select the Open item from the File menu list. The File Selection dialog box will appear.
! In the File dialog box, select or enter the name of the desired model's header file. Remember to include
the ".hdr" extension if you manually enter the name. A warning will appear if the file is not found.
! In the File dialog box, click the Continue button to accept the selected file name, or click the Cancel button
to exit without selecting a file.
When a valid file name has been selected, GASWorkS will open and read the associated model files. Once
the model is read into memory the various edit, report, and solution routines can be used to manipulate the
model. Choose the desired function to proceed. Routines that require access to a model file will automatically
prompt for a file name, if a model is not currently open.
Note: If the “Automatically Open GDI” preference is selected, the Graphic Data Interface window will
appear after a valid file name has been selected or entered.
Note: If a version 7.0 model is selected, a prompt will appear requesting whether to import the file - respond
appropriately. If the model is imported, a separate (converted) set of model files will be created with the same
name as the original file followed by a “_90" suffix.
29
Close - Close A Model...

The Close menu item “closes” the currently open model. To close the current model:
! Select the Close item from the File menu list. If changes have been made to the model, a prompt will
appear asking whether to save or discard the changes - select the appropriate response.
Note: Each time GASWorkS starts, it automatically opens the last open model file. This feature can be
disabled by closing the model before leaving GASWorkS.
Save - Save Model Changes...

The Save menu item saves the changes made to the currently open model. To save the current model changes:
! Select the Save item from the File menu list. A message will appear when the changes are saved. Select
the OK command button to clear the message.
Save As - Save Model Changes To Another Name...

The Save As menu item saves the current changes to another (different) model name and changes the name
of the currently open model to the specified name. To save the current model changes to another name:
! Select the Save As item from the File menu list. The File Selection dialog box will appear for entering the
name the new model name.
! In the File Selection dialog box, select or enter the name to save the changes to. A warning will appear if
a model with the specified name already exists. To overwrite the existing model, select the Yes command
button. To return to the File Selection dialog box without overwriting the existing model, select the No
command button. If you choose to overwrite the existing model, the contents of that model's files will be sent
to the Windows Recycle Bin.
! In the File Selection dialog box, click the Continue button to accept the specified model name, or click the
Cancel button to terminate the command.
After a valid file name has been selected, GASWorkS will copy the contents (in memory) of the currently
open model into the selected model files. Upon completion of the save process, a prompt will appear. Select
the OK command button to clear the message.
Note: The Save As command saves (copies) the contents of the data stored in memory, not the data stored
in the file on disk. To copy the data stored on disk to another destination use the Copy command.
30
Rename - Change The Name Of The Current Model...

The Rename menu item changes the name of the currently open model to another User specified name. The
name of the various files associated with the model will be changed to the specified name. Current (unsaved)
changes to the model will not be saved. To change the name of the current model:
! Select the Rename item from the File menu list. The File Selection dialog box will appear for entering the
name the new model name.
! In the File Selection dialog box, select or enter the new name. A warning will appear if a model with the
specified name already exists. To overwrite the existing model, select the Yes command button. To return
to the File Selection dialog box without overwriting the existing model, select the No command button. If
you choose to overwrite the existing model, the contents of that model's files will be sent to the Windows
Recycle Bin.
Cancel button to terminate the command.
After a valid file name has been selected, GASWorkS will change the name of the current model to the
specified name. Upon completion of the name change process, a prompt will appear. Select the OK command
button to clear the message.
Note: The Rename command changes the name of the data files stored on disk to a new User specified name,
it does not save the data stored in memory. To save the data stored in memory to another destination use the
Save As command. The Rename command does not make a copy of the disk files, but simply changes the
name of the files. Use the Copy command to make a copy of the disk files.
Copy - Copy Model Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for copying the files associated with a model. Using this routine GASWorkS
will automatically copy the various model files, to a specified destination model name. To copy the files
associated with the currently open model:
! Select the Copy item from the File menu list. The File Selection dialog box will appear for entering the
name to copy the model files to.
! In the File Selection dialog box, select or enter the name to copy the model to. A warning will appear if
a model with the specified name already exists. To overwrite the existing model, select the Yes command
button. To return to the File Selection dialog box without overwriting the existing model, select the No
command button. If you choose to overwrite the existing model, the contents of that model's files will be sent
to the Windows Recycle Bin.
31
Cancel button to terminate the Copy routine.
After a valid file name has been selected, GASWorkS will copy the contents of the source model's files into
the destination model files. Upon completion of the copy process, GASWorkS will prompt whether to open
the new model. Select the Yes command button to open the new model, or select No to leave the current
model opened.
If the “Automatically Open GDI” preferences option is selected, the Graphic Data Interface window will
appear if the new model is opened.
Note: The Copy command copies the contents of the data stored in the disk file, not the data stored in
memory. To save the data stored in memory to another destination use the Save As command.
Delete - Deleting Model Files...

The Delete menu item deletes all of the files associated with a User selected model. The deletion routine
“deletes” all of the files associated with the selected model, including its backup files. To delete an existing
model's files:
! Select the Delete item from the File menu list. The File Selection dialog box will appear.
! In the File Selection dialog box, select or enter the name of the header file associated with the model to
be deleted. Remember to include the ".hdr" extension if you manually enter the name. A warning will appear
if the file is not found. Once a valid file name has been entered or selected, select the Continue command
button to delete the selected model’s files, or click the Cancel button to end the routine.
! A message will appear asking to confirm the model's deletion, click the Yes button to delete the selected
model, or click the No button to cancel the routine.
! After the selected model has been deleted, the File Selection box will be redisplayed - either select another
model for deletion, or choose the Cancel command button to end the routine.
Note: After a valid name has been selected, GASWorkS will “delete” the contents of each file associated
with the selected model. The files are not actually deleted, but sent to the Windows Recycle Bin. The files
may be manually restored using Windows Explorer.
32
Append - Appending Model Files...

The Append menu item provides a routine for appending (joining) two models together. Before appending
two files, ensure that the models do not contain redundant node names. The appended model files will
become corrupt if redundant node names are present. The Renumber Nodes routine found in the
Miscellaneous submenu of the Utilities menu list can be used to automatically renumber or rename a model's
nodes.
All model files are appended, except that the header file of the model being appended to is retained as the
header file for the new combined model. The model to be appended to, must be open before attempting to
execute the Append routine. To append another file to the currently open model:
! Select the Append item from the File menu list. The File Selection dialog box will appear.
! In the File Selection dialog box, select or enter the name of the model to add to the currently open model.
Remember to include the ".hdr" extension if you manually enter the name. A warning will appear if the file
is not found. When a valid file name has been selected, GASWorkS will add the contents of the specified
model files to the end of the currently open model.
! When the append process is complete, a message will appear notifying whether the operation succeeded
or failed. If the process failed or the result was not as expected, close the model without saving the changes.
Bundle - (Submenu)...
GASWorkS provides a set of routines for bundling (zipping) and unbundling (unzipping) a model’s file set.
These routines are contained in the Bundle submenu.
Bundle A Model - Zipping A Model...

The Bundle A Model menu item provides a routine for bundling all of a model’s files into a single
“zip” format file. This is useful for archiving, backing up, or sharing models with others. The model
must be open before it can be bundled. To bundle the files associated with the currently open model:
! Select the Bundle A Model item from the Bundle submenu of the File menu list.
! A specification screen will appear. Select the desired options, then select the Continue command
button to proceed. Or, select the Cancel command button to exit without creating a bundle.
! A message will appear indicating whether the bundle operation succeeded or failed. Carefully note
the message, then select the OK command button to clear the message.
33
The file created by the bundle routine will be named the same as the model, except that it will end
with a “.zip” extension. The bundled file’s format is PKZip 2.04g compatible. The file may be
unbundled using the GASWorkS UnBundle routine, or it may be unzipped using any compatible file
compression program.
UnBundle A Model - Unzipping A Model...

The Unbundle A Model menu item provides a routine for unbundling a set of files contained in a
single “zip” format file. The zip file can be created either by the GASWorkS Bundle routine, or by
another zip application. To unbundle a zip file of a model:
! Select the UnBundle A Model item from the Bundle submenu of the File menu list. The File
Selection dialog box will appear.
! In the File Selection dialog box, select or enter the name of the zip file to unbundle. Remember
to include the ".zip" extension if you manually enter the name. A warning will appear if the file is
not found. When a valid file name has been selected, GASWorkS will proceed with “unzipping” or
extracting the contents of the specified zip file.
! A message will appear indicating whether the unbundle operation succeeded or failed. Carefully
note the message, then select the OK command button to clear the message.
Purge - Removing UnRequired Model Files...

The Purge menu item provides a routine for automatically removing unrequired model files, such as zero
length files and backup files. This process is referred to as purging and is useful for cleaning up a model
before archiving, backing up, or sharing models with others. The model must be open before it can be purged.
To purge the currently open model:
! Select the Purge item from the File menu list.
! A message will appear asking to confirm whether to proceed with the purge process, click the Yes button
to purge the selected model, or click the No button to cancel the Purge routine.
! A message will appear indicating whether the purge operation succeeded or failed. Carefully note the
message, then select the OK command button to clear the message.
34
Preferences - (Submenu)...
GASWorkS allows the User to specify various preferences such as default file locations, and certain User
Interface behaviors.
Paths - Setting The Default File Directories...

The Paths menu item allows the User to specify the default location of the various model and
initialization files, the property tables, and the license file location. These locations are used when
a new model is created or when a property table or file is needed. Other locations can be specified
by the User during the course of using the software. The default location is the directory or folder
that GASWorkS uses first when dealing with various file operations. To specify the preferred
locations:
! Select the Paths item from the Preferences submenu of the File menu list.
! The Path Selection dialog box will appear. Select the appropriate tab, then select the appropriate
drive and directory of the preferred location. The last open folder in the directory list indicates the
selected path location. Select the Close command button to save the changes, or select the Cancel
command button to close the dialog box without saving the changes.
Property Tables - Setting The Default Property Tables...

The Property Table menu item allows the User to specify which property tables (contained in the
selected property table path) to use with the current model. To specify the desired property table
names:
! Select the Property Table item from the Preferences submenu of the File menu list.
! The Property Table Selection dialog box will appear. Select the desired name from the displayed
file lists. Select the Change Path Setting command button to change the property table directory.
Select the Close command button to save the changes, or select the Cancel command button to close
the dialog box without saving the changes.
Options - Set User Interface Options...

The Options menu item allows the User to specify several settings which affect various behaviors
of the GASWorkS user interface. For example, one of these settings causes the Graphic Data
Interface (GDI) to automatically open and display the current model when the model is opened. To
change the option settings:
35
! Select the Options item from the Preferences submenu of the File menu list.
! The Options dialog box will appear. An option is selected when a check mark (U) is shown next
to the item in the option list. Select the Close command button to save the changes, or select the
Cancel command button to close the dialog box without saving the changes.
Facility Settings - Display/Edit Facility Settings...

The Facility Settings menu item provides access to the Facility settings. To view or edit the Facility
settings:
! Select the Facility Settings item from the Preferences submenu of the File menu list. The Facility
Descriptions screen will be displayed.
! Browse or change the displayed settings as appropriate. Select the Save As Default command
button to save the current settings as the default settings to be used when creating a new model.
Select the Close command button to save the changes, or select the Cancel command button to close
the dialog box without saving the changes.
Note: This item performs the same function as the Facility Settings menu item in the Edit menu list.
Save Current Settings...

The Save Current Settings menu item allows the current paths and preference settings to saved for
future use. To save the current settings:
! Select the Save Current Settings item from the Preferences submenu of the File menu list. The
File Selection screen will be displayed.
! Enter or select an appropriate file name and select the Continue command button to save the
settings.
36
Retrieve Saved Settings...

The Retrieve Saved Settings menu item allows previously saved path and preference settings to be
retrieved and applied. To retrieve saved settings:
! Select the Retrieve Saved Settings item from the Preferences submenu of the File menu list. The
File Selection screen will be displayed.
! Select an existing file name and select the Continue command button to retrieve and apply the
settings.
Restore A Model - Restoring Model Files...

The Restore A Model menu item provides a routine for restoring the backup copies of a model's data files.
GASWorkS automatically creates a backup copy of the various model files each time the Save routine is
used, and prior to the use of the Import or Merge routines.
To restore the backup version of the currently open model:
! Select the Restore item from the File menu list.
! A message will appear when the restoration is complete. Select the OK command button to clear the
message.
GASWorkS exchanges the contents of the original model files and the backup model files. If a model is
erroneously restored, immediately re-execute the Restore command to return the original data. Unless
instructed by the User, the current changes will not be saved before the Restore command is executed.
Restore Samples - Restoring The Sample Models...

When GASWorkS is initially installed, several sample (example) files are copied to the destination disk. As
the various examples are worked, these files will change. To restore the original (unchanged) example
models:
! Select the Restore Samples item from the File menu list.
! A message will appear when the restoration is complete. Select the OK command button to clear the
message.
37
Quick Export - (Submenu)...

GASWorkS provides a set of routines for saving the contents of the currently open model to a set of data files
in a User specified format. These routines are contained in the Quick Export submenu. The Quick Export
routines provide a simplified duplication of the functionality of the Import/Export routines.
To export the model data to a selected file format, select the desired format item from the menu list.
More information on the files that are created using the Quick Export routine is contained in the
Import/Export section of the Manual.
Exit GASWorkS - Leaving GASWorkS...

To leave GASWorkS, select the Exit GASWorkS item from the File menu list. If changes have been made
to the model, a prompt will appear asking whether to save or discard the changes, respond appropriately.
If a model is open when GASWorkS is exited, the model will automatically be reopened the next time
GASWorkS is started.
38
Edit - Entering And Editing Data...

The majority of the model data editing features are handled in the GDI or in the Standard Reports. A few
special edit routines are handled outside those functions. These routines are accessed through the Edit menu
list. The routines found in the Edit menu list are described on the following pages...
Model Notes - Editing The Model Notes...

To access the notes associated with an existing model:
! Select the Model Notes item from the Edit menu list.
The Model Notes Data screen will be displayed.
! Enter or change the model notes using standard text

editing techniques. The notes can contain up to 32,000
alphanumeric characters.
! Click the Close command button to save any changes

and leave the Model Notes data screen.
The notes can also be viewed from the Header portion

of the Standard Reports, and from the Solution data
screen.
Mass Update - Mass Updating Model Data...

The Mass Update routine allows mass changes to be made to the pipe, node, or customer data based on a
User specified selection criteria. For example, the routine could be used to set the Pipe Efficiency to .92, for
all of the pipes where the Pipe Equation value was equal to "Spitz-Low Pressure". To make a mass data
change:
! Select the Mass Update item from the Edit menu list.
The Mass Update Specification screen will be
displayed.
! Use the TAB or ENTER keys, or the mouse to select

the desired update values.
! Select the Apply command button to proceed with the

update, or select the Close button to terminate the Mass
Update routine.
39
Note: If the Allow Undo preference is selected, the original changes can be restored if an erroneous update
is performed. To restore the original data values, immediately select the Restore command button. The
Restore command button will only be enabled if Allow Undo preference is selected.
Property Tables - Editing Look-Up Tables...

GASWorkS uses Property (look-up) Tables to maintain common information associated with Pipe, Valve,
Regulator, Fitting, Compressor, and Well type elements. An extensive set of "standard" tables is supplied
with GASWorkS. The contents of the standard tables are described in the Appendix. To add to or modify
the standard tables:
! Select the Property Tables item from the Edit menu

list. The Property Tables Report will appear.
! To edit the data values associated with a specific

table, select the associated tab. The contents of the
associated table will be displayed.
! Enter or change the desired data using the TAB or

ENTER keys, or the mouse to move between the data
fields.
! Click the Add or Insert icon to add a new record to

the current table, or use the Delete icon to delete a record from the current table.
! Use the scroll bars to negotiate the table.
! When you are done making changes, select the Close command button. A prompt will appear to save or
discard the changes, select the appropriate value.
The Data Screens section of the manual provides a detailed description of the features associated with the
Property Table Report.
Note: This item performs the same function as the Property Table item on the Report menu list.
Facility Settings - Display/Edit Facility Settings...

The Facility Settings menu item provides access to the Facility settings. To view or edit the Facility settings:
! Select the Facility Settings item from the Edit menu list. The Facility Descriptions screen will be
displayed.
40
! Browse or change the displayed settings as
appropriate. Select the Save As Default command
button to save the current setting as the default settings
to be used when creating a new model. Select the Close
command button to save the changes, or select the
Cancel command button to close the dialog box without
saving the changes.
Note: This item provides the same function as the

Facility Settings menu item in the Preference submenu
of the File menu list.
41
Analysis - Calculating Values...

The GASWorkS calculation routines are grouped under the Analysis menu heading. The routines located
under this heading are used to solve a single model file, or calculate gas properties based on a gas
composition. The routines found in the Analysis menu list are described on the following pages...
Solve Single Model - Solving A Single Model...

Solving a model involves calculating the unknown pressure and flow values. To solve a GASWorkS model:
! Select the Solve Single Model item from the Analysis menu list. The Solution Data screen will be
displayed.
! Enter the appropriate data using the TAB or ENTER

keys, or the mouse to move between the data fields.
! Once the appropriate data has been entered, select the

Solve command button to proceed with the solution.
The Solution Log screen will appear.
! When the solution routine is complete, click the

Close command button to close the solution screen and
return to the GASWorkS editing environment.
During the solution, a log of the solution activity is

written to a file known as a “Solution Log” file. The log
file has the same name as the model it is associated
with, however the extension is ".slg". The contents of
the log file may be viewed or printed using the Solution
Log menu item found in the Report menu list.
The Data Screens section of the manual provides a

detailed description of the features associated with both
the Solve Data screen, and the Solution Log screen.
42
Calculate Gas Properties - Calculating Gas Properties...

GASWorkS provides a routine for calculating the gas properties (specific gravity, viscosity, heating value,
and specific heat ratios) from a gas composition. The routine can be used to calculate properties for the
current model, or any other case. To use the gas properties calculation routine:
! Select the Calculate Gas Properties item from the Analysis menu list. The Gas Properties screen will
appear.
! To enter values for a new composition, first select the Clear command button to reset all of the item values
to zero. Enter the appropriate item values, then select the Calculate command button to calculate the new
property values.
Note: Some of the solution calculations require that a gas properties file be created and saved with the same
name as the model. The Calculate Gas Properties routine can be used to create the required file. Additionally,
the gas properties can be set and calculated for individual nodes. The Data Screens section of the manual
fully describes the contents and features associated with the Gas Properties screen.
Note: The Gas Properties screen can also be accessed from the Default Settings screen or from the Node Data
screen.
GASCalc...
If the GASCalc software is installed in its normal location, it can be accessed using the GASCalc menu item
in the Analysis menu list. If GASCalc is not installed or is installed in a non-standard location, the menu item
will be disabled.
Select the GASCalc menu item from the Analysis menu list to open the GASCalc program. Close or minimize
GASCalc when finished.
43
Report - Viewing And Printing Data...

The GASWorkS report routines are grouped under the Report menu heading. The routines located under this
heading are used to view and print the data contained in the model and support files.
Each report provides scroll bars which allow browsing of the report. The Data Screens section of the manual
provides detailed descriptions of the features associated with the various report screens.
The routines found in the Report menu list are described on the following pages...
Standard (All) - Reporting Model Data...

The Standard report routine creates a set of standard format reports of the header, pipe, node, and customer
data associated with a model. The report provides a separate section for each data type (header, pipe, node,
customer). Portions of the report format may be configured by the User. If customer features are not present,
the customer report will not be displayed. To create a standard report:
! Select the Standard (All) item from the Report menu list. If a model has not been previously opened, the
File Selection dialog box will appear.
! If the File Selection dialog box appears, select or enter the name of an existing model's header file.
Remember to include the ".hdr" extension if you manually enter the file name.
! When a valid file name has been selected, or if a model is already open, the standard Report screens will
appear as a stack.
! Click on a portion of the desired report to move it to the front of the report stack. Or, select the desired
report from the Window menu list to move it to the front of the report stack.
! Adjust the scroll bars with the mouse, to browse

through a report.
! To edit a data value, click the "cell" containing the

desired value. An edit box will appear in the selected
cell. Press the ENTER (5) key, or click another cell to
save the change.
! To close a specific Report screen, click the Close

This Report command button on the desired report. To
close all of the Report screens, click the Close All
Reports command button on any of the screens.
44
The Data Screens section of the manual provides a detailed description of the features associated with the
Standard Report screens.
Standard (Select) - (Submenu)...

Report screens can be displayed individually by using the menu items in the Standard (Select) submenu. See
the Standard (All) menu item for additional information on working with the Standard reports.
Customer
The Customer menu item allows the User to display only the Customer Report.
Header
The Header menu item allows the User to display only the Header Report.
Node
The Node menu item allows the User to display only the Node Report.
Pipe
The Pipe menu item allows the User to display only the Pipe Report.
Summary - Creating A Summary Report...

The Summary Report routine provides a choice of certain predefined data and result summaries. To create
a Summary report:
! Select the Summary item from the Report menu list. The Summary Report Options screen will be
displayed.
! Place a check mark (U) next to the options to include in the report.
! Click the Report command button to proceed with the report, or the Close command button to exit. Once
the Summary Report has been created, the Summary Report screen will appear.
45
! Adjust the scroll bars with the mouse to browse
through the report.
! To close the Summary Report screen, click the Close

command button.

detailed description of the features associated with the
Summary Report
Connectivity - Creating A Connectivity Report...

GASWorkS provides a routine for reporting how the nodes are interconnected. This relationship between
the nodes is referred to as the "connectivity". To create a Connectivity report:
! Select the Connectivity item from the Report menu list. After processing the file, the Connectivity Report
will be displayed

through the report.
! Click the Close command button to leave the

Connectivity Report screen.

Connectivity Report.
Property Tables - Reporting Look-Up Table Data...

See the Property Table item under the Edit menu description.
Note: This item performs the same function as the Property Table item on the Edit menu list.
46
Data Check - Finding & Reporting Data Errors...

The Data Check item allows the results of a previously performed data check to be viewed. To view the
results of a data check:
! Select the Data Check item from the Report menu list. The Data Check Report will be displayed.

through the report.
! Click the Close command button to leave the Data

Check report screen.

Data Check Report.
Solution Log - Viewing A Solution Log...

During execution of the solution, a log file is created which contains the activity of the solution process. The
name of the log file is the same as the model with the extension of ".slg". To view the contents of a Solution
Log file:
! Select the Solution Log item from the Report menu list. The Solution Log Report will be displayed.

through the report.
! Click the Close command button to close the Solution

Log Report.

Solution Log Report.
47
Set Report Options - Setting Report Options...

GASWorkS allows the User to specify various report format options, such as the number of decimal places
that are used when displaying the various data and analysis results, or the increment value for the display of
the pressure drop per unit length value. These settings are referred to as the Report Options. To set the Report
Options:
! Select the Set Report Options item from the Utilities

menu list. The Report Options data screen will appear.
! Specify the desired settings using the TAB or ENTER

! Click the Close command button to exit and save

your changes.

Report Options data screen.
48
Graphics - Accessing The Graphic Data Interface...

The Graphic Data Interface (GDI) allows graphical entry and editing of the various data associated with a
model. The GDI provides a map style display of the model and allows point-and-click access to the
associated model data. The features associated with the GDI are fully described in the Graphical Data
Interface section of this manual.
Various GDI functions are located under the Graphics menu heading. The routines found in the Graphics
menu list are described on the following pages...
View/Edit - Viewing & Editing Data ...

GASWorkS provides graphical access to the model data and schematic through the GDI screen. If the model
data was entered graphically, or the nodes have otherwise been assigned coordinates, a schematic of the
model will appear on the GDI screen. To access the GDI Graphics screen:
! Select the View/Edit item from the Graphics menu

list. If a model has not been previously opened, the File
Selection dialog box will appear.
! If the File Selection dialog box appears, select or

enter the name of an existing model's header file.
Remember to include the ".hdr" extension if you
manually enter the name. A warning will appear if the
file is not found.
! When a valid file name has been selected, or if a

model is already open, the GDI window will appear.
! Use the Scroll icon to pan the view of the schematic, or select one of the zoom icons from the View toolbar
to enlarge or reduce the view of the schematic.
! Select one of the data access or edit icons to edit and view the model data.
! Select the Close icon to close the GDI window.
49
Settings - Changing Graphic Settings...

Several of the settings that control the behavior of the GDI are set using the Graphics Settings routine. The
settings are accessed through the Graphic Settings data screen. To access the Graphic Settings screen:
! Select the Settings item from the Graphics menu list.

The Graphic Settings screen will appear.
! Enter the desired values, then click the Close

command button to save the changes and exit the
screen.
The features associated with the Graphic Settings

screen are fully described in the Graphic Data Interface
section presented later in this manual.
Background Settings - Set A Background Image...

Various image formats can be used as a background to a model's schematic. The assignment and control of
the background images are performed using the Background Settings routine. To attach, remove, or modify
the display of a background image:
! Select the Background Settings item from the

Graphics menu list. The Background Specifications
screen will be displayed.
! To attach an image, select one of the “Attach”

command buttons. Select the desired file name from the
File Selection dialog box when it appears.
! To remove an image, select the file to be removed

from the attached files list, then select the Remove
command button.
! Select the Apply command button to immediately

apply the current settings to GDI. Select the Close command button to save the changes and close the data
screen.
The features associated with the Background Specification screen are fully described in the Graphic Data
Interface section presented later in this manual.
50
Save Display As BMP - Saving The Displayed Image...

The currently displayed GDI image can be saved to a bitmap file for use with other applications. To save the
GDI display to a bitmap file:
! Select the Save Display As BMP item from the Graphics menu list. The File Selection dialog box will
appear.
! In the File Selection dialog box, select or enter the name of the file to save the image in. Remember to
include the ".bmp" extension if you manually enter the name. When a valid file name has been selected, the
image will be saved.
! A message will appear indicating whether the file was successfully saved or not. Carefully read the
message contents. Select the OK command button to clear the message box.
Save Display To Clipboard - Copying The Displayed Image...

The currently displayed GDI image can be saved (copied) to the Windows graphic clipboard. This allows
the image to be pasted into another graphic application. To copy the GDI display to the clipboard:
! Select the Save Display To Clipboard item from the Graphics menu list.
! A message will appear when the image has been successfully copied to the clipboard. Select the OK
command button to clear the message box.
51
Utilities - Using The Utility Routines...

GASWorkS provides several routines for performing various model support functions, these features are
referred to as Utility routines. They include routines for setting default values and report options, as well as
various other routines. The Utility routines are grouped under the Utilities menu heading. These routines are
described on the following pages...
Set Defaults - Setting Default Values...

The initial data and unit values used to populate the various data fields are referred to as the “default data”.
These values may be specified by the User. To specify the Default data values:
! Select the Set Defaults item from the Utilities menu

list. The Default Data Values screen will appear.
! Select the desired data tab.
! Enter the appropriate data using the TAB or ENTER

! Click the Close command button to leave the Default

Data Values screen and save your changes.
Note: The Set Defaults routine is most commonly used

to set default data and dimensional units before entering
data. The default values will be used when a new feature is added. However, the routine can also be used to
change the values for existing features by selecting the appropriate Apply Values command button. Be careful
using the “Apply” command buttons when features already exist in the model - all associated values will be
changed to the specified default values. The Data Screens section of this manual provides a detailed
description of the features associated with the Defaults data screen.
Customer (Submenu) - Customer Data Routines...

The Customer submenu contains several customer management routines. These included the ability to attach
an external database file, update external loads, and to manipulate an attached database using Standard Query
Language commands. These routines are grouped under the Customer menu heading.
52
Attribute File - Setting An Attribute File...

GASWorkS maintains various model related customer data as part of its model files. It allows non-
model data (referred to as attribute data), to be contained in an external data base file. The required
connection information is specified using the Customer Attribute File routine. To attach (or un-
attach) an attribute file:
! Click on the Attribute File item from the Customer submenu

of the Utilities menu list. The Customer Attribute Settings
screen will appear.
! Make the desired settings, then select the Close command

button to leave the screen and save the changes.
The features associated with the Customer Attribute Settings

screen are fully described in the Data Screens section of this
Manual.
Update External Loads - Assign And Update Node Loads...

Customer loads are assigned To Node loads through the external node load parameter. Sometimes,
especially after new data has been imported or changed using the SQL update routine, these
assignments need to be updated. The Update External Loads routine provides two functions, first
if an external attribute file is attached the routine will update the total load value for each of the
customers, second it will reassign the total load value for each of the customers to the appropriate
external node value. To update the load assignments:
! Click on the Update External Loads item from the Customer Data sub submenu of the Utilities
menu list.
! If an external attribute file is attached, a message will appear asking whether to set the customer
total load value to zero where a match is not found in the attribute file. Select Yes to zero the loads,
or select No to leave unmatched features unchanged.
! A message will appear when the update is complete. Select OK to clear the message.
53
Execute SQL Statement - Update Attribute Values...

If a customer attribute file is attached, values in the attribute file can be changed using an SQL
statement. SQL is an acronym for Standard Query Language which is a special language for
manipulating and modifying data in a SQL compatible database. This feature is useful for changing
customer load values contained in the attribute file, based on special a relationship or calculation
method. To update values in an attribute file:
! Click on the Execute SQL Statement item from the Customer

Data submenu of the Utilities menu list. The SQL Definition
screen will appear.
! Enter the desired SQL statement. Then select the Execute

command button to execute the statement.
! A message will appear when the statement processing is complete. Select OK to clear the message.
Pipe (Submenu) - Pipe Data Routines...

The Pipe submenu contains several pipe management routines. These include the ability to attach an external
database file, and to manipulate an attached database using Standard Query Language commands. These
routines are grouped under the Pipe menu heading.
Attribute File - Setting An Attribute File...

GASWorkS maintains various model related pipe data as part of its model files. It allows non-model
data (referred to as attribute data), to be contained in an external data base file. The required
connection information is specified using the Pipe Attribute File routine. To attach (or un-attach)
an attribute file:
! Click on the Attribute File item from the Pipe Data submenu
of the Utilities menu list. The Pipe Attribute Settings screen will
appear.
! Make the desired settings, then select the Close command

button to leave the screen and save the changes.
The features associated with the Pipe Attribute Settings screen

are fully described in the Data Screens section of this Manual.
54
Execute SQL Statement - Update Attribute Values...

If a pipe attribute file is attached, values in the attribute file can be changed using an SQL statement.
SQL is an acronym for Standard Query Language which is a special language for manipulating and
modifying data in an SQL compatible database. To update values in an attribute file:
! Click on the Execute SQL Statement item from the Pipe Data
submenu Utilities menu list. The SQL Definition screen will appear.
! Enter the desired SQL statement. Then select the Execute

command button to execute the statement.
! A message will appear when the statement processing is

complete. Select OK to clear the message.
Import/Export - Importing And Exporting Files...

GASWorkS provides various import and export routines for exchanging data with other applications through
a variety of file formats. These routines are controlled through the Import/Export Specification screen. The
features associated with the screen are described in the
Import/Export section of this manual. To import or
export model data:
! Select the Import/Export item from the Utilities menu

list. The Import/Export screen will appear.
! Select the desired file format from the File Type list.
! Click the Import command button to translate data

from the specified file format into a GASWorkS format.
Or, click the Export command button to translate
GASWorkS data into another file format. Either
selection will cause the Import/Export File Selection
screen to appear.
! Select the desired target and source files.
! Click the Continue button to proceed with the

translation, or click the Cancel command button to exit
without performing the translation.
55
! Depending on the specified file type, additional data screens may appear to further define the import or
export specification. After the translation is complete, click the Close command button to exit the
Import/Export routine.
Data Check - Checking Model Data...

GASWorkS provides an extensive data verification routine. The routine checks for out-of-bounds conditions
as well as general data entry and connectivity errors. The data check routine is controlled through the Data
Check screen. The features associated with the screen are described in the Data Screen section of this
manual. To perform a check of a model's data:
! Select the Data Check item from the Utilities menu list, the Data Check screen will appear.
! Enter the appropriate check values using the TAB or

ENTER keys, or the mouse to move between the check
boxes and data fields.
! Click the Check command button to proceed with the

data check. When the check is complete, a message box
will appear.
! A message will appear indicating whether errors were

encountered. If errors were found, click the Yes command button to view
the error report, or click the No command button to exit without viewing
the report.
! Click the Close command button to exit the Data Check routine.
56
Miscellaneous (Submenu)...
Several routines are provided to perform miscellaneous utility functions. These routines are contained in the
Miscellaneous submenu. These routines are described in the following:
Check Connectivity...
GASWorkS maintains model connectivity information on a continuous basis as features are added
and removed from the model. Occasionally however, this connectivity information may become
corrupt. This can happen if a solution is abnormally terminated, or if the pipe or node data files are
manipulated by an outside application. GASWorkS provides a routine for checking for corrupt
connectivity. Additionally, the routine will delete any unused nodes found in the node data. To check
the model connectivity:
! Select the Check Connectivity item from the Miscellaneous submenu of the Utilities menu list.
!A message box will appear when the check is complete. Select the OK command button to clear
the message.
Renumber Nodes...
GASWorkS provides a routine that allows a model's node numbers (names) to be automatically
changed based on User specified criteria. The routine is controlled through the Renumber dialog box.
To renumber a model's nodes:
! Select the Renumber Nodes item from the Miscellaneous submenu of the Utilities menu list. The
Renumber dialog box will appear.
! Enter the desired starting number and increment value, then

click the Renumber command button to proceed with the
renumbering process.
! A message will appear when the renumbering is complete.

Select the OK command button to clear the message.
! Select the Close command button to exit the Renumber dialog

box.
The features associated with the dialog box are described in the Data Screens section of this manual.
57
Calculate XY’s...
GASWorkS provides a routine that allows XY coordinate values to be automatically added to a file
that does not already possess coordinate values. This routine is intended to provide rough coordinate
values to a text only style model. To add coordinates to a model:
! Select the Calculate XY’s menu item from the Miscellaneous submenu of the Utilities menu list.
The XY Calculation Specification screen will appear.
! Enter the name of the desired starting node, then click the
Calculate command button to proceed with the coordinate
calculation.
! A message will appear when the calculation is complete.

Select the OK command button to clear the message.
! Select the Close command button to exit the XY Calculation screen.
Sort Model...
GASWorkS provides a variety of sorting options for reordering the pipes and nodes in the model
data files. The sort features are controlled through the Sort Specification dialog box. To sort the
currently open model's data files:
! Select the Sort Model menu item from the Miscellaneous

submenu of the Utilities menu list. The Sort Specification dialog
box will appear.
! Select the desired sort method from the list, then click the
Sort button to proceed with the coordinate modification.
! A message will appear when the sort is complete. Select the OK command button to clear the
message.
! Click the Close command button to exit the dialog box.
The features associated with the dialog box are described in the Data Screens section of this manual.
58
Window - Window (Screen) Access Utilities...

Several utilities are provided for arranging and accessing open windows (screens). These routines are
grouped under the Window menu heading. These routines are described in the following sections...
Arrange Icons - Arranging Icons...

When several screens are minimized to an icon, it is sometimes helpful to have the icons automatically
arranged for easier viewing. Select the Arrange Icons item from the Window menu list to automatically
arrange any displayed icons. The icons will be placed along the bottom of the GASWorkS main screen.
Arrange Windows - Arranging Open Screens...

When several screens are open and overlapping, it is sometimes helpful to have the screens automatically
arranged for easier viewing. Select the Arrange Windows item from the Window menu list to automatically
arrange any open screens. The screens will be placed in a stacked arrangement.
Windows List - Accessing Open Screens...

A list of open screens is placed at the bottom of the Window menu list. When several screens are open and
overlapping, it is sometimes difficult to access a specific screen. A screen may be easily and quickly accessed
by selecting its name from the window list. When a screen name is selected, it is moved on top (or in front)
of the other screens.
59
Help - Using The On-Line Help Routines...

GASWorkS provides an extensive On-Line Help system which describes various examples and how-to tips.
The help system is design to compliment the documentation contained in the User’s manual - not replace it.
The help routines are grouped under the Help menu heading. These routines are described in the following
sections...
Contents - Accessing The Help Topics...

The items or subjects contained in the GASWorkS On-Line Help system are referred to as “topics”. The
topics are accessed through the Help Topics screen. This screen contains three tabbed sections which provide
three separate methods for accessing the contents of the help system. The easiest and quickest method of
accessing a specific topic is by using the help index. To access a topic using the help index:
! Select the Contents item from the Help menu list. The Help Topics screen will appear.
! Click on the Index tab. The help index list will be

displayed.
! Type the first few letters of the subject or item that

you would like to find. Any matching items in the list
will be displayed at the top of the list. Or, use the scroll
bar to scroll through the list until you find the subject or
item that you are interested in.
! When the desired subject has been found, select the

Display command button. If only one topic is associated
with the subject, the topic will be displayed
immediately. If more than one topic is associated with
the subject, a list of related topics will be displayed.
Select the desired topic from the list and select the
Display command button to view the topic.
! On the topic display screen, select the Print

command button to print the contents of the topic. Or, select the Exit item from the File menu list to close
the topic display screen.
60
Using Help - Instructions For Using Help...

If you need help understanding how to use and navigate the On-Line Help system, select the Using Help item
from the Help menu list. When selected the Help Topics screen will appear. Click on the Contents tab, a table
of contents will appear. Select the Using Help “book” from the list by double clicking on the associated book
icon. Now either select a topic contained in the book, or select the Print command button to print the contents
of the Using Help book.
Technical Support (Submenu) - How To Reach Us...

Several support options are contained in the Technical Support submenu. These items are described in the
following...
Contact Information...
To display our contact information:
! Select the Contact Information menu item from the Technical Support submenu of the Help menu
list. The Contact Information dialog box will appear.
! Select the OK command button to close the screen.
Request Registration Number...

If for some reason the registration number becomes corrupt or needs to be replaced, the number can
be requested using this menu item. To request a registration number:
! Select the Request Registration Number menu item from the Technical Support submenu of the
Help menu list. An email will be generated and displayed requesting the new number. Review the
contents of the email, “send” the email after making any desired changes.
! We will process the request and respond at our earliest convenience.
61
Send Help Request...
To generate a request for technical help:
! Select the Send Help Request menu item from the Technical Support submenu of the Help menu
list. A blank email will be generated and displayed. Describe the nature of your problem or issue in
the body (content) section of the email. When possible, it is best to attach a bundled copy of the
model to the email. After completing the problem description and attaching the bundled model,
“send” the email.
! We will reply to the help request at our earliest convenience.
Note: The help will request will automatically attach a file containing the About GASWorkS
information, and optionally a bundle (.zip file) of the model to the email.
View Demonstration Guide...

Depending on the how GASWorkS was installed. A electronic copy (“PDF” version) of the Demonstration
Guide may have been installed in the GASWorkS application directory. If the guide was installed, select this
item to display its contents. A Portable Document File (PDF) viewer/reader must be installed on the machine
to use this option.
If the guide was not installed during the installation process, a copy of the guide may be manually
downloaded, or copied from the installation CD, to the GASWorkS application directory (“\program
files\gasworks9\app”).
View User’s Manual...

Depending on the how GASWorkS was installed. A electronic copy (“PDF” version) of the User’s Manual
may have been installed in the GASWorkS application directory. If the manual was installed, select this item
to display its contents. A Portable Document File (PDF) viewer/reader must be installed on the machine to
use this option.
If the manual was not installed during the installation process, a copy of the manual may be manually
downloaded, or copied from the installation CD, to the GASWorkS application directory (“\program
files\gasworks9\app”).
About GASWorkS - Setup And Version Information...

Select this item to display version and setup information about your current GASWorkS installation.
62
Menu Map...
The following lists a “map” of the GASWorkS menu structure:
GASWorkS Menu Map...

File New
New Project
Open
Close
Save
Save As
Rename
Copy
Delete
Append
Bundle... Bundle A Model
Unbundle A Model
Purge
Preferences... Paths
Property Tables
Options
Facility Settings
Save Current Settings
Retrieve Saved Settings
Restore A Model
Restore Samples
Quick Export... To ASCII File Set
63
To DBF 3.0 File Set
To DBF 4.0 File Set
To DBF 5.0 File Set
To GASWorkS 7.0
To MDB Database
To SHP File Set
To XLS 4.0 Worksheet Set
To XLS 5.0 Workbook
Exit GASWorkS
Edit Model Notes
Mass Update
Property Tables
Facility Settings
Analysis Solve Single Model
Calculate Gas Properties
GASCalc
Report Standard (All)
Standard (Select)... Customer
Header
Node
Pipe
Summary
Connectivity
Property Tables
Data Check
Solution Log
Report Options
64
Graphics View/Edit
Settings
Background Settings
Save Display As Bitmap
Save Display To Clipboard
Utilities Set Defaults
Customer Data... Attribute File
Update External Loads
Execute SQL Statement
Pipe Data... Attribute File
Execute SQL Statement
Import/Export
Data Check
Miscellaneous... Recalc Connectivity
Renumber Nodes
Calculate XY’s
Sort Model
Window Arrange Icons
Arrange Screens
Help Contents
Using Help
Technical Support... Contact Information
Request A Registration Number
Send Help Request
View Demonstration Guide
View User’s Manual
About GASWorkS
65
66
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Data Screens
DATA SCREENS
67

The previous section described the function of the GASWorkS menu items. In that section, numerous data
and specification screens, and dialog boxes were introduced. This section provides a detailed description of
many of those screens, and dialog boxes. Separate sections are also provided for the more extensive routines
and functional groups.
Instructions for negotiating the data screens, and for entering and selecting data values are provided in the
General section found earlier in this manual. The following pages present a description for each of the
general screens. The descriptions are listed in alphabetical order based on the screen name.
69
Bundle Specification...
A routine is provided that allows the various files associated with a model to be “bundled” (zipped) into a
single file. The bundle process is controlled by the Bundle Specification screen. The features associated with
the screen are described below:
Data Items...
Include Assigned Property Tables - This item indicates whether the currently assigned Property Tables
should be included in the bundled file. Select (check) this item to include the Property Tables.
Include Attached Background File - This item indicates whether any attached background image files are
to be included in the bundled file. Select (check) this item to include the background files.
Include Model Files - This item indicates whether the model files are to be included in the bundled file.
Select (check) this item to include the model files.
Command Buttons...
Continue - Select this command button to create the bundle file. A message box will appear when the
process is complete.
Cancel - Select this command button to close the screen without creating a bundle file.
70
Usage Notes...
! The file created by the bundle routine will be located in the same directory as the model, will have the
same name as the model, and will end in a “.zip” extension. The bundled file’s format is PKZip 2.04g
compatible. The file can be unbundled (unzipped) using the Unbundle A Model routine found in the Bundle
submenu of the File menu list, or it may be unzipped using any compatible file compression program.
71
Connectivity Report...
The interconnectivity of a model may be displayed and printed using the Connectivity Report screen. The
features associated with the screen are described below:
Command Buttons And Icons...
Close - Select this command button to close the report screen.
Find - Select this icon to execute a routine that finds a record in the report by node name. When
selected, the Find dialog box will appear. In the dialog box, enter the desired node name, then
select the Search command button to find the record. To find another occurrence of the node
name, select the Find Next command button.
Go To - Select this icon to execute a routine that displays a specific record number at the top of
the report. When selected, the Go To dialog box will appear. In the dialog box, enter the record
number to be retrieved, then click the Continue command button to go to the corresponding
record.
Maximize Window Size - Select this icon to cause the report’s window size to be increased to
fill the GASWorkS display screen.
Normalize Window Size - Select this icon to cause the report’s window size to be “normalized”
or reduced to its standard size.
72
Print - Select this icon to execute a routine that prints the contents of the report. When selected,
the Print Control box will appear. In the dialog box, make any desired adjustments to the printer
settings, then select the Print command button to proceed with printing.
Controls...
Scroll Bars - The horizontal scroll bar (the bar directly beneath the viewing screen) is used to move the
display right and left. The report contents may be wider than the display window, the horizontal scroll bar
allows viewing of the off-display portions of the report.
The vertical scroll bar (the bar directly to the right of the viewing screen) is used to move up and down in
the report. The vertical bar allows the report to be browsed by adjusting the bar's slider.
The scroll bars may be adjusted by moving the bar’s "slider" with the mouse, or by clicking on the arrow
symbols associated with the specific bar. Large changes in the display can be made by clicking on the desired
bar, either before or after the slider's position.
Usage Notes...
! The number of columns in the report will vary according to the largest number of connected nodes.
! If the report is too wide to print, reduce the column widths by adjusting their width using the mouse, set
the printer to use landscape mode, and reduce the printer font size. If no adjustment is made to the report’s
width, the report will be printed on multiple pages.
73
Customer Data Report...

When selected, the Standard Report routine creates several report sections, one each for the contents of the
header, customer, node, and pipe data files. The unique features associated with the customer section of the
Standard Report are presented below:
Ascending Sort - Select this icon to sort the records in ascending order based on the Link ID
number values.
Clear - Select this icon to clear the current selection set. When selected, all reportable customer
records will be displayed in the report.
Close All Reports - Select this command button to close all sections of the standard report.
Close This Report - Select this command button to close the customer report while leaving any other
sections of the standard report open.
74
Descending Sort - Select this icon to sort the records in descending order based on the Link ID
number values.
Delete Customer - Select this icon to delete the currently selected customer record.
Find - Select this icon to find a record in the report by Link ID Number. When selected, the Find
dialog box will appear. In the dialog box enter the desired Link ID Number, then select the Search
or Find Next command button to find the record.
Find Customer In GDI - Select this icon to find and flag the currently selected customer record
in the GDI. This icon is only displayed if the GDI is open before the report is opened.
Go To - Select this icon to display a specific record number at the top of the report. When
selected, the Go To dialog box will appear. In the dialog box enter the record number to be
retrieved, then click the Continue command button to go to the corresponding record.
Oops (Undelete) - Select this icon to undelete a recently deleted customer record.
Print - Select this icon to print the contents of the report. When selected, the Print Control box
will appear. In the dialog box, make any desired adjustments to the printer settings, then select
the Print command button to proceed with printing.
Restore - Select this icon to restore the display of all of the columns. When selected all of the
columns associated with the report will be displayed.
Select - Select this icon to create a selection set of customers which meet a specified selection
criteria. When selected, the Selection Specification dialog box will appear, enter the desired
selection criteria, perform the selection, then select the Close command button to create the
corresponding selection set.
75
Set - Select this icon to specify which columns to display in the report. When selected, the
Columns dialog box will appear. Select (check) the heading names associated with the data items
to be displayed, then select the Close command button to update the changes in the report.
Undo - Select this icon to “undo” a recent data change.
Edit Controls...
Edit Box/List - Values shown in the report may be edited by clicking in the data cell associated with the
desired value. When a data cell is “clicked”, an edit box or list will be displayed depending on the item type.
To enter a new value, type it in the edit box, then press the ENTER (5) key, or click another cell to save the
change - or, select an item from the list.
Report Controls...
Usage Notes...
! In addition to using the Set command to specify which columns are to be displayed, the report can also be
modified by adjusting or "collapsing" a column. To adjust a column, place the mouse cursor on the vertical
line separating the desired column from the next adjacent column. The cursor will change appearance. While
holding down the left mouse button, drag the column line to the new desired position. To collapse a column,
follow the procedures outlined above, except that when dragging the column line, drag it all the way to the
left - the column will then be collapsed.
! To make the customer report activate (the window on the top of the report stack), click on any visible
portion of report's screen, or select the report from the Window menu list.
76
! Normally the report contains more information than will fit on the printer. If this condition occurs when
trying to print, a warning will appear. When the warning appears, select the desired option. To print a report
that is too wide for the printer, try using the following suggestions:
Eliminate some of the uninteresting columns from the report using the Set command, or by manually
collapsing undesired columns.
Reduce the width of the displayed columns by dragging the vertical column separators as previously
described above.
Set the printer page orientation to Landscape.
Set the printer font to a proportional font like Arial Narrow, and set the font size to a smaller font.
If no change is made to the report’s width, the report will be printed on multiple pages.
! The Report item in the facility settings controls which features are included in the report. Only customers
attached to pipes that are assigned Facility Types that are allowed to be reported, are included in the report.
The facility settings can be viewed and changed using the Facility Settings item found in the Edit menu list,
or the Report Options item found in the Report menu list.
! If an attribute file is attached, the contents of the file will be displayed in the “attribute” portion of the
report. Depending on the type of file attached, the attribute data values may or may not to be allowed to be
edited.
! Only data items associated with customers attached to pipes that are assigned Facility Types that are
“active” can be edited in the report. The facility settings can be viewed and changed using the Facility
Settings item found in the Edit menu list.
77
Data Check...
The Data Check routine is controlled through the Data Check Specification screen. The features associated
with the screen are described below:
Pipe Data Items...
Connectivity - If this option is selected (checked), it indicates that the model connectivity will be included
in the data check.
Minimum (Data Fields) - A group of data fields used to specify the minimum (entered) value for the
adjacent data item. Type an appropriate value in the edit box.
Maximum (Data Fields) - A group of data fields used to specify the maximum (entered) value for the
Pipe Data - If this option is selected (checked), it indicates that the pipe data values will be included in the
data check.
Pipe Properties Table - If this option is selected (checked), it indicates that a check will be performed to
ensure that each Size/Type value found in the pipe data, exists in the appropriate Look-Up Table.
78
Node Data Items...
Check For Large Flow Balance Errors - If this option is selected (checked), it indicates that large node
errors will be reported.
Node Data - If this check box is selected (checked), it indicates that the node data values will be included
in the data check.
79
Customer Data Items...
Customer Data - If this check box is selected (checked), it indicates that the customer data values will be
included in the data check.
80
Other Data Items...
Only Include Facilities Set To Report - If this option is selected (checked), only features associated with
Facilities Types that are set for reporting, will be included in the data check.
Graphically Flag Items With Errors - If this option is selected (checked), flag symbols are placed on
features that contain errors. The flags can be viewed in the GDI. Use the Clear Error Flags GDI command
to turn the error flags off.
Command Buttons...
Check - Select this command button to execute the data check routine. A message will appear when the
check is complete. If errors are encountered, a prompt will appear to display the error report. Select the
appropriate response.
Close - Select this command button to close the Data Check screen without performing the check.
81
Usage Notes...
! The Data Check routine allows the model data to be screened for out-of-bounds, connectivity, and general
errors. The routine does not perform any corrections of the data, it only identifies the errors it encounters and
creates a report of its findings. Some of the checks performed, are described in the following table:
Check Type Reported Errors

Connectivity Pipes with bad node record numbers.
Node connected to more than four pipes.
Node connected to more than six pipes.
Node not connected to any pipe.
Node connected to itself.
Redundant pipes.
Dead-end node with zero load value.
Customer Missing attribute file (if assigned).
Corrupt supply main assignment.
Invalid dimensional units.
Positive Per Unit Load value.
Out-of-bounds values. Values that either exceed the specified maximum value, or
are less than the specified minimum value.
Warning if Status set to “off”.
Multiple customers at the same location.
Invalid Link ID value.
Node Missing or empty node data file.
Redundant node names.
Both pressure and load values known or unknown.
82
Check Type Reported Errors
Multiple nodes at the same location.
Warning if Status is set to “off” for Base or External Load.
Pipe Missing or empty pipe data file.
Missing Property Tables.
Invalid From or To Node record numbers.
Size/Type not found in the Property Tables.
Multiple Size/Type matches in the Property Tables.
Invalid pipe flow equation value.
Warning if Status set to “off”.
Large diameter to length ratio.
Elevation difference greater than length value.
Invalid equivalent length value.
Invalid regulator or compressor set pressure.
Unusual known/unknown settings at the outlet of regulators and compressors.
Invalid compressor efficiency value.
Invalid or zero valve opening setting.
Invalid well count, equation coefficient or exponent value.
Unsupported hydraulic type.
Invalid or redundant Link ID value.
! If errors are encountered during the check, a message will appear. If the error message appears, select the
Yes command button to view the report.
83
! To view or print the error report at other times, select the Data Check item from the Reports menu list.
! When the Pipe Property Table option is selected, the check routine will search the Pipe Property Table for
each Size/Type (diameter) value found in the pipe data file. If the value is not found, an error will be
generated. If the value is found, the check routine will check the Inside Diameter value to see if it falls within
the specified Diameter Minimum and Maximum limits. If actual inside diameter values are entered for the
Size/Type value, instead of Size/Type codes, do not select the Pipe Properties Table option.
84
Data Check Report...

Errors encountered during the Data Check routine are written to a file known as the “Data Check” file. The
file contains a log of the errors which were encountered during the check. The contents of the file can be
viewed using the Data Check Report screen. The features associated with the screen are described below:
85
Controls...
The scroll bars may be adjusted by moving the bar’s "slider" with the mouse, or by clicking on the Arrow
86
Default Data Values...

The default data values are used to initially populate the pipe and node data values when creating a new
model or adding new features to an existing model. These values are set using the Default Data Values
screen. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Hydraulic Data Items...
Allow Pipe Sizing - This item specifies the default pipe sizing option. This setting is used to indicate which
pipes are to be sized when the Calculate Pipe Sizes option is selected during a solution. Select (check) the
option to indicate that the pipes should be sized. Or, unselect (uncheck) the option to indicate the pipes
should not be sized.
Node Base Load - This item specifies the default node base load value. Enter the desired value by typing
it in the data field. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit. Use a negative value
to indicate a demand (flow leaving the system). Or, use a positive value to indicate a supply (flow entering
the system). If customer features will be used with the model, set the default load value to zero.
87
Select the “Value Is Unknown” option adjacent to the label as appropriate. Select (check) the option to
indicate that the value is unknown. Or, unselect (uncheck) the option to indicate that the value is known.
Node Elevation - This item specifies the default node elevation value. Enter the desired value by typing it
in the data field. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit.
Node Pressure - This item specifies the default node pressure value. Enter the desired value by typing it in
the data field. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit. Adjacent to the Pressure
label are the know/unknown settings, click on the desired setting.
Node Temperature - This item specifies the default node (gas flowing) temperature value. Enter the desired
value by typing it in the data field. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit.
Adjacent to the Temperature label are the know/unknown settings, click on the desired setting.
Pipe Efficiency - This item specifies the default pipe efficiency value. Enter the desired value by typing it
in the data field. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit.
Pipe Equation - This item specifies the default pipe flow equation. Select the desired value from the list.
Pipe Size/Type - This item specifies the default pipe size/type (diameter) value. Enter the desired value by
selecting it from the list, or type the desired value in the data field. If the value represents an actual inside
diameter value, ensure that the value corresponds to the current dimensional unit.
88
Gas Properties Data Items...
Heating Value - This item specifies the default Heating Value. Enter the desired value by typing it in the
data field. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit.
Specific Gravity - This item specifies the default Specific Gravity value. Enter the desired value by typing
it in the data field.
Specific Heat Ratio - This item specifies the default Specific Heat Ratio value. Enter the desired value by
typing it in the data field.
Viscosity - This item specifies the default Viscosity value. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data
field. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit.
Select the “Values Are Unknown” option as appropriate. Select (check) the option to indicate that the values
are unknown. Or, unselect (uncheck) the option to indicate that the values are known.
89
Dimensional Units...
Dimensional Units - These items specify the dimensional units for the associated data item. Select the
desired value from the list.
90
Miscellaneous Data Items...
Node Increment - This item specifies the node name/number increment. Type the desired value in the edit
box, or select the desired value from the list.
Pipe Facility Type - This item specifies the default Facility Type. Select the desired value from the list.
Pipe Sizing Group - This item specifies the default Sizing Group. Select the desired value from the list.
Command Buttons...
Apply All Values - Select this command button to apply all of the current default values to all of the pipes
and nodes in the currently open model. This routine is useful when a new model is created using the wrong
default data values and settings.
91
Apply Displayed Values Only - Select this command button to apply the current default values associated
with the currently displayed data tab, to all of the pipes and nodes in the currently open model. This routine
is useful when only a specific set of the default values need to be set or changed (for example, to reset the
dimensional units).
Close - Select this command button to close the Default data screen and save the currently displayed settings.
Cancel - Select this command button to close the Default data screen without saving changes.
Calculate Properties From Composition - Select this command button to calculate the gas properties from
a known composition. When selected, the Gas Properties Calculation screen will be displayed, enter the
appropriate data, calculate the property values, select the Apply command button to apply the new values and
return to the Default Data screen.
Retrieve Settings - Select this command button to retrieve previously saved settings. When selected, the File
Selection dialog box will appear. Enter the desired name, then select the Continue command button to apply
the saved settings and return to the Default Data screen.
Save Settings - Select this command button to save the current settings to a data file for use at a later time.
When selected the File Selection dialog box will appear. Enter the desired name, then select the Continue
command button to return to the Default Data screen.
Usage Notes...
! The default data values are used to initially populate the pipe and node data items when a new feature is
added. Select default values that are most commonly used for the system being modeled. These values and
settings may need to be changed from time to time depending on the nature of the current model.
! Any of the default values may be overridden as the new features are entered (if the Query New Feature
Entry option is selected), or after the data has been entered using any of the data editing features.
! Customer default data is handled different from the pipe and node data. When a new customer is added,
the data associated with the last customer in the database is used to populate the appropriate data fields for
the new customer. When creating a new model And manually entering customer features, remember to set
the data for the first customer to appropriate values, before adding additional customers.
92
Facility Settings...
The facility items and settings associated with a model are managed using the Facility Descriptions report.
The features associated with the report are presented below:
Add Record - Select this icon to add a new record to the end of the facility list. After the new
record is added, enter new data by clicking in the associated data cell. An entry box or data list
will appear. Type the desired value, or select a value from the list. Press the ENTER (5) key or
click in another cell to save the change.
Apply - Select this command button to close the report, apply and save any changes.
Cancel - Select this command button to close the report without saving any changes.
Delete Record - Select this icon to delete the currently “selected” record.
Insert Record - Select this icon to insert a new record just before the current record location.
After the new record is inserted, enter new data by clicking in the associated data cell. An entry
box or data list will appear. Type the desired value or select a value from the list. Press the
ENTER (5) key or click in another cell to save the change.
93
Move A Record - Select this icon to move the currently selected record to a new position in the
facility list.
Open Facilities List - Select this icon to open a previously saved facilities list.
Save Facilities List - Select this icon to save the currently displayed facilities list to a file other
than the current model. Once saved the list can be opened and used with other models.
Save As Default - Select this command button to save as the default used when creating a new model.
Edit Controls...
Report Controls...
94
Usage Notes...
! The report lists the facility types associated with the current model or opened file, and their associated
settings. The settings control how the data features associated with specific type are handled by the various
report, display, edit, and solution routines. The settings are described in the following table:
Setting Description...
Display Indicates whether data features associated with the Facility Type will be displayed
in the GDI work area.
Solve Indicates whether data features associated with the Facility Type are included in
the solution process. Be careful when excluding features from the solution process,
a non-solvable configuration may result when excluding portions of the piping
system.
Report Indicates whether data features associated with the Facility Type will be included
in the various report routines.
Active Indicates whether data features associated with the Facility Type can be changed
using the various edit routines. Generally all features associated with a non-active
Facility Type, are excluded from the edit routines. The exception is, that if the
Ignore Facility Settings On Mass Update preference is selected, all records will be
included in changes made by the Mass Update routine.
Color Indicates the color to use to display pipes associated with the Facility Type, when
the pipe color is set to “Facility Table”.
Line Style Indicates the line style to use to display pipes associated with the Facility Type,
when the pipe line style is set to “Facility Table”.
Line Width Indicates the line width to use to display pipes associated with the Facility Type,
when the pipe line width is set to “Facility Table”.
! To set a color value, click in the associated data cell. Click The Select A Color... item from the data list.
The Color Selection dialog box will be displayed. Select a color, then select the OK command button to close
the dialog box and set the color.
! Facility Types are primarily assigned to pipe data features. The node and customer features inherit the
Facility Type of the pipe that they are associated with or assigned to.
! Nodes can be associated with several pipe features, and each pipe potentially could possess different
Facility Types and settings. In these cases the node handling varies according to the routine. If at least one
associated pipe possess a Facility Type that allows a process, then the node is allowed in any associated
activities. For example, if at least one pipe is set to display, the node is displayed - if at least one pipe is set
to report, the node is reported, etc.
95
File Selection...
GASWorkS uses two types of file selection dialog boxes - one type is used for accessing model (header)
files, one is for accessing support and other file types. The general features of the File Selection dialog boxes
are described below:
Data Items...
Filename - This item specifies the name of the file to be used. A list of the most previously used files can
be accessed by clicking on the arrow symbol adjacent to the edit box. The filename can be entered by various
means - type the desired name in the edit box, select the desired name from the last used files list, or use the
Drives, Directories, and Files menu lists to select the file. If the name is typed, include the path and
extension. Names longer than the field will be scrolled to the left. Use the Right and Left Arrow keys to view
the off-display contents.
Extension values will vary according to the file type. Access to a model’s files is managed through the
model's header file. To access the model files, include the ".hdr" extension on the filename.
96
Drives - This item specifies the disk drive to look in. Select the desired drive from the list. When a drive is
selected, the directories contained on that drive will be listed in the Directories list box.
Directories - This item specifies the directory (folder) on the selected disk drive to look in. Select the desired
directory from the list. When a directory has been selected, any files matching the specified extension or
search pattern will be displayed in the Files list box.
Files - This item lists matching files found in the selected directory (folder) on the selected disk drive. Select
the desired file from the list. When a file has been selected, two methods may be used to proceed. The first,
press the ENTER (5) key to display the selected file in the Filename data field. The name may then be
modified if desired. When satisfied with the filename value, click the Continue command button or press the
ENTER (5) key to proceed. The second way to proceed is to double click on the desired file. This method
will cause the highlighted file to be immediately selected, and the File Selection dialog box to be closed.
File Statistics - This item displays various information about the currently selected (highlighted) file. The
contents of the display will vary depending on the type of selected file. This item is only displayed for model
file selection.
Preview - This item displays a graphic preview of the selected file. This item is only displayed for model
file selections.
Command Buttons...
Continue - Select this command button to accept the selected file and close the File Selection dialog box.
Cancel - Select this command button to cancel the file selection and close the File Selection dialog box.
Selecting this button will also cancel the routine that invoked the dialog.
Usage Notes...
! Depending on the routine invoking the dialog box, the response to errors which may occur while selecting
a file will vary. If the routine requires a new file name and an existing file name is selected, the dialog will
prompt whether the file is to be overwritten. If the routine requires the name of an existing file and the name
of a non-existent file is specified, the dialog will respond with either a warning that the file does not exist,
or will prompt whether the file should be created depending on the nature of the calling routine.
! Wild card characters may be entered in the Filename data field, to alter the contents of the Files list box.
Valid characters are "*" for multi-character replacement, and "?" for single character replacement.
97
! Drive, Directory, and Filename values must correspond to the standard “DOS” format. That is, drive letters
must be followed by a colon ":". Directories must be separated by a back slash "\". Extensions must be
proceeded by a dot ".".
! When manually entering a value in the Filename data field, include the drive, full path name, filename,
and extension values.
! The name of the currently model is displayed near the top of the GASWorkS interface screen.
! If an existing file is chosen to be “overwritten”, the file is not actually destroyed, it is sent to the Windows
Recycle Bin.
98
Find Dialog Box...

The Find routine is used by many of the data and report screens to locate a record based on a search string.
The features of the Find dialog box are described below:
Data Items...
Search Value - This item specifies the value to search for. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data
field. The title of this field and the meaning of the value varies depending on the item being search for, and
which routine opened the dialog box.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the Find dialog box without performing a search.
Find Next - If this command button is enabled, select it to search for another occurrence of a previously
specified search string.
Search - Select this command button to begin the search.
Usage Notes...
! When executed the first time, searching begins from the start of the file, for a record matching the search
criteria. If a match is found, the matching record is made current. To find other occurrences, re-execute the
Find routine and select the Find Next command button. If no match is found, a warning will appear. Click
the OK button to clear the warning.
! When the Find Next button is selected, searching begins at the last matching record, then searches to the
end of the file. If no match is found, the search begins again at the beginning of the file and continues until
a match is found, or the entire file has been searched.
! The searched value varies depending on the data screen or report invoking the Find routine. For pipe data,
both the From or To Node names are searched. For node data, the node name values are searched.
99
Gas Properties...
GASWorkS provides a routine for calculating the Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Specific Heat Ratio, and
Viscosity based on a gas composition. The routine can be accessed from several locations - from the Analysis
menu list, from the Default Data screen, or from the Node Data screen. The features associated with the Gas
Properties screen are described below:
Data Items...
Gas Composition (Components) - This group of items represent the individual components (expressed in
mole percent) found in the gas mixture. The total of the individual mole percent values must equal one
hundred (100). Enter the appropriate values by typing them in the corresponding data field.
100
Heating - This item displays the calculated Heating Value. The adjacent list represents the dimensional unit
for the heating value. Select the desired dimensional unit value from the list.
Heating Value Method - This item indicates which method to use for the Heating Value calculation. Select
the desired method from the list.
Specific Gravity - This item displays the calculated Specific Gravity value. The Specific Gravity as used
by GASWorkS represents the relative density or weight of the gas mixture compared to dry air (dry air has
a specific gravity of one (1.000). The Specific Gravity is a dimensionless number.
Specific Heat Ratio - This items displays the calculated Specific Heat Ratio value. The Specific Heat Ratio
as used by GASWorkS represents the ratio of the constant volume Specific Heat Value to the constant
pressure Specific Heat Value for the gas mixture. The Specific Heat Ratio is a dimensionless number.
Viscosity - This item displays the calculated Viscosity value. The adjacent list represents the dimensional
unit for the Viscosity value. The Viscosity as used by GASWorkS refers to the absolute or dynamic viscosity
of the gas mixture. Select the desired dimensional unit value from the list.
Command Buttons...
Apply - The function of this button varies depending on the source that opened the screen. If the screen was
accessed from the Analysis menu, selecting this button applies the calculated gas properties values to all of
the nodes in the current model. If the screen was accessed from the Default Data screen, selecting this button
will apply the calculated values to the default gas properties. If the screen was accessed from the Node Data
screen, selecting this button will apply the calculated values to the currently selected node.
Calculate - Select this button to calculate the various gas property values.
Clear - Select this command button to clear all of the currently displayed values. This button is useful when
calculating values for a new composition.
Close - Select this command button to close the screen.
Open - Select this command button to retrieve a previously saved gas properties file.
Print - Select this command button to print the contents of the screen.
Save - Select this command button to save the contents of the screen to a gas properties file.
101
Usage Notes...
! Some of the options to the solution routine require that a single gas properties file be saved for the model.
This screen can be used to create the required file - select the Save command button and use the model name
for the gas properties file.
! The combined sum of the mole percent values of all of the individual components must equal one hundred
(100.00). Use the "Other" data field to enter any remainder required to force a perfect total. The "Other" data
field can also be used to accommodate a component not available in the Component list. The "Other" data
value has no influence on the calculated values, it is only used to allow for a perfect composition total.
! The gas property values are calculated at the model’s currently set base conditions.
102
Header Data Report...

header, customer, node, and pipe data files. The unique features associated with the header section of the
Close This Report - Select this command button to close the header report while leaving any other sections
of the standard report open.
Maximize Window Size - Selecting this icon will cause the report’s window size to be increased
to fill the GASWorkS display screen.
Normalize Window Size - Selecting this icon will cause the report’s window size to be
“normalized” or reduced to its standard size.
103
View/Edit Notes - Select this icon to cause the Model Notes edit and viewing screen to be displayed. When
the screen is displayed, edit the notes as desired, then select the Close command button on the Notes screen
to save the changes. The Model Notes screen is described later in the manual.
Controls...
Scroll Bar - The vertical scroll bar (The bar directly to the right of the viewing screen) is used to move up
and down in the report. The vertical bar allows the report to be browsed by adjusting the bar's slider.
The scroll bar may be adjusted by moving the bar's "slider" with the mouse, or by clicking on the Arrow
Usage Notes...
! To make a specific section of the Standard report active, click on any visible portion of the desired
section's screen - or, select the desired report from the Window menu list.
! The Header report screen may be maximized, minimized, or resized to assist in viewing.
! The header data cannot be edited from the report screen. Use the Solve data screen to edit the header data.
104
Mass Update...
Mass changes can be made to the model data. This type of change is referred to as a “mass update”. The
Mass Update routine is controlled using the Update Specification screen. The features associated with the
screen are described below:
Data Items...
Set - This item specifies the data item to be changed. Select the desired item from the list.
Equal To - This item specifies the new value for the selected Set item. Enter the desired value by either
typing the value in the edit box, or select the value from the list. The characteristics of this item change
depending on the Set item value. For some items the Equal To item will display an edit box (for typing a
value), and for some items the Equal To item will display a drop-down list box (for selecting a value).
Where - This item specifies the data item to be used as the search item during the query selection. Select the
desired item from the list.
Is - This item specifies the search operator to be used during the query selection. The search operator
specifies the relation between the Where and To values, except in the case of the “All” operator. When the
All operator is selected, the values of the Where and To values are ignored - in this case the change is applied
to all data features associated with the selected Set item. Select the desired value from the list.
105
To - This item specifies the value to be used as the check value during the query selection. Enter the desired
value by either typing the value in the edit box, or select the value from the list. The characteristics of this
item changes depending on the Set item value. For some items the To item will display an edit box for
typing a value, and for some items the To item will display a drop-down list box for selecting a value.
Saved Specification - This item lists previously saved query specifications. Select the desired specification
from the list.
Command Buttons...
Apply - Select this command button to make the change.
Restore - Select this command button to execute the “Undo” command and restore the data values just prior
to the executed change.
Delete Displayed Specification - Select this command button to delete the specification currently displayed
in the saved specification list.
Save Current Specification - Select this command button to save the specification currently displayed in
the Where, Is, To edit boxes.
Usage Notes...
! If the Allow Undo preference is selected, erroneous changes to the model data can be “undone” by
immediately selecting the Restore command button after the change is made.
! The meanings of the search operators are:
Operator Action Applies To

= Equal To - All Set items with a Where value that is Both numeric and string
equal to the To value will be changed. values.
<> Not Equal To - All Set items with a Where value that is Both numeric and string
not equal to the To value will be changed. values.
< Less Than - All Set items with a Where value that is Numeric values only.
less than the To value will be changed.
106
> Greater Than - All Set items with a Where value that is Numeric values only.
greater than the To value will be changed.
<= Less Than Or Equal To - All Set items with a Where Numeric values only.
value that is less than or equal to the To value will be
changed.
>= Greater Than Or Equal To - All Set items with a Where Numeric values only.
value that is greater than or equal to the To value will
be changed.
All All items associated with the selected Set item will be Any
changed.
Ends All items which end with the specified “Ends With” String values only.
With value will be changed.
Like All items which contain the specified “Like” value will String values only.
be changed.
Max All items contained in the specified maximum group Numeric values only.
will be changed.
Min All items contained in the specified minimum group Numeric values only.
will be changed.
Not Like All items which do not contain the specified “Not Like” String values only.
value will be changed.
Starts All items which start with the specified “Starts With” String values only.
With value will be changed.
! Use the Diameter item to allow a pipe size (actual inside diameter) to be typed. Use the Size/Type item
to select a pipe size from the values contained in the Pipe Property Table. Or, use the Size/Type (Unlisted)
item to type a Size/Type value not included in the Pipe Property Table.
! Certain items allow a color value to be set. To set the color value for an item, select the Click To Select
Color... item from the Equal To data list, the Color Selection dialog box will appear. Select the desired color,
then select the OK command button to close the Color screen.
107
Model Notes...
Notes and reference information about an analysis or model may be kept using the Model Notes feature. The
notes are accessed through the Model Notes edit screen the features associated with the screen are described
below:
Command Buttons And Controls...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the screen without saving any changes.
Close - Select this command button to close the screen and save any changes.
Scroll Bar - The vertical scroll bar (The bar directly to the right of the edit area) is used to move up and
down in the notes. The vertical bar allows the notes to be browsed by adjusting the bar's slider.
Print - Select this command button to print the contents of the model notes. When selected, the Print Control
dialog box will be displayed. Enter the appropriate settings, then select the Print command button to print
the contents.
108
Usage Notes...
! The notes can be edited by using basic text edit functions to type in the desired contents. The editor
supports standard Windows cut and paste commands (CTRL-C , CTRL-X, and CTRL-V) as well as the other
standard editing commands controlled by the Enter, Backspace, Delete, and Arrow keys. The editor will
automatically wrap the text if the line is longer than the available viewing space. To cause a specific line
break, press the ENTER (5) key at the end of the desired line. The TAB keys do not function within the
editor.
109
Node Data Report...

header, customer, node, and pipe data files. The unique features associated with the node section of the
Ascending Sort - Select this icon to sort the records in ascending order based on the node name
values.
Clear - Select this icon to clear the current selection set. When selected, all reportable node
Close This Report - Select this command button to close the node report while leaving any other sections
Descending Sort - Select this icon to sort the records in descending order based on the node name
values.
110
Find - Select this icon to find a record in the report by node name. When selected, the Find dialog
box will appear. In the dialog box enter the desired node name, then select the Search or Find
Next command button to find the record.
Find Node In GDI - Select this icon to find and flag the currently selected node record in the
GDI. This icon only appears if the GDI is open when the report is opened.
columns associated with the node report will be displayed.
Select - Select this icon to create a selection set of nodes which meet a specified selection criteria.
When selected, the Selection Specification dialog box will appear, enter the desired selection
criteria, perform the selection, then select the Close command button to create the corresponding
selection set.
111
Edit Controls...
Report Controls...
Scroll Bars - The horizontal scroll bar (The bar directly beneath the viewing screen) is used to move the
The vertical scroll bar (The bar directly to the right of the viewing screen) is used to move up and down in
Usage Notes...
! Unused (extra) node names may appear in the node report depending on when the report is viewed. This
is normal - the unused nodes will be removed from the node data file during the solution process.
! To make the node report activate (The window on the top of the report stack), click on any visible portion
of the report's screen, or select the report from the Window menu list.
! The dimensional unit for the Atmospheric Pressure is automatically set to the same unit as the Base
Pressure unit.
112
! The report contains more information than will fit on the printer. If this condition occurs when trying to
print, a warning will appear. When the warning appears, select the desired option. To print a report that is
too wide for the printer, try using the following suggestions:
described above.
! The Report item in the facility settings controls which features are included in the report. Only nodes
attached to pipes that are assigned Facility Types that are allowed to be reported, are included in the report.
The facility settings can be viewed and changed using the Facility Settings item found in the Edit menu list,
or the Report Options item from the Report menu list.
! Only data items associated with nodes attached to pipes that are assigned Facility Types that are “active”
can be edited in the report. The facility settings can be viewed and changed using the Facility Settings item
found in the Edit menu list.
113
Path Settings...
The default directory locations for the various files associated with the GASWorkS model and support files
is controlled using the Path Settings specification screen. The features associated with the screen are
described below:
Data Items...
Current Setting - These items specify the current setting for the associated file type. Use the Drive and
Directory items to change the current setting. Select the desired tab to display the associated setting.
Drive - This item lists the available disk drives. Select a drive from the list.
Directories - This item lists the directories associated with the selected drive. Select a directory from the list.
The last open “folder” indicates the selected directory.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the screen without saving the current settings.
Close - Select this command button to close the screen and save the current settings.
114
Usage Notes...
! The path settings establish the default location of the various GASWorkS model and support files. The
model file path can be “overridden” when selecting a file using the File Selection dialog box. All other paths
indicate locations used by GASWorkS to find the necessary support files. These directories can only be
changed using the Path Settings routine.
! The License path indicates where the valid license file is located. In general, the default (as installed)
location should be used, except where a network installation is used. In that case follow the supplemental
network installation instructions for correctly setting License directory.
! The path and preference settings can be saved using the Save Current Settings item from the Preferences
submenu of the File menu list.
115
Pipe Data Report...

When selected the Standard Report routine creates several report sections, one each for the contents of the
header, customer, node, and pipe data files. The unique features associated with the pipe section of the
Ascending Sort - Select this icon to sort the records in ascending order based on the From Node
name values.
Clear - Select this icon to clear the current selection set. When selected, all reportable pipe
Close This Report - Select this command button to close the pipe report while leaving any other sections
Descending Sort - Select this icon to sort the records in descending order based on the From
Node name values.
116
Delete Pipe - Select this icon to delete the currently selected pipe record.
Find - Select this icon to find a record in the report by node name. When selected, the Find dialog
box will appear. In the dialog box enter the desired From or To Node name, then select the Search
or Find Next command button to find the record.
Find Pipe In GDI - Select this icon to find and flag the currently selected pipe record in the GDI.
This icon is only displayed if the GDI is open before the report is opened.
Oops (Undelete) - Select this icon to undelete a recently deleted pipe record.
columns associated with the report will be displayed.
Select - Select this icon to create a selection set of pipes which meet a specified selection criteria.
When selected, the Selection Specification dialog box will appear, enter the desired selection
criteria, perform the selection, then select the Close command button to create the corresponding
selection set.
117
Edit Controls...
Report Controls...
Usage Notes...
! To make the pipe report activate (The window on the top of the report stack), click on any visible portion
of the report's screen, or select the report from the Window menu list.
118
! The report contains more information than will fit on the printer. If this condition occurs when trying to
print, a warning will appear. When the warning appears, select the desired option. To print a report that is
too wide for the printer, try using the following suggestions:
described above.
! The Report item in the facility settings controls which features are included in the report. Only pipes
assigned Facility Types that are allowed to be reported, are included in the report. The facility settings can
be viewed and changed using the Facility Settings item found in the Edit menu list, or the Report Options
item from the Report menu list.
! If an attribute file is attached, the contents of the file will be displayed in the “attribute” portion of the
report. Depending on the type of file attached, the attribute data values may or may not be able allowed to
be edited.
! Only data items associated with pipes that are assigned Facility Types that are “active” can be edited in
the report. The facility settings can be viewed and changed using the Facility Settings item found in the Edit
menu list.
119
Preference Settings...
Various GASWorkS program behaviors can be set using the Preference Settings specification screen. The
Data Items...
Allow Undo Of Graphic/Data Changes - Selecting this item allows graphic and data changes to be reversed
(undone) using the Undo command. Select (check) this item to implement this behavior. If this item is not
selected, erroneous changes must be manually corrected.
Automatically Display GDI Command List - Selecting this item causes the GDI Command List to be
automatically displayed each time the mouse pointer is passed over its associated icon. Select (check) this
item to implement this behavior. If this item is not selected, the Command List icon must be selected to
display the Command list.
Automatically Open GDI - Selecting this item causes the GDI to be automatically opened each time a model
is opened or GASWorkS is opened. Select (check) this item to implement this behavior.
Automatically Save At Timed Increments - Selecting this item causes the model data in memory to be
saved to the associated disk file at User specified increments. Select (check) this item to implement this
behavior.
120
Automatic Save Increment - When the Automatically Save At Timed Increments option is selected, this
item specifies the time increment between “automatic saves”. Enter a value by typing it into the edit box. The
value should be expressed in terms of minutes.
Display Reminders - Selecting this item will cause additional prompts to appear during certain commands
and routines providing reminders to the User. Select (check) this item to implement this behavior.
Ignore Facility Settings On Mass Update - Selecting this item will cause all data features to be included
in the mass update routines. Select (check) this item to implement this behavior. If this item is not selected,
only items associated with Facilities set to “active”, will be included in the mass update routines.
Save Model Data Before Solving - Selecting this item will cause the current model data to be saved to disk
before the solution is executed.
Show Pop-Up Menu On GDI Right Mouse Click - Selecting this item will cause the Pop-Up GDI menu
list to be displayed when the right mouse button is clicked and no command is executing, while working in
the GDI.
Show Tooltips - Selecting this item will cause tooltips to be displayed when the mouse pointer is rested over
an icon, menu item, command button, or data entry field or list. Select (check) this item to implement this
behavior.
Use Command Alias File - Selecting this item will cause command alias values to be read from the
“Command Alias File”. When this item is selected, alias values are read from the command alias file, and
can then be used by typing them on the Command Line. Select (check) this item to implement this behavior.
Command Buttons...
Usage Notes...
! When the Automatically Save At Timed Increments preference is selected. The model will be saved at time
increments as specified by the Automatic Save Increment.
! The path and preference settings can be saved using the Save Current Settings item from the Preferences
submenu of the File menu list.
121
Project Specification...
The Project Specification screen is displayed when the New Project menu item is selected from the File
menu list. The screen allows several settings to be specified when creating a new model. The features
associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items...
Attach A Linked Customer Attribute File - Selecting this item will cause a linked customer attribute file
to be created and attached to the new model.
Attach A Linked Pipe Attribute File - Selecting this item will cause a linked pipe attribute file to be
created and attached to the new model.
Background Files - Displays a list of attached background files. Select the Select From Existing DXF Files
command button to attach files.
Default Settings - Specifies the default settings file to be associated with the new model. Select a previously
saved file from the list, or select Default to use the settings associated with the most previously open model.
122
Facility Settings - Specifies the facility settings file to be associated with the new model. Select a previously
saved file from the list, or select Default to use the currently saved “default” file.
Header Template - Specifies the name of an existing header file to use a “template” for creating the new
model. Only header files associated with models contained in the current Model Files Path are displayed.
Select a name from the list, or select Default to use the currently saved “default” file.
Model Name - Specifies the name for the new model. Type the desired name or select the Select From
Existing Models command button to select an existing model name.
Pipe/Main Sizing Table - Specifies the Pipe Properties table to use when calculating pipe sizes in the
solution routine. Select a table from the list.
Preference Settings - Specifies the preference settings file to be associated with the new model. Select a
previously saved file from the list, or select Default to use the current path and preference settings.
Service Sizing Table - Specifies the Pipe Properties table to use when calculating service sizes. Select a
table from the list. This option only appears on certain versions of the software.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the screen without creating a new model.
Continue - Select this command button to close the screen and create a new model based on the specified
settings.
Retrieve - Select this command button to open an existing specification file.
Save - Select this command button to save the current settings to a specification file.
Select From Existing DXF Files - Select this command button to open the File Selection dialog box and
select an existing DXF image filename.
Select From Existing Models - Select this command button to open the File Selection dialog box and select
a model filename.
Usage Notes...
! Only DXF style background image files may be attached using the Project Specification. To attach other
type background files, use the Background Settings menu item from the Graphics menu list, after the model
has been created and opened.
123
! When one of the “Attach A Linked Attribute File” items are selected, an appropriate linked database file
will be attached to the model when it is created. See the Attribute Data section later in this manual for more
information on working with linked attribute files.
! A Default Settings file can be created using the Default Data Values data screen. Select the Default
Settings menu item from the Utilities menu list to open the screen. See the data screen description for the
Default Data Values screen for more information on creating and saving a file. If the Default item is selected
for the Default Settings, the values associated with the most recently open model will be used.
! A Facility Settings file can be created using the Facility Settings report screen. Select the Facility Settings
menu item from the Edit menu list to open the screen. See the data screen description for the Facility Settings
screen for more information on creating and saving a file. If the Default item is selected for the Facility
Settings, the values associated with the most recently open model will be used.
! A Preference Settings file can be created using the Save Current Settings item from the Preferences
submenu of the File menu list. If the Default item is selected for the Facility Settings, the values associated
with the most recently open model will be used.
124
Property Table Selection...

The various Property Tables used by GASWorkS can be set using the Property Table Selection screen. The
Data Items...
Current Property Path - This item displays the current Property Table path setting. The path can be
changed by selecting the Change Path Setting command button.
Desired Tables - This group of items specifies the currently selected Property Tables. Select a table from
the list. The contents of each list represents the tables found in the Current Property Path.
125
Command Buttons...
Usage Notes...
! When moving a model from one machine to another, the Property Table may not be valid on the new
machine, and may not contain the same information as the previous tables. When moving a model to another
machine it is recommended that the model is first bundled using the Bundle A Model item from the Bundle
submenu of the File menu list, using the Include Property Tables option. Move the bundled file and unbundle
it using the UnBundle A Model item from the Bundle submenu of the File menu list, this will move both the
model and property tables.
126
Print Control - (long form)...

GASWorkS uses two printer control screens. The “long form “appears when the "Print" icon is selected from
the standard report screens. The Print Control box allows various printer specifications to be set by the User.
The features associated with the (long) Print Control box are described below:
Data Items...
Bottom Margin - This item specifies the distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the printed
report. Type the desired value in the data field. The value is expressed in the currently specified printer
dimensional units.
Collate Pages - When this item is selected, it indicates that copies will be collated. That is, the copies will
be grouped together - the header report - the node report pages 1, 2, 3... - the pipe report pages 1, 2, 3... - the
customer report pages 1, 2, 3...
127
(Font) Name - This item specifies the name of the font to be used when printing the report. The value is set
using the Font dialog box. Click in the data field to open the Font dialog box. Select the desired settings in
the dialog box, then select the OK command button to save the changes and close the Font dialog box.
(Font) Size - This item specifies the size of the font to be used when printing the report. The value is set
the dialog box, then select the OK command button to save the changes and close the Font dialog box. The
size is expressed in printer points. One printer point is approximately equal to 1/72 of an inch.
Grid Format - When this option is selected, the report will be printed using a grid (spreadsheet) style
format. When selected the additional options located below the Grid Format option are enabled.
Include Items - This group of options indicates which reports to print.
Landscape Orientation - When this option is selected, the report will be printed in landscape orientation
on the page.
Left Margin - This item specifies the distance from the left side of the page to the left side of the printed
dimensional units.
Number Of Copies - This item specifies the number of copies to be printed. Enter a value greater than zero.
Print Dimensional Units - When this option is selected, the dimensional units for data items which can be
assigned individual units, will be included in the printed report. Un-select this setting to suppress the printing
of all of the dimensional unit values. This option is only available when the Grid Format option is selected.
Print Grid Lines - When this option is selected, grid lines will be printed on the report. Printing grid lines
enhances the readability of the report, but their inclusion also increases the print time. This option is only
available when the Grid Format option is selected.
Print Page Numbers - When this option is selected, page numbers will be included in the printed report.
Print Record Numbers - When this option is selected, it indicates that record numbers will be included in
the printed report. This option is only available when the Grid Format option is selected.
Printer - This item specifies the currently selected printer. To change the selection, select a printer from the
list or select the Printer Setup command button.
Record Format - When this option is selected, the report will be printed using a record (document) style
format.
128
Right Margin - This item specifies the distance from the right side of the page to the right side of the printed
dimensional units.
Top Margin - This item specifies the distance from the top of the page to the top of the printed report. Type
the desired value in the data field. The value is expressed in the currently specified printer dimensional units.
Command Buttons...
Print - Select this command button to proceed with printing the report.
Printer Setup - Select this button to open the Printer Setup dialog box. The contents of the dialog box will
vary depending on the selected printer and the configuration of the computer system. Make any desired
setting changes, then select the OK command to return to the print control dialog box.
Cancel - Select this command button to cancel the print routine. Depending on the status of the current print
activities, the print routine may not terminate immediately.
Usage Notes...
! The dimensional units for the margin values are set by selecting the Set Report Options item from the
Report menu list.
129
Print Control - (short form)...

GASWorkS uses two printer control screens. The “short form” appears when the "Print" icon is selected from
one of the “non-standard” report screens. The Print Control box allows various printer specifications to be
set by the User. The features associated with the (short) Print Control box are described below:
Data Items...
dimensional units.
(Font) Name - This item specifies the name of the font to be used when printing the report. The value is set
the dialog, then select the OK command button to save the changes and close the Font dialog box.
130
(Font) Size - This item specifies the size of the font to be used when printing the report. The value is set
the dialog, then select the OK command button to save the changes and close the Font dialog box. The size
is expressed in printer points. One printer point is approximately equal to 1/72 of an inch.
Landscape Orientation - When this option is selected, the report will be printed in landscape orientation
on the page.
dimensional units.
Printer - This item specifies the currently selected printer. To change the selection, select a printer from the
list or select the Printer Setup command button.
dimensional units.
Command Buttons...
Print - Select this command button to proceed with printing the report.
setting changes, then select the OK command to return to the print control dialog box.
Cancel - Select this command button to cancel the print routine. Depending on the status of the current print
activities, the print routine may not terminate immediately.
Usage Notes...
! The dimensional units for the margin values are set by selecting the Set Report Options item from the
Report menu list.
131
Query Specification...
The Select routine found in the Standard report, the Color By Query routine, and the Flag Items routines
found in the GDI allow selection of data features based on a User specified selection criteria. These selection
sets are created using the Query Specification screen. The features associated with the screen are described
below:
Data Items...
(Where) Left Item - This item specifies which data item is to be used as the search item during the query
selection. Select the desired item from the list.
(Is) Middle Item - This item specifies the search operator to be used during the query selection. The search
operator specifies the relation between the Where and To values, except in the case of the “All” operator.
When the All operator is selected, the values of the Where and To fields are ignored - in this case all data
features associated with the specified Where item are selected. Select the desired value from the list.
(To) Right Item - This item specifies the value to be used as the check value during the query selection.
Enter the desired value by either typing the value in the edit box, or select the value from the list. The
characteristics of this item changes depending on the Where item value. For some items, an edit box will be
displayed (for typing a value), and for some items a drop-down list box will be displayed (for selecting a
value).
Specification List - This item displays previously saved query specifications. To use a previous
specification, select the desired specification from the list.
132
Command Buttons...
Delete Displayed Specification - Select this command button to delete the specification currently displayed
in specification list.
Perform Query - Select this command button to perform the query.
Save Current Specification - Select this command button to save the specification currently displayed in
the “Where”, “Is”, and “To” data fields.
Usage Notes...
! The meanings of the search operators are:

= Equal To - Finds all records with an item value that is Both numeric and string
equal to the specified value. values.
<> Not Equal To - Finds all records with an item value that Both numeric and string
is not equal to the specified value. values.
< Less Than - Finds all records with an item value that is Numeric values only.
less than the specified value.
> Greater Than - Finds all records with an item value that Numeric values only.
is greater than the specified value.
<= Less Than Or Equal To - Finds all records with an item Numeric values only.
value that is less than or equal to the specified value .
>= Greater Than Or Equal To - Finds all records with an Numeric values only.
item value that is greater than or equal to the specified
value.
All Finds all records associated with the specified Where Any
item.
Ends Finds all records that end with the specified Equal To String values only.
With value.
Like Finds all records with an item value that contains the String values only.
specified Equal To value.
133
Max Finds a specified number of records which posses the Numeric values only.
highest item values.
Min Finds a specified number of records which posses the Numeric values only.
lowest item values.
Not Like Finds all records that do not contain the specified Equal String values only.
To value.
Starts Finds all records that start with the specified Equal To String values only.
With value.
! Use the Diameter item to allow a pipe size to be typed. Use the Size/Type item to select a pipe size from
the values contained in the Pipe Properties Table. Or, use the Size/Type (Unlisted) item to type a Size/Type
value not listed in the Pipe Properties Table.
134
Renumbering Specification...
A routine is provided that allows the node numbers to be renamed/renumbered based on a User specified
starting number and increment value. The routine is controlled using the Renumbering specification screen.
The features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items...
Increment Value - This item specifies the increment between node numbers. Enter the desired value by
Starting Number - This item specifies the value to start the numbering from. Enter the desired value by
Command Buttons...
Renumber - Select this command button to perform the renumbering. A message box will appear when the
process is complete.
Usage Notes...
! The renumbering is performed as follows: The starting node number is assigned to the first node found
in the node data file. The starting number is increased by the increment value and this number is assigned
to the next node in the file. This process is continued until all of the nodes have been renumbered.
135
Report Options...
The number of decimal places displayed by the various reports and data screens, along with various other
settings, are set using the Report Options screen. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Decimals Tab...
Number Of Decimals To Report - This item specifies the number of decimal places to display for the
associated parameter. To set the number, click in the data cell adjacent to the affected item, a data list will
be displayed. Select the desired value from the list.
136
Facility Tab...
Facilities List - This items specifies which Facility Types to include in the report activities. To include a
type in the various report routines, select (check) the item. To exclude a type from the report routines,
unselect (uncheck) the item. The contents of the list will vary depending on the facility types associated with
the current model.
137
Other Tab...
Sort All Reports When Opened - This item indicates whether the Standard customer, node, and pipe reports
are automatically sorted when they are opened. Select an appropriate value.
Pressure Drop Per (Length) - This item specifies the unit value to be used to calculate the "Pressure Drop
Per Unit Length" values. Type the desired value into the data field.
Printer Dimensional Units - This item specifies which dimensional unit to apply to the printer settings used
by the print control dialog boxes.
Exception Report Options - This item specifies which exceptions to report when an Exceptions Report Is
Include in the Solution Log. Select (check) the desired options.
138
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the data screen without saving any changes.
Close - Select this command button to close the data screen and save any changes.
Save As Default - Select this command button to save the current settings as the default values used when
creating a new model.
Usage Notes...
! The value of the Number of Decimals is used to indicate the number of digits displayed to the right of the
decimal identifier (point) when displaying the associated value.
! The Pressure Drop Per Unit Length value is calculated by dividing the product of the linear pressure drop
and the length of the pipe segment, by the Pressure Drop Per (Length) value.
! The options associated with the exceptions report are listed in the following table.
Option Description
Low Flow Pipes When this option is selected, pipes with flows less than the convergence
tolerance are reported.
Zero Flow Pipes When this option is selected, pipes with no (zero) flows are reported.
Large Node Errors When this option is selected, nodes with errors greater than the
convergence tolerance are reported.
Zero Pressure Nodes When this option is selected, nodes with zero pressure values are reported.
Negative Pressure Nodes When this option is selected, nodes with pressure values less than zero are
reported.
Large Pressure Nodes When this option is selected, nodes with unusually high pressure values
are reported.
Regulators With Low Inlet When this option is selected, regulator type elements with inlet pressure
Pressure values below their set pressure are reported.
Compressors With High When this option is selected, compressors with inlet pressures greater than
Inlet Pressure the set pressure are reported.
Note: The exception options only apply when the “Include Exceptions In Solution Log” option is
selected in the Solution options. The exception report can be used to troubleshoot a model that is not
converging or as a quick double check for model validity.
139
Solution Data...
GASWorkS provides access to the various solution options and data values through the Solution data screen.
The screen is described below:
Solution Data Items...
Atmospheric Pressure Method - This item lists the various methods available for calculating the
atmospheric pressure values used in the solution. The atmospheric pressure is used to convert gauge pressure
values to absolute pressure values needed in the calculations. To select a calculation method, click on the
desired item in the list to highlight it. A description of the available calculation methods are contained in the
Appendix.
Compressibility Method - This item lists the various methods available for calculating the compressibility
factors used in the solution. The compressibility factor is used to compensate for the deviation of gas
behavior from the ideal gas law, at elevated pressures. Generally, this deviation can be ignored for systems
operating at pressures less than 200 Psig. To select a calculation method, click on the desired item in the list
to highlight it. A description of the available calculation methods are contained in the Appendix.
140
Convergence Tolerance - This item specifies the maximum acceptable node error for the solution. Type the
desired value in the edit box. Ensure that the value corresponds to the selected dimensional unit. See the
Usage Notes for suggestions on selecting an appropriate convergence tolerance.
Design Factor - This item specifies a multiplication factor to be applied to the node loads during the
solution. Enter an appropriate value by typing it in the edit box. See the Usage Notes for additional details.
Divergence Limit - This item specifies the value of the maximum number of consecutive diverging or same
value iterations allowed during the solution. If the number is exceeded, the solution will be terminated. Enter
an appropriate value by typing it in the edit box. See the Usage Notes for additional details.
Maximum Iterations - This item specifies the maximum permissible number of iterations the solution can
make before ending. Enter an appropriate value by typing it in the edit box. See the Usage Notes for
additional details.
Solution Options - This item lists the various solution options to be included during the solution process.
The available options and their affect on the solution are listed in the Usage Notes.
Pipe Sizing Control Items...
141
Note: See the Usage Notes, Miscellaneous section, and the On-Line Help for additional information the Pipe
Sizing routine and the affect of the various data items and options on the sizing process.
Condition Nodes - This item specifies up to ten “condition” node names. If no condition nodes are
identified, only the overall system pressure will be used. Enter appropriate node names by typing the desired
value in the edit box.
Condition Pressure - This item represents the required pressure value for the associated condition node
location. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit. Enter a value by typing it in
the edit box.
Pressure Units - This item specifies the dimensional unit for the condition and system pressures. Select the
appropriate value from the list.
System Pressures - This item specifies the value of the overall system pressure requirement. Enter a value
by typing it the edit box. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit.
Pressure Values Are - This item specifies whether the check (condition and system) pressure values
represent maximum or minimum values. Click on the button adjacent to the appropriate option.
Velocity - This item specifies the maximum allowable velocity. Enter a value by typing it in the edit box.
Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional unit.
Optimize By - This item specifies whether pipe size or pipe cost will be used as the selection basis during
the optimize routine. When the size option is selected, smaller size pipes will always be used before larger
size pipes. When the cost option is selected, lower cost pipes will always be selected before higher cost pipes.
Click on the button adjacent to the appropriate option.
Pass Limit - The item specifies the number of “passes” that the optimize routine is allowed to execute. If
the limit is reached before the routine is complete, the routine will be stopped and the current pipe sizes will
be saved. To restart the optimize routine after the pass limit as been reached, re-solve the model remembering
to unselect the Reset Diameters To Minimum Size option.
Path Processing - This item specifies the type of path processing method that will be used during the
optimize routine. During the optimize routine, the lowest pressure node is found (when check values are
minimums). Then a path is determined along the pipes feeding into the low pressure node, back to the source
of supply. The size of pipes along this path are increased. The path processing item specifies how the path
is created and how the pipes are selected for a size increase. Select a method from the list.
Reset Diameters To Minimum Size - When this option is selected, the size for all of the pipes where the
“Allow Size Calculation” option is selected, will be set to the minimum allowed value.
142
Other Settings...
Base Pressure - This item specifies the pressure basis for the volume measurement. Enter an appropriate
value by typing it in the edit box. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional units.
Base Temperature - This item specifies the temperature basis for the volume measurement. Enter an
appropriate value by typing it in the edit box. Ensure that the value corresponds to the displayed dimensional
units.
Diameter Path Factor - This item specifies the diameter factor (exponent) to use when an applicable path
processing method is used during the pipe sizing routine. This item will only be enabled when the “Flow
Only” processing method is selected.
Length Path Factor - This item specifies the length factor (exponent) to use when an applicable path
processing method is used during the pipe sizing routine. This item will only be enabled when the “Flow
Only” or “Flow - Pressure Drop” processing methods are selected.
Lower Dampening - This item specifies the lower dampening factor for the solution. Type the desired value
in the edit box. The influence of the lower dampening factor is described in the Usage Notes.
143
Pressure Drop Path Factor - This item specifies the pressure drop factor (exponent) to use when an
applicable path processing method is used during the pipe sizing routine. This item will only be enabled
when the “Flow - Pressure Drop” processing method is selected.
Upper Dampening - This item specifies the upper dampening factor for the solution. Type the desired value
in the edit box. The influence of the upper dampening factor is described in the Usage Notes.
Model Notes...
Notes - This item allows access to the model notes. Enter or revise the notes as appropriate by typing in the
edit box. The Model Notes may consist of a description of the model and analysis. Special characters can
be used. The maximum length for the Notes is approximately 32,000 characters. See the Model Notes data
screen description for additional details.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the Solution data screen without performing the solution and
without saving any changes to the data values.
144
Close - Select this command button to close the Solution data screen without performing the solution, and
save any changes.
Solve - Select this command button to perform the solution. When selected, the Solution Log screen will
appear. When the solution is complete, select the Close command button to close the Solution Log screen
and return to the GASWorkS editing environment.
Solve & Calculate Pipe Sizes - Select this command button to perform the solution and calculate pipe sizes.
When selected the Solution Log screen will appear. When the solution is complete, select the Close
command button to close the Solution Log screen and return to the GASWorkS editing environment. This
command serves the same function as selecting the Calculate Pipe Sizes option and then selecting the Solve
command button.
Usage Notes...
! The design factor is used to adjust the node loads in the model. Depending on the individual node settings,
the known node loads are multiplied by the design factor to calculate the load values to be used in the
analysis. The design factor is expressed as a decimal. For example, to enter a factor representing fifty
percent, input .5. The design factor is only applied to nodes where the "Adjust By Design Factor" option has
been selected. The design factor is not applied to the external load values, unless the Apply Design Factor
To External Loads option is selected prior to the solution.
! The divergence limit identifies the number of consecutive diverging or equivalent error iterations that will
be allowed before the solution procedure is terminated. During the solution procedure, node errors normally
continue to decrease as the solution procedure progresses. Sometimes when solving a model, the node errors
might increase for a few iterations, then begin to decrease again. However, when trying to solve a model
containing an error, or when a model is "running-out-of-gas", the node errors may continue to increase or
stay the same, never allowing the solution to reach a state of balance. The divergence limit causes the
solution procedure to be automatically terminated when this occurs.
! The lower dampening factor is used to stop adjustment of certain node pressures. Often several nodes in
the model are balanced, while only a few nodes require further adjustment. The nodes where the pressure
adjustment value is less than the current pressure value multiplied by the lower dampening factor will not
be adjusted any further. The lower dampening factor can influence the quality of the solution. However if
the factor is properly chosen, it can decrease the number of iterations required to reach a solution, with only
a negligible influence upon the overall quality of the solution. Generally the lower dampening factor should
be set to zero (0).
! The maximum iteration value limits the number of times that GASWorkS will attempt to reach a solution
within the specified tolerance. The number of iterations required to reach a solution varies with each model,
and with the value of the convergence tolerance. If a solution is not reached within the specified number of
iterations, GASWorkS will provide a message warning that the solution has not been completed. The solution
can be rerun and the maximum number of iterations increased as required.
145
! The convergence tolerance represents the maximum allowable imbalance of the solution results. If a
solution is attained for a tolerance of .01 Mcfh, it can be said that the solution results are within +/- .01 Mcfh
of the exact solution for that particular model. The value of the tolerance is generally determined based on
the magnitude of the total expected system flows. The acceptable tolerance for a particular model depends
on the intended use of the results. For very “tight” results use a convergence tolerance of about one tenth of
one percent (one-thousandth) of the total expected system flow. For example, if the total system flow is
expected to be of the magnitude of 10 Mcfh the convergence tolerance might be .01 Mcfh. For less accurate
results, use a convergence tolerance of about one percent of the total expected system flow.
! The Upper Dampening Factor is used to modify the calculated adjustment for large node errors. The
modification will be applied to errors greater than the Upper Dampening Factor multiplied by the
Convergence Factor. The Upper Dampening Factor generally does not influence the quality of the solution.
However, it can prevent a solution from being reached if improperly chosen. Enter a large number (for
example 10000) to disable the Upper Dampening Factor. Generally the factor should be entered as zero (0).
! See the Miscellaneous section for suggestions on handling various convergence problems and solution
errors.
! There are various options available during the solution process. Each option is described in the following
table:
Option Description
Apply Design Factor To External Causes the external loads to be multiplied by the design factor
Loads when calculating the node loads during the solution.
Calculate Diversity Causes the IGE Diversity calculations to performed during the
solution. Selecting this option will cause the load associated
with “non-diversified” customers to be applied to the
downstream node of the supplying main, regardless of the node
application setting.
Calculate Gas Mixing Causes the gas property values to be calculated based on the
mixed flow rates.
Calculate Pipe Sizes (Optimize) Causes the sizes of the pipes allowed to be sized (optimized) to
be calculated.
Calculate Temperature Values Causes the average temperature to be calculated for each node
where the temperature is set as unknown.
Flag Large Error Node Upon Causes a flag symbol to be placed at the location of the node
Completion with the largest error. The flag will be placed after the solution
is finished.
146
Option Description
Ignore Elevation Differences Causes the node elevation differences to be ignored when
calculating node pressures. However, the correct atmospheric
pressure values will be used.
Include Exceptions In Log Report Causes a check for unusual conditions to be performed when the
data is being saved after the solution. Any problems that are
found are referred to as “exceptions” and are included in the
Solution Log report. The exceptions included in the check are
controlled by the Report Options found in the Report menu list.
Reset Unknown Node Pressures To Causes the unknown pressure values to be set to zero before
Zero solving the model. This option is advised when using the pipe
sizing or calculate diversity options.
Smart Processing Of One-Way Causes one-way segments (meeting certain criteria) to be
Segments excluded from the “trial and error” (iterative) portion of the
solution. The solution for these type of segments is explicit and
does not require iteration to solve. If the model contains any
one-way segments, choosing this option will increase the
solution speed.
Solve Facilities... A listing of facility types - indicating which facility types to
include in the solution process.
Update Color Coding Causes the color-by-range color coding to be updated upon
completion of the solution. The current range and color criteria
is used to update the GDI display.
! During the optimization routine, certain pressure requirements are checked to determine if the pipes are
properly sized. These pressure requirements can be set in two manners. A pressure may be specified at a
particular location in the system (referred to as a condition node), and an overall pressure may be set for the
entire model. See the Miscellaneous section for additional information using the Pipe Sizing routine and the
affect of the various data items and options have on the sizing process.
! The base pressure and temperature are used to establish the basis for a “standard” volume (For example,
a standard cubic foot or cubic meter) of gas as used by the current model.
147
Solution Log...
During solution of a model, GASWorkS displays the Solution Log screen. The screen allows control of the
solution and viewing of the solution's progress. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Command Buttons And Controls...
Cancel - Select this command button to terminate the solution process. When selected, the solution will be
terminated - however, depending on the current solution activities, the process may not terminate
immediately. This button is disabled after the solution is complete.
Close - Select this command button to close the Solution Log and return to the GASWorkS editing
environment. This button is disabled during the solution process.
Scroll Bars - The horizontal scroll bar (The bar directly beneath the status area) is used to move the display
right and left. The log may be wider than the display window, the horizontal scroll bar allows viewing of the
off-display portions of the log.
The vertical scroll bar (The bar directly to the right of the status area) is used to move up and down in the
log. The vertical bar allows the log to be browsed by adjusting the bar's slider.
148
Solution Status - This item provides a scrollable display of the solution log. To browse the display, adjust
the vertical scroll bar adjacent to the display area.
Usage Notes...
! If the “Include Exceptions In Log Report” option is selected prior to the solution, any exceptions found
while saving the solution results will be reported at the end of the solution log. If there are more exceptions
than can be contained in the log, the reported exceptions will be truncated. An end of section message will
be reported at the end of the exceptions section.
! The contents of the Solution Log may be printed by selecting the Solution Log item from the Report menu
list.
149
Solution Log Report...

During the solution, a log of the solution activities will be created. The log is maintained in a report known
as the "Solution Log". The Solution Log may be viewed while the solution routine is active, or may be
viewed or printed at other times using the Solution Log Report. The report's features are described below:
the Print Control box will appear. In the dialog box make any desired adjustments to the printer
settings, then click the Print command button to proceed with printing.
150
Controls...
Scroll Bars - the horizontal scroll bar (The bar directly beneath the viewing screen) is used to move the
The scroll bars may be adjusted by moving the bar’s "slider" with the mouse, or by clicking on the Arrow
Usage Notes...
! If the “Include Exceptions In Log Report” option is selected prior to the solution, any exceptions found
while saving the solution results will be reported at the end of the solution log. If there are more exceptions
than can be contained in the log, the reported exceptions will be truncated. An end of section message will
be reported at the end of the exceptions section.
151
Summary Report...
The Summary Report includes several specialized report sections, they include a summary of the regulator
and compressor data, hoop stress values, pipe lengths, supply nodes, and system components. The User may
indicate which sections they wish to include in the report. The report routine consists of two screens, the first
is the Summary Report Options which is used to select the desired report sections. The second is the
Summary Report screen which displays the contents of the report. The options screen is described later in
this manual. The features of the report screen are described below:
152
the Print Control box will appear. In the dialog box make any desired adjustments to the printer
settings, then click the Print command button to proceed with printing.
Controls...
The scroll bars may be adjusted by moving the bars’ "slider" with the mouse, or by clicking on the Arrow
Usage Notes...
! The Summary Report Options screen description provides additional information about the Summary
Report contents.
153
Summary Report Options...

The Summary Report includes several specialized report sections, they include a summary of the regulator
and compressor data, hoop stress values, pipe lengths, supply nodes, and system components. The User may
indicate which sections they wish to include in the report. The report routine consists of two screens, the first
is the Summary Report Options which is used to select the desired report sections. The second is the
Summary Report screen which displays the contents of the report. The report screen is described in a
previous section of this manual. The features of the options screen are described below:
Data Items...
Compressor Summary - This item indicates whether compressor data is to be included in the report. The
compressor section reports various data about the compressors found in the system. Select (check) this option
to include this section in the report.
Hoop Stress Summary - This item indicates whether a hoop stress summary is to be included in the report.
The Hoop Stress section reports the hoop stress value for each pipe and fitting segment. Select (check) this
option to include this section in the report.
Pipe Summary - This item indicates whether a pipe summary is to be included in the report. The pipe
summary section reports pipe footage, inch-diameter values, and cost values grouped by diameter value.
Select (check) this option to include this section in the report.
Regulator Data - This item indicates whether regulator data is to be included in the report. The regulator
section reports various data about the regulators found in the system. Select (check) this option to include
this section in the report.
154
Supply Nodes - This item indicates whether a summary of the supply nodes is to be included in the report.
The supply nodes section lists each node with a positive load value, along with its load and pressure values.
Select (check) this option to include this section in the report.
System Summary - This item indicates whether a system summary is to be included in the report. The
system summary section reports the number of nodes, pipes, known and unknown values, and total flow into
and out-of the system. Select (check) this option to include this section in the report.
Command Buttons...
Report - Select this command button to create the report and open the Summary Report screen.
Close - Select this command button to close the Summary Report Options screen without creating the report.
Usage Notes...
! The Summary Report provides a summary of various data items contained in the model. The report can
be customized to include various User specified items. The available options are described in the table below:
Option Features
Compressor Data Calculates Compression Ratio, Estimated Outlet Temperature, Estimated
Power Requirements, and Estimated Fuel Consumption.
Displays From Node and To Node, Compressor Type, Flow Rate, Flow Mode,
Inlet Pressure, Outlet Pressure, Compression Ratio, Inlet Temperature, Outlet
Temperature, Required Power, Rated Power, and Fuel Consumption.
Hoop Stress Summary Calculates hoop stress values for each Pipe and Fitting element.
Specified Minimum Yield Strength (if included in the Pipe Properties Table).
Hoop Stress to Specified Minimum Yield Strength ratio (% SMYS).
Pipe Summary Displays total Length, Diameter-Length, and Cost values.
Displays each unique diameter found in the model.
Displays Length summary grouped by diameter.
Displays Diameter-Length summary by diameter.
Displays Cost summary by diameter.
155
Option Features
Regulator Data Calculates estimated Valve Coefficient, Differential Pressure, Outlet
Temperature, and Coefficient Ratio.
Displays From Node and To Node, Regulator Type, Flow Rate, Flow Mode,
Inlet Pressure, Outlet Pressure, Differential Pressure, Minimum Differential
Pressure, Inlet Temperature, Outlet Temperature, Estimated Valve Coefficient,
Published Valve Coefficient, and Coefficient Ratio.
Supply Nodes List all Nodes with a positive load value.
Displays Node Name, Pressure, and Load Values for supply Nodes.
System Summary Data feature count.
Known and Unknown Pressures (count).
Known and Unknown Loads (count).
Total Known and Unknown Values (count).
Total Flow into and out-of the system.
Customer feature summary.
Miscellaneous model and non-model data summary.
! The units of certain displayed items are fixed, values for these items are summarized below:
Displayed Value Dimensional Units

Total Flow Into System Set to Load Units of the first node in the model
Total Flow Out Of System Set to Load Units of the first node in the model
Length (Pipe Summary) Set to Length Units of the first pipe in the model
Cost None
Differential Pressure (Regulators) Set to Pressure Units of the associated record in
the Regulator Property Table
Minimum Differential Pressure (Regulators) Set to Pressure Units of the associated record in
the Regulator Property Table
Power Requirements Set to Power Units of the associated record in the
Compressor Property Table
156
Displayed Value Dimensional Units
Fuel Consumption Set to Consumption Units of the associated
record in the Compressor Property Table
Hoop Stress Set to Pressure Drop Units of the first pipe in the
model
Specified Minimum Yield Strength Set to Pressure Drop Units of the first pipe in the
model
Hoop Stress to Specified Minimum Yield Percent
Strength Ratio
! The Estimated Valve Coefficient calculated in the Regulator data represents the following parameter:
Flow Equation Estimated Valve Coefficient

Grove Cv - Valve Capacity Factor
Rockwell "K" Factor - Regulator Constant
Universal Cg (Regulating) - Gas Sizing Coefficient
157
XY Calculation Specification...
A routine is provided that allows estimated coordinate values to be automatically calculated for a model
which contains no coordinate information. The routine is controlled using the XY Calculation Specification
screen. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items...
Starting Node Name - This item specifies the node to begin the calculations from. Enter the desired value
by typing it in the data field. The name must correspond to a node found in the currently open model.
Command Buttons...
Calculate - Select this command button to perform the calculation. A message box will appear when the
calculations are complete.
Usage Notes...
! The starting coordinate value cannot be specified by the User. If desired, the model can be shifted after
the coordinate calculation is complete, using the XY Shift routine found in the GDI command list.
! Before performing the calculation, ensure that the GDI coordinate units are appropriately set. Select the
Settings item from the Graphics menu list to set the coordinate units.
158
! The estimated coordinates are calculated as follows. The specified starting node is assigned a location of
1000000, 1000000. A trace is begun at the starting node and connected pipes are processed in the following
order. The end coordinates for the first pipe found are calculated by extending a line east a distance equal
to its length value. The next pipe is assigned a direction of south, the next west, the next north, and their end
coordinates are calculated based on their length values. If more than four pipes are connected, the fifth and
sixth pipes are assigned a direction of southeast and southwest respectively. Once the first node has been
processed, the remaining nodes are processed in a similar fashion until all node locations have been
estimated.
! The image created by this routine is often unsightly. After the routine is complete, the node and pipe
features can be moved to look a little better using the various GDI edit commands.
159
160
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ GDI
GRAPHIC DATA
INTERFACE
161

This section provides instructions for using the GASWorkS Graphical Data Interface (GDI). A substantial
number of the GASWorkS features and commands are accessed through the GDI. Each of these GDI features
along with the associated data screens are described in this section.
The GDI provides graphical access to the model data. The GDI can be used to create a graphical
representation of the model which can be used to view, edit, and manipulate the GASWorkS model data. The
GDI is not intended to be a "CAD" system, however it does provide some CAD type features. For more
sophisticated graphics needs we recommend using a true drafting/design, mapping, or GIS-AM/FM product.
Data from these applications may then be shared with GASWorkS using one of its many import routines.
The On-Line Help system provides an extensive collection of examples and how-to tips for performing a
variety of tasks using the GDI.
The remainder of the section describes the various features associated with the GDI...
163
GDI Window Description...

The GDI features are accessed through the Graphics Data Interface screen. The features associated with the
GDI, and its layout are described below:
With the exception of the “Command Line”, the features associated with the GDI window may only be
accessed by use of the mouse. If your computer system is not equipped with a mouse or compatible pointing
device, you will not be able to use the GDI.
The GDI screen contains several functional areas. The left side of the screen contains a group of icons
representing the GDI toolbar headings. A "fly-out" toolbar will appear when the mouse pointer is passed over
each of the headings. The various GDI tools are grouped together on a specific toolbar. For example, tools
for changing the scale and position of the displayed image are grouped on the View toolbar. The tools
(commands) are accessed through the icons displayed on the toolbars. Not all commands are available from
a toolbar - additional commands are accessed through the GDI Command List, or by typing the command
on the Command Line. The meaning and function of each of the commands and icons are described later in
this section.
164
The central portion of the screen contains the "work area". The work area is the portion of the screen where
the image is displayed and manipulated. The appearance of the image in the display can be modified by
panning (moving right to left, and up or down), and by zooming (enlarging or reducing) the image.
Additionally, the color, size, and style of the features displayed in the work area can be manipulated by the
User.
The portion of the GDI window directly above the work area is used to enter information needed by the
various GDI commands, and to prompt the User for the required action. When a value is required, an entry
field will appear in the command area. Data is entered by typing in the provided entry field, then pressing
the ENTER (5) key.
The portion of the GDI window directly below the work area contains the Command Line (lower panel) and
displays the coordinates for the current mouse position or a brief description of the tool icons (upper panel).
When the mouse pointer is moved or placed over an icon, a description of the icon's function is displayed
in the icon description area. The coordinate values represent the current (scaled) position of the mouse
pointer. Commands may be executed by typing their identifying name value, abbreviation or alias on
Command Line.
Along the right side of the screen several “display panel” tabs are displayed. Each panel can contain a
different view of the model. Select a tab to change to the associated view.
There are several “special” icons displayed on the GDI screen. They are described below:
Cancel - Located in the upper left of the GDI window, this icon executes the Cancel command.
When selected, the command currently being used will be terminated and canceled, or if the image
display is currently being repainted, the repaint routine will be terminated.
Undo - Located in the upper left of the GDI window, this icon executes the Restore command.
When selected, the command will undo the most previous graphic or data change, if the Allow
Undo preference has been selected. If the Allow Undo preference is not selected, this command
has no affect. The Allow Undo preference can be set using the Options menu item from the
Preferences submenu of the File menu list.
Tool Pallette - Located in the upper right corner of the GDI window, this icon controls the display
of the Tool Palette. When selected, the display of the Tool Palette will be toggled on or off.
During command execution, the Tool Palette is hidden so that the entire work area is visible.
When the command is completed, the Tool Palette is again displayed. During a command the Tool
Palette may be made visible by moving the mouse pointer over this icon.
Command List - Located in the upper right corner of the GDI window, this icon controls the
display of the Command List. When selected, the Command List will be displayed. The Command
List displays a list or treed grouping of the commands available in the GDI. Once a command is
selected and executed, the Command List is hidden so that the entire work area is visible.
165
Two methods are available for controlling the display of the Command List. One method requires the
Command List icon to be clicked to display the list. The other method displays the list when the mouse
pointer is placed over the associated icon. The desired method can be selected using the Options item of the
Preferences submenu of the Files menu list.
Solve - Located in the lower right of the GDI window, this icon displays the state of the model and
allows the solution to be executed. The icon indicates whether the model is balanced (balanced
scale) or unbalanced (unbalanced scale). When a change is made to the model data, the model is
considered to be unbalanced. This icon can also be used to execute the Solve command. When
selected, the Solution Data screen will appear.
Scroll - Located in the lower left of the GDI window, this icon is used to move the GDI image up
or down, or right or left using the scroll icon. This process of moving the image is referred to as
“panning” or “scrolling”. The amount that the image moves when the scroll icon is selected, is
determined by the value of the Horizontal and Vertical Pan Change values. The pan values are set
by selecting the Settings routine from the Graphics menu list. To pan the image right, click the portion of
the scroll icon that contains the arrow symbol that points right. To pan the image up, click the portion of the
scroll icon that contains the arrow symbol that points up.
The GDI supports coordinate values ranging from 0 to 9999999. The Shift Model Coordinates command can
be used to shift, scale, and rotate an image's coordinate values if they fall outside the allowable range. The
dimensional unit of the coordinates are set by selecting the Settings item from the Graphics menu list.. When
a new pipe is added, its length value is calculated based on the graphical length between its From Node, To
Node, and vertex coordinates. The User may override the calculated value by manually entering the desired
length value. Node names are automatically assigned during new pipe entry. The User may override the
assigned name by manually entering the desired value. The node increment (difference between new node
name/numbers) is controlled by a setting in the Default Data. Select the Default Values item from the
Utilities menu list to access the default settings.
Depending on the zoom scale, certain items may or may not be displayed. The display of text is controlled
by a User specified setting. The display of features like the customer symbols, node symbols, and flow
arrows is automatically controlled by the GDI, depending on how their size value is set. Symbol sizes can
be specified in one of two methods - absolute or relative. With the absolute method symbol size value is
expressed in terms of the coordinate units. As the model image is enlarged or reduced, the display of the
symbols is resized accordingly. With the relative method, a factor expressed as a percentage, is used to
specify the symbol size. The factor is applied to the diagonal distance across the GDI work area. The result
is that the symbol size is always displayed at the same size - regardless of the zoom scale. When an absolute
size is used, and the image is zoomed to a scale where the symbols would appear very small, they are not
displayed. As the magnification of the image is increased, the symbols will eventually appear.
166
Descriptions of the various toolbars, commands, and icons are presented in the remainder of this section.
GDI Toolbars...
Construction Commands - Contains commands used for adding and deleting pipe features.
Edit Commands - Contains commands used for editing pipe and node features.
View Commands - Contains commands used for zooming and panning the GDI image.
Model Data Commands - Contains commands used for viewing and changing pipe and node data
values.
Display Commands - Contains commands used for control of the display of data text, feature
colors, symbols, and the background image.
Attribute Valve Commands - Contains commands used for manipulating attribute style valves.
Customer Commands - Contains commands used for manipulating customer features.
User Text Commands - Contains commands used for manipulating User text features.
User Graphic Commands - Contains commands used for manipulating User graphic symbol and
line features.
Window Control Commands - Contains commands used for controlling the GDI window.
167
Utility Commands - Contains commands used for performing various utility commands such as
plotting and tracing.
GDI Commands & Icon Descriptions...

The GDI commands (tools) can be executed in three manners - by selecting the command from the GDI
Command List, by clicking on the icon which represents the command, or by typing the command name on
the Command Line.
Command List Method...
The Command List presents the commands in two different formats, one is an alphabetical list, the other is
a grouped list in a “treed” format.
To select a command from the Command List, display the Command List by clicking on the Command List
icon. Select the desired display method, by selecting the appropriate tab. Use the mouse to scroll through the
list until the desired command is displayed, click on the command name.
When the grouped list is displayed, click on a “toolbox” to display the commands contained in a specific
grouping.
When the alphabetic list is displayed, a command can be found by typing the unique portion of the command
name, as the command is typed, the command name which matches the typed characters will be displayed
at the top of the command list. When the desired command is displayed, press the ENTER (5) key.
Command Line Method...
The Command Line allows commands to be executed by typing the command name, an abbreviation for the
command, or an alias for the command. Command names and abbreviations are listed later in this section.
Instructions on creating User defined alias values is provided later in this Manual.
To execute a command from the Command Line, type the name, abbreviation, or alias in the Command Line
entry box, then press the ENTER (5) key to execute the command.
Commands can be entered in lower, upper, or proper case and can contain spaces in their syntax. For
example, the “Add Pipe Command” can be entered as ADDPIPE, addpipe, or Add Pipe.
168
Icon Method...
To select a command using its icon, position the mouse pointer over the associated toolbar, the toolbar will
be expanded. On the expanded toolbar (or Tool Palette if it is displayed), position the mouse pointer over
the desired icon, then press the left mouse button.
To re-execute the most previously executed command, press the ENTER (5) key, or press the right or middle
mouse button while the mouse pointer is positioned over the GDI work area.
The On-Line Help system contains numerous examples and how-to tips for using the various GDI commands.
Refer to the appropriate help topic to review detailed information about using each of the commands.
The various methods available for entering coordinates are described later in this section and in the On-Line
Help system.
If the Query During New Feature Entry option is selected, the following events will occur when a pipe is
added. If one or both of the nodes do not already exist, a data screen will appear to allow entry of the new
node data values. When both nodes have been entered, the pipe data screen will appear to allow entry of the
new pipe's data values. The Query During New Feature Entry option is set by selecting the Settings item
from the Graphics menu list.
The various data screens and dialog boxes which appear during the execution of certain commands are
described later in the section.
The commands contained in the GDI are listed on the following pages. If the command does not have an
associated icon, the command can only be executed by selecting it from the GDI command list, or by typing
it on the Command Line.
Add Pipe - Adds a new two point style pipe feature to the model. Executing this command will
cause a prompt to appear for the From Node coordinates, then a prompt will appear for the To
Node coordinates.
Toolbar: Construction Commands

Command Line: AP, ADDP, ADDPIPE, PIPE
Add Arc Pipe - Adds a new arc style pipe feature to the model. Executing this command will
cause a prompt to appear for the From Node coordinates, then a prompt will appear for the To
Node coordinates. After both nodes have been entered, adjust the pipe’s curvature by moving the
mouse pointer.

Command Line: AAP, ADDARC, ADDARCPIPE, ARC
169
Add Attribute Valve - Adds an attribute valve to a pipe feature. Executing this command will
cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the pipe to add the valve to, and the location of the
new valve.
Toolbar: Attribute Valve Commands

Command Line: AAV, ADDAV, ADDATTRIBUTEVALVE
Add Auto Customer - Adds a customer feature and automatically assigns the customer to the
main nearest the customer location. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear for
the new customer location.
Toolbar: Customer Commands

Command Line: AAC, AUTOCUST, ADDAUTOCUSTOMER
Add Branch Customer - Adds a branch style customer feature. A branch customer can only be
added to an existing non-branch customer. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear
to identify the branch customer location, the “trunk” customer, and the tap location.

Command Line: ABC, ADDBRANCH, ADDBRANCHCUSTOMER, BRANCH
Add Compressor - Adds a compressor type pipe feature. Executing this command will cause a prompt to
appear for the compressor From and To Node locations. After both nodes have been entered, additional
prompts will appear to complete the process.
Note: When entering a compressor the From Node must represent the upstream (suction) side of the
compressor and the To Node must represent the downstream (discharge) side of the compressor.
Toolbar: None - Not available on a toolbar

Command Line: ADDCOMP, ADDCOMPRESSOR, COMP
Add Customer - Adds a customer feature. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts
to appear for the customer location and for identification of the main supplying the customer.

Command Line: AC, ADDC, ADDCUST, ADDCUSTOMER, CUSTOMER
170
Add Duplicate Customer - Adds a new customer by duplicating an existing customer. Executing this
command will cause a prompt to appear to identify the customer to be duplicated. A new customer will be
placed at the same location with same data values.

Command Line: ADUP, ADDDUP, ADDDUPCUST, ADDDUPLICATECUSTOMER, DUPLICATE
Add Hydraulic Valve - Adds a valve type pipe feature. Executing this command will cause a prompt to
appear for the valve From and To Node locations. After both nodes have been entered, additional prompts
will appear to complete the process.

Command Line: AV, ADDVALVE, VALVE
Add Legend As Text - Converts the current color legend into User style text and places the text in a User
specified location. The legend must be converted to text to be printed.
Toolbar: None - Not available from a toolbar

Command Line: None - Not available on command line
Add Multiple Attribute Valves - Adds multiple attribute valves. Executing this command will cause the
Add Attribute Valves command to be repeated until the ESC key is pressed or the right mouse button is
clicked.

Command Line: None - Not available on the Command Line
Add Multiple Customers - Adds multiple customer features. Executing this command will cause the Add
Customer command to be repeated until the ESC key is pressed or the right mouse button is clicked.

Add Multiple Auto Customers - Adds multiple customer features and automatically assigns the
supply main. Executing this command will cause the Add Auto Customer command to be repeated
until the ESC key is pressed or the right mouse button is clicked.

171
Add Multiple 2-Point Pipes - Adds multiple 2-point style pipe features. Executing this command will cause
the Add Pipe command to be repeated until the ESC key is pressed or the right mouse button is clicked.

Add Multiple Polyline Pipes - Adds multiple polyline style pipe features. Executing this command will
cause the Add Polyline Pipe command to be repeated until the ESC key is pressed or the right mouse button
is clicked.

Add Polyline Pipe - Adds a new polyline style pipe feature to the model. Executing this
command will cause a prompt to appear for the From Node coordinates, then a prompt will appear
to enter either the To Node coordinates or the coordinates of the next vertex. When the To Node
point has been entered, press the ENTER (5) key or click the right mouse button to end the pipe
entry.

Command Line: APP, ADDPOLY, ADDPOLYLINEPIPE, POLYPIPE
Add Polyline Service Customer - Adds a new customer feature with a polyline style service line.
Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the pipe supplying
the customer, the location of the service line “tap”, the service line route, and the customer
location. When the final point (customer location) has been entered, press the ENTER (5) key or
click the right mouse button to end the service line entry.

Command Line: APS, ADDPOLYS, ADDPOLYLINESERVICE, POLYSERVICE
Add Polyline Pipe Vertex - Adds a new vertex to an existing polyline or 2-point style pipe
feature. Executing this command will cause prompts to appear to identify the pipe to be modified
and the location of the new vertex.
Toolbar: Edit Commands

Command Line: APV, ADDPVTX, ADDPIPEVERTEX
172
Add Regulator - Adds a regulator type pipe feature. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts
to appear ro identify the regulator From and To Node locations. After both nodes have been entered,
additional prompts will appear to complete the process.
Note: When entering a regulator, the From Node must represent the upstream (high pressure) side of the
regulator and the To Node must represent the downstream (low pressure) side of the regulator.

Command Line: ADDREG, ADDREGULATOR, REGULATOR
Add Service Line Vertex - Adds a new vertex to an existing polyline or 2-point style customer
service line. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the
customer to be modified and the location of the new vertex.

Command Line: ASV, ADDSVTX, ADDSERVICEVERTEX
Add Unassigned Customer - Adds a customer feature, but does require a supply main assignment.
Executing this command will cause a prompt to be displayed to identify the customer location. The customer
can be assigned at another time using the Reassign Customer command.

Add User Graphic Line - Adds a User Graphic Line feature. Executing this command will cause
a series of prompts to appear to identify the line style, width, and location.
Toolbar: User Graphic Commands

Command Line: AGL, ADDLINE, ADDGRAPHICLINE, LINE
Add User Graphic Symbol - Adds a User Graphic Symbol feature. Executing this command will
cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the symbol style, size, location, and rotation.

Command Line: AGS, ADDSYM, ADDGRAPHICSYMBOL, SYMBOL
173
Add User Text - Adds a User Text feature. Executing this command will cause a series of
prompts to appear to identify the text location, height, rotation, and value.
Toolbar: User Text Commands

Command Line: AT, ADDT, ADDTEXT, ADDUSERTEXT, TEXT
Add Well - Adds a well type pipe feature. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear for the
valve From and To Node locations. After both nodes have been entered, additional prompts will appear to
complete the process.

Command Line: AW, ADDWELL, WELL
Adjust Arc - Adjusts the radius of an existing arc style pipe element. Executing this command will cause
a series of prompts to be displayed to identify the arc pipe to be adjusted, and the new radius.

Arrange Tool Palette - Opens the Tool Palette for User manipulation. See the Tool Palette screen
descriptions for further details on arranging the contents of the palette. Executing this command
will cause the tool palette to be displayed in edit mode. Select the Close icon (in the lower right
corner of the Tool Palette) to close the tool palette and exit edit mode. Once closed the tool palette
can be resized and moved.
Toolbar: Utility Commands

Assign Attribute Valves - Assigns (or reassigns) attribute valves contained in the valve index file to the
associated main. Matches are made geographically, a valve is assigned to the pipe nearest it’s location.
Executing this command will cause all unassigned valves to be assigned to the pipe nearest the valve’s
location. This command is useful when importing attribute valves from an outside source.

174
Assign Customer Service Lines - Automatically assigns customers to a supply pipe (main). Executing this
command will cause a prompt to be displayed to select whether all customer service line locations should
be determined, or only service lines for customers that are unassigned. GASWorkS will process the selected
customer types, find the main nearest the customer location, and assign the customer to that main. A 2-point
“service line” will be placed from the customer symbol location to a perpendicular (where possible) tap
location on the assigned pipe. This command is useful when importing customer features from an outside
source.

Break Flagged Intersections - Automatically breaks intersections at flagged locations. Use the Flag
Unbroken Intersections Command to find and flag unbroken intersections. Executing this command will
cause the “header” pipe at each flagged intersection to be tapped and the “lateral” pipe to be connected to
the new tap. This feature is useful for “cleaning up” pipe data imported from an outside source.

Calculate Delta P (Linear) - Calculates the pressure difference between a pair of selected node points.
Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to be displayed to identify the node points. The linear
absolute pressure difference between the two points will be calculated and displayed.

Command Line: CALCDP, CALCULATEDELTAP
Calculate Delta P (Squared) - Calculates the difference of squared pressures between a pair of selected
node points. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to be displayed to identify the node
points. The difference in squared absolute pressures between the two points will be calculated and displayed.

Command Line: None - CALCDP2, CALCULATEDELTAP2
Calculate Efficiency (P Linear) - Calculates the efficiency along the flow path between a pair of selected
points, and the desired pressure difference. An iterative series of calculations will be performed to compute
the pipe efficiency value, along the flow path between the selected nodes, required to match the specified
pressure values.
175
Note: Use this option when the assigned pipe flow equations use a linear pressure difference.

Calculate Efficiency (P Squared) - Calculates the efficiency along the flow path between a pair of selected
points, and the desired pressure difference. An iterative series of calculations will be performed to compute
the pipe efficiency value, along the flow path between the selected nodes, required to match the specified
pressure values.
Note: Use this option when the assigned pipe flow equations use a pressure difference based on squared
pressure values.

Calculate XY’s From Lat/Long - Calculates estimated planar XY coordinates for model features whose
original coordinates are in latitude and longitude. Executing this command will cause new XY coordinate
values to be calculated for the customer, node, and pipe features, based on current coordinate values and
certain calculation assumptions.

Calibrate Digitizing Tablet - Calibrates the digitizing tablet for use with the GDI using a two-point
registration method. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to be displayed to enter the
required registration points.

Cancel - Cancels the currently executing GDI command, or stops the image display if it is
currently being repainted. Executing this command causes the execution of any running command
to be terminated. This command can also be used to interrupt the GDI display drawing (repaint)
process before it is complete.
Toolbar: None - Located in the upper left corner of the GDI screen.
Command Line: C, CAN, CANCEL
176
Clear Attribute Valves - Deletes all attribute valves and clears all links between the valves and the pipes
associated with the valves. Executing this command will cause all attribute valves to be deleted.
Note: Particular care should be taken when using this command. If this command is inadvertently executed,
immediately execute the Undo command.

Clear Customer Find Flag - Clears the customer "find" flag. Executing this command will cause
the display of the flag identifying a “found” customer to be turned off.

Command Line: CFLAG, CLEARFLAG, CLEARCUSTFLAG, CUSTFLAG
Clear Customer Item Flags - Clears the customer "item" flags. Executing this command will cause the
display of the customer item flags to be turned off.
Toolbar: None - Not available from a toolbar.

Command Line: CIFLAG, CLEARCIFLAG, CLEARCUSTITEMFLAG, CUSTIFLAG
Clear Error Flags - Clears Data Check “error" flags. Executing this command will cause the display of the
error flags to be turned off.
Toolbar: None - Not available from a toolbar.

Clear Intersection Flags - Clears the unbroken “intersection” identification flag. Executing this command
will cause the display of flags identifying unbroken intersections to be turned off.
Toolbar: None - Not available on a toolbar.

Clear Node Find Flag - Clears the node “find” flag. Executing this command will cause the
display of the flag identifying a “found” node to be turned off.
Toolbar: Data Edit Commands

Command Line: NFLAG, CLEARNFLAG, CLEARNODEFLAG, NODEFLAG
177
Clear Node Item Flags - Clears the node "item" flags. Executing this command will cause the display of
the node item flags to be turned off.

Command Line: NIFLAG, CLEARNIFLAG, CLEARNODEITEMFLAG, NODEIFLAG
Clear Pipe Find Flag - Clears the pipe “find” flag. Executing this command will cause the
display of the flag identifying a “found” pipe to be turned off.

Command Line: PFLAG, CLEARPFLAG, CLEARPIPEFLAG, PIPEFLAG
Clear Pipe Item Flags - Clears the pipe "item" flags. Executing this command will cause the display of the
pipe item flags to be turned off.

Command Line: PIFLAG, CLEARPIFLAG, CLEARPIPEITEMFLAG, PIPEIFLAG
Clear Supply Flags - Clears the “supply node” flags. Executing this command will cause the display of flags
identifying supply nodes to be turned off.

Command Line: SFLAG, CLEARSFLAG, CLEARSUPPLYFLAG, SUPPLYFLAG
Clear User Text Find Flag - Clears the User Text “find” flag. Executing this command will cause the
display of the flag identifying a “found” text item to be turned off.

Command Line: TFLAG, CLEARTFLAG, CLEARTEXTFLAG, TEXTFLAG
Close Graphics Window - Closes the Graphics Data Interface window. Executing this command
will cause the GDI window to be closed. The GDI window cannot be closed when a command is
running. Use the Cancel command to terminate a running command.
Toolbar: Graphic Window Controls

Command Line: CLOSE
178
Conformal Calibration - Calibrates the digitizing tablet for use with the GDI using a multi-point registration
method. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to be displayed to enter the required
registration points.

Convert Arc To Polyline Pipe - Converts an arc style pipe element to a polyline style element. Executing
this command will cause a prompt to be displayed to identify the pipe feature to be processed.

Command Line: A2P, ARCPOLY, CONVERTARCTOPOLYLINE
Convert All Arcs To Polyline Pipes - Converts all arc style pipe elements to polyline style elements.
Executing this command will cause all arc style pipe elements to be converted to polyline style elements.

Copy Customer - Adds a new customer by making a copy of an existing customer. Executing this command
will cause a prompt to appear to identify the “base” customer to be copied and new location. A new customer
is placed at the selected location, with the same data values as the identified “base” customer.

Command Line: CC, COPYC, COPYCUST, COPYCUSTOMER
Copy User Text - Adds a new text feature by making a copy of an existing text item. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” text item to be copied and new
location. A new text item is placed at the selected location, with the same data values as the identified “base”
text item.

Command Line: CT, COPYT, COPYTEXT, COPYTEXT
Delete All Attribute Valves - Deletes all attribute valves from the model. Executing this command will
cause all attribute valves to be deleted from the model.

179
Delete All Customers - Deletes all customers from the model. Executing this command will cause all
customers to be deleted from the model.

Delete Attribute Valve - Deletes an attribute valve from a pipe feature. Executing this command
will cause a prompt to appear to identify the valve to be deleted.

Command Line: DAV, DELAV, DELETEATTRIBURVALVE
Delete Customer - Deletes a customer feature. Executing this command will cause a prompt to
appear to identify the customer to be deleted.

Command Line: DC, DELC, DELCUST, DELETECUST, DELETECUSTOMER
Delete Legend Text - Deletes legend text. Executing this command will cause the legend text to be deleted.

Command Line: None- Not available on the Command Line.
Delete Pipe - Deletes a pipe element. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to
identify the pipe to be deleted. If a pipe is erroneously erased, it may be retrieved by immediately
executing the Oops Pipe command.

Command Line: DP, DELP, DELETEPIPE, DELPIPE
Delete Polyline Vertex - Deletes a vertex from a polyline style pipe feature. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to select the pipe to delete the vertex from, and
to identify the vertex to be deleted. If a vertex is erroneously deleted, immediately use the Undo
command to restore the deleted vertex.

Command Line: DPV, DELPVTX, DELETEPIPEVERTEX
180
Delete Saved View - Deletes a saved view. Executing this command will cause a prompt to
appear to identify the name of the view to remove from the view list.
Toolbar: View Controls

Delete Service Line Vertex - Deletes a vertex from a polyline style service line. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to select the customer to delete the vertex from,
and to identify the vertex to be deleted. If a vertex is erroneously deleted, immediately use the
Undo command to restore the deleted vertex.

Command Line: DSV, DELSVTX, DELETESERVICEVTX
Delete User Graphic Line - Deletes a User Graphic Line feature. Executing this command will
cause a prompt to appear to select the line to be deleted.

Command Line: DGL, DELLINE, DELETEGRAPHICLINE
Delete User Graphic Symbol - Deletes a User Graphic Symbol feature. Executing this command
will cause a prompt to appear to select the symbol to be deleted.

Command Line: DGS, DELSYM, DELETEGRAPHICSYMBOL
Delete User Text - Deletes a User text feature. Executing this command will cause a prompt to
appear to select the text item to be deleted.

Command Line: DT, DELT, DELTEXT, DELETETEXT
Delete Zero Length Pipes - Deletes all pipes with a zero length value. Executing this command will cause
all pipes with zero length values from the model.

181
Display Attribute Valves - Turns the display of the attribute valve symbols on or off. Executing
this command will cause the display of the Attribute Valve symbols to be turned on or off,
depending on their current status. Depending on the zoom scale of the image and the symbol size,
the symbols may or may not be visible.

Display Attribute Valve Text - Turns the display of the attribute valve numbers on or off.
Executing this command will cause the display of the Attribute Valve numbers to be turned on
or off, depending on their current status.

Display Background Image - Turns the display of the background image on or off. Executing
this command will cause the display of the background images to be turned on or off, depending
on the current status.
Toolbar: Display Controls

Display Crosshairs - Turns the display of the full screen Crosshairs on or off. Executing this
command will cause the display of full screen Crosshairs to be turned on or off, depending on
their current status.

Command Line: CROSSHAIRS
Display Customer Symbols - Turns the display of the customer symbols on or off. Executing this
command will cause the display of the customer symbols to be turned on or off, depending on
their current status. Depending on the zoom scale of the image, the symbols may or may not be
visible.

182
Display Flow Arrows - Turns the display of the flow direction arrows on or off. Executing this
command will cause the display of the Flow Arrow symbols to be turned on or off, depending on
their current status. Depending on the zoom scale of the image and arrow size, the symbols may
or may not be visible.

Display Color Legend - Turns the display of the Color Legend on or off. Executing this
command will cause the display of the Color Legend to be turned on or off, depending on its
current status.
Once displayed the legend may be repositioned. The legend will remain displayed until turned off. During
commands, the Legend will be hidden so that the entire work area is visible. Move the mouse pointer over
the Legend icon to redisplay a hidden legend window.

Display Node Symbols - Turns the display of the node symbols on or off. Executing this
command will cause the display of the Node symbols to be turned on or off, depending on their
current status. Depending on the zoom scale of the image and symbol size, the symbols may or
may not be visible.

Display Pipe Symbols - Turns the display of the piping symbols on or off. Executing this
command will cause the display of the pipe symbols to be turned on or off, depending on their
current status. Symbols will be displayed for valve, regulator, compressor, and well type pipe
elements. Depending on the zoom scale of the image and symbol size, the symbols may or may
not be visible.

183
Display Tool Palette - Turns the display of the Tool Palette on or off. Executing this command
will cause the display of the Tool Palette to be turned on or off, depending on its current status.
During command execution, the Tool Palette is hidden so that the entire work area is visible.
When the command is completed, the Tool Palette is again displayed. During a command execution, the Tool
Palette may be made visible by moving the mouse pointer over this icon.
Toolbar: None - Located in the upper right corner of the GDI screen
Display User Graphics -Toggles the display of the User Graphic features. Executing this
command will cause the display of the User graphic items to be turned on or off, depending on
their current status.
Toolbar: User Graphics Commands

Display User Text - Toggles the display of the User Text features. Executing this command will
cause the display of the User Text items to be turned on or off, depending on their current status.

Display Vertex Symbols - Toggles the display of the Vertex symbols. Executing this command will cause
the display of the Vertex symbols (symbols at the vertices of polyline pipe and service lines) to be turned on
or off, depending on their current status.

DXF Layer - Turns a specified layer in a DXF background off. Executing this command will cause a prompt
to appear to identify a feature on the background image, associated with the desired layer. The layer
associated with the selected feature will be turned off.

Command Line: DXFLAYER
184
Edit Attribute Valve Data - Allows access to an attribute valve's data values. Executing this
command will cause the Attribute Valve Data screen to be displayed. The data changes will be
saved when the Close command button is selected.

Command Line: EAV, EDITAV, ADITATTRIBUTEVALVE
Edit Customer Data - Allows access to a customer's data values. Executing this command will
cause a data screen to appear which allows access to the various model and attribute data
associated with the customer. The data changes will be saved when the Close command button
is selected.

Command Line: EC, EDITC, EDITCUSTOMER
Edit Customer Pipe Data By Pipe Selection - Allows access to the data values of customers assigned to
a selected pipe. Executing this command will cause the multi-customer data screen to appear. Select a
customer from the list to access its data.

Edit External Load - Changes the external load value for a selected node feature. Executing this command
will cause a prompt to appear to identify the node to be modified and to enter the new external load value.
Note: Use of this command may corrupt the automatic external load accounting. Particular care should be
taken when using this command.

Edit Multiple Customers - Allows changes to be made to a graphically selected group of

customer features. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to allow selection of
the features to be changed. Once the group has been selected, the Multiple Edit Specification
screen will appear so that the desired changes may be applied.
185
Note: Features can be selected by individually clicking on each feature, by drawing a window around the
desired features, or a combination of both. To draw a selection window, hold down the SHIFT key, place the
mouse pointer at the desired location of the first corner, then click the left mouse button. Move the mouse
to the other corner, a dashed box will be displayed, hold down the SHIFT key and select the second corner
location. If a feature that is already selected, is selected again, it will be removed from the selection set. Click
the right mouse button when the selection is complete.

Edit Multiple Nodes - Allows changes to be made to a graphically selected group of node
features. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to allow selection of the features
to be changed. Once the group has been selected, the Multiple Edit Specification screen will
appear so that the desired changes may be applied.
the right mouse button when the selection is complete.

Edit Multiple Pipes - Allows changes to be made to a graphically selected group of pipe features.
Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to allow selection of the features to be
changed. Once the group has been selected, the Multiple Edit Specification screen will appear so
that the desired changes may be applied.
the right mouse button when the selection is complete. When using a selection window, only pipes whose
nodes fall within the window will be selected.

186
Edit Node Data - Allows access to a node's data values and display of its calculated values.
Executing this command will cause the Node Data screen to be displayed. The data screen may
be used to make changes to the node data. The new values will be saved when the Close command
button is selected.

Command Line: EN, EDITN, EDITNODE
Edit Pipe Customer Count - Changes the customer count for a selected pipe. Executing this command will
cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the desired pipe, and to enter its new customer count value.

Edit Pipe Data - Allows access to a pipe's data values, and display of its calculated values.
Executing this command will cause the Pipe Data screen to be displayed. The data screen may
be used to make changes to the pipe data. The new values will be saved when the Close command
button is selected.

Command Line: EP, EDITP, EDITPIPE
Edit User Graphic Line - Allows access to the various values used to define a Graphic Line
feature. Executing this command will cause the User Graphic Line Data screen to be displayed.
the new values will be saved when the Close command button is selected.

Command Line: EGL, EDITLINE, EDITGRAPHICLINE
Edit User Graphic Symbol - Allows access to the various values used to define a Graphic
Symbol feature. Executing this command will cause the User Graphic Symbol Data screen to be
displayed. the new values will be saved when the Close command button is selected.

Command Line: EGS, EDITSYM, EDITGRAPHICSYMBOL
187
Edit User Text - Allows access to the various values used to define a User Text feature.
Executing this command will cause the Text Data screen to be displayed. The new values will be
saved when the Close command button is selected.

Command Line: ET, EDITT, EDITTEXT
Find Customer - Finds and flags a customer based on a User input value. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear requesting the search style and search value.
Search styles can be by Record Number, Internal ID Number, Link ID Number, Address, or
Attribute Value. If a match is found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The
marker flag is persistent and will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Customer Flag command.
Note: If a alphanumeric search item is selected, the case and syntax must be identical for a match.

Command Line: FC, FINDC, FINDCUSTOMER
Find Customer By Address - Finds and flags a customer based on a User input address value. Executing
this command will cause a prompt to appear to specify the desired search value. If a match is found, a marker
flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain displayed until
turned off using the Clear Customer Flag command.
Note: This command is only available when an attribute database is attached, and the Address field is
assigned. The case and syntax must be identical for a match.

Command Line: FCAD, FINDCADD, FINDCUSTOMERADDRESS
Find Customer By Attribute - Finds and flags a customer based on a User input attribute value. Executing
this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to specify the attribute item to check , and to specify
the match value. If a match is found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag
is persistent and will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Customer Flag command.
Note: This command is only available when an attribute database is attached. If a alphanumeric search item
is selected, the case and syntax must be identical for a match.

Command Line: FCATT, FINDCATT, FINDCUSTOMERATTRIBUTE
188
Find Customer By Internal ID - Finds and flags a customer based on a User input internal ID value.
Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to specify the desired search value. If a match is
found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain
displayed until turned off using the Clear Customer Flag command.

Command Line: FCID, FINDCID, FINDCUSTOMERID
Find Customer By Link ID - Finds and flags a customer based on a User input link ID value. Executing this
command will cause a prompt to appear to specify the desired search value. If a match is found, a marker flag
will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain displayed until turned
off using the Clear Customer Flag command.
Note: The case and syntax must be identical for a match.

Command Line: FCLINK, FINDCLINK, FINDCUSTOMERLINKID
Find Customer By Record Number - Finds and flags a customer based on a User input record number
value. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to specify the desired search value. If a match
is found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain
displayed until turned off using the Clear Customer Flag command.

Command Line: FCREC, FINDCREC, FINDCUSTOMERRECORD
Find DXF Text - Finds and flags a DXF Text location for a User input value. If a match is found, a marker
flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain displayed until
turned off using the Clear Text Flag command.

Command Line: FDXF, FINDDXF, FINDDXFTEXT
Find Node - Finds and flags a node based on a User input value. Executing this command will
cause a series of prompts to appear requesting the search style and search value. Search styles can
be by Record Number, or Name (Number) value. If a match is found, a marker flag will be placed
at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain displayed until turned off
using the Clear Node Flag command.
189

Command Line: FN, FINDN, FINDNODE
Find Node By Name - Finds and flags a node based on a User input name/number value. Executing this
off using the Clear Node Flag command.

Command Line: FNAME, FINDNAME, FINDNODENAME
Find Node By Record Number - Finds and flags a node based on a User input record number. The marker
flag is persistent and will remain displayed until it is turned off using the Clear Node Flag command.

Command Line: FNR, FINDNREC, FINDNODERECORD
Find Pipe - Finds and flags a pipe based on a User input value. Executing this command will
cause a series of prompts to appear requesting the search style and search value. Search styles can
be by Record Number, Internal ID Number, Link ID Number, Address, or Attribute value. If a
match is found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is
persistent and will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Pipe Flag command.

Command Line: FP, FINDP, FINDPIPE
Find Pipe By Address - Finds and flags a pipe based on a User input address value. Executing this command
will cause a prompt to appear to specify the desired search value. If a match is found, a marker flag will be
placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain displayed until turned off
using the Clear Pipe Flag command.
Note: This command is only available when an attribute database is attached, and the Address field is
assigned. The case and syntax must be identical for a match.
190
Command Line: FPAD, FINDPIPEADDRESS
Find Pipe By Attribute - Finds and flags a pipe based on a User input attribute value. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to specify the attribute item to check , and to specify the
match value. If a match is found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is
persistent and will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Pipe Flag command.
Note: This command is only available when an attribute database is attached. If a alphanumeric search item
is selected, the case and syntax must be identical for a match.

Command Line: FPATT, FINDPATT, FINDPIPEATTRIBUTE
Find Pipe By Internal ID - Finds and flags a pipe based on a User input internal ID value. Executing this
off using the Clear Pipe Flag command.

Command Line: FPID, FINDPID, FINDPIPEID
Find Pipe By Link ID - Finds and flags a pipe based on a User input link ID value. Executing this command
will cause a prompt to appear to specify the desired search value. If a match is found, a marker flag will be
placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain displayed until turned off
using the Clear Pipe Flag command.

Command Line: FPLINK, FINDPLINK, FINDPIPELINKID
Find Pipe By Record Number - Finds and flags a customer based on a User input record number value.
Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to specify the desired search value. If a match is
found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and will remain
displayed until turned off using the Clear Pipe Flag command.

Command Line: FPREC, FINDPREC, FINDPIPERECORD
191
Find User Text Value - Finds and flags a User Text location based on a User input value.
Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear requesting the search value. If a match is
found, a marker flag will be placed at the associated location. The marker flag is persistent and
will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear User Text Flag command. If this command
is repeated using the same text value, the next occurrence of that value will be located and flagged.

Command Line: FT, FINDT, FINDTEXT
Flag Customers By Item Value - Finds and flags customers based on a User specified item value. Executing
this command will cause a series of prompts to appear requesting the search item and item value. Search
items can be one of any of the model data items associated with a customer feature. If a match is found, a
marker flag will be placed at the associated location. Multiple matches may be found. The marker flag is
persistent and will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Customer Item Flag command.

Command Line: FLAGC, FLAGCUST, FLAGCUSTOMERITEM
Flag Nodes By Item Value - Finds and flags nodes based on a User specified item value. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear requesting the search item and item value. Search items
can be one of any of the model data items associated with a node feature. If a match is found, a marker flag
will be placed at the associated location. Multiple matches may be found. The marker flag is persistent and
will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Node Item Flag command.

Command Line: FLAGN, FLAGNODE, FLAGNODEITEM
Flag Pipes By Item Value - Finds and flags pipes based on a User specified item value. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear requesting the search item and item value. Search items
can be one of any of the model data items associated with a pipe feature. If a match is found, a marker flag
will be placed at the associated location. Multiple matches may be found. The marker flag is persistent and
will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Pipe Item Flag command.

Command Line: FLAGP, FLAGPIPE, FLAGPIPEITEM
192
Flag Supply Nodes - Finds and flags nodes with positive load values. Executing this command will causes
GASWorkS to search for nodes where the total load value is positive (greater than 0). A “supply” flag will
placed at each location where a supply node is found. The marker flags are persistent and will remain
displayed until turned off using the Clear Supply Flags command

Command Line: FLAGS, FLAGSUPPLY, FLAGSUPPLYNODE
Flag Unassigned Customers - Finds and flags customers which are not assigned to a supply main. Executing
this command will cause GASWorkS to place flag symbols at the locations of all customers that are not
assigned to a pipe/main. The marker flags are persistent and will remain displayed until turned off using the
Clear Customer Flags command.

Flag Unbroken Intersections - Finds and flags intersections where the lateral pipe is not connected to the
header pipe. Executing this command will cause GASWorkS to search for instances where a lateral pipe end
is located very near a non-broken header pipe (tee connections where the header and lateral pipe are not
connected). An “intersection” flag will be placed at each location where an unbroken intersection is found.
The marker flags are persistent and will remain displayed until turned off using the Clear Intersection Flag
command, or until manually turned off, individually by the User.
Note: Before executing this command, set the node sizes to an appropriate absolute value.

Go To XY Coordinates - Positions the upper left corner of the image at a User specified
location.

Command Line: G, GOTO, GOTOXY
Highlight Pipe - Highlights a selected pipe. Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to
identify the pipe to be highlighted. Highlighting a pipe is useful to quickly mark pipes as they are checked
or reviewed during the data check process.

Command Line: HIP, HIPIPE, HIGHLIGHTPIPE
193
Insert Compressor - Inserts a Compressor type element into an existing pipe element. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the pipe to insert the compressor into, the
location of the compressor end points, and operating data. At least one end must be at an existing node
location and at least one end must be a new (tapped) location along the pipe that the compressor is being
inserted into. When adding a compressor the From Node must represent the upstream (suction) side of the
compressor and the To Node must represent the downstream (discharge) side of the compressor.

Command Line: INSC, INSCOMP, INSERTCOMPRESSOR
Insert Regulator - Inserts a Regulator type element into an existing pipe element. Executing this command
will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the pipe to insert the regulator into, the location of the
regulator end points, and operating data. At least one end must be at an existing node location and at least
one end must be a new (tapped) location along the pipe that the regulator is being inserted into. When adding
a regulator the From Node must represent the upstream (high pressure) side of the regulator and the To Node
must represent the downstream (low pressure) side of the regulator.

Command Line: INSR, INSREG, INSERT REGULATOR
Insert Valve - Inserts a Valve type element into an existing pipe element. Executing this command will cause
a series of prompts to appear to identify the pipe to insert the valve into, the location of the valve end points,
and operating data. At least one end must be at an existing node location and at least one end must be a new
(tapped) location along the pipe that the valve is being inserted into. The From Node and To Node order do
not matter for Valve type elements.

Command Line: INS, INVOLVE, INSERT VALVE,
Join Adjacent Pipes - Joins two adjacent pipe segments. Executing this command will cause a
series of prompts to appear to identify the pipes to be joined. During the join process the node
common to both pipes will be removed. Arc style pipes cannot be joined. The new (combined)
pipe will possess the hydraulic and graphic data associated with the first pipe that was selected.

Command Line: J, JOIN, JOINPIPES
Make User Text From Legend - See Add Legend As Text
194
Match Customer Graphic Properties - Assigns the graphic data values from one customer feature to
another. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” customer
and the customer or customers to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MCG, MATCHCUSTOMERGRAPHICS
Match Node Properties - Assigns both the graphic and hydraulic data values from one node feature to
another. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” node and
the node or nodes to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MNP, MATCHNODE, MATCHNODEPROPERTIES
Match Node Graphic Properties - Assigns the graphic data values from one Node feature to another.
Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” node and the node
or nodes to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MNG, MATCHNODEGRAPHICS
Match Node Hydraulic Properties - Assigns the hydraulic data values from one node feature to another.
Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” node and the node
or nodes to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MNH, MATCHNODEHYDRAULICS
Match Pipe Properties - Assigns both the graphic and hydraulic data values from one pipe feature to
another. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” pipe and the
pipe or pipes to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MPP, MATCHPIPE, MATCHPIPEPROPERTIES
Match Pipe Facility - Assigns the facility value from one pipe feature to another. Executing this command
will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” pipe and the pipe or pipes to assign the base
values to.
195
Command Line: MPF, MATCHFACILITY, MATCHPIPEFACILITY
Match Pipe Graphic Properties - Assigns the graphic data values from one pipe feature to another.
Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” pipe and the pipe or
pipes to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MPG, MATCHPIPEGRAPHICS
Match Pipe Hydraulic Properties - Assigns the hydraulic data values from one pipe feature to another.
Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” pipe and the pipe or
pipes to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MPH, MATCHPIPEHYDRAULICS
Match User Graphic Line Properties - Assigns the graphic data values from one Graphic Line feature to
another. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” line and the
line or lines to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MGL, MATCHLINE, MATCHGRAPHICLINE
Match User Graphic Symbol Properties - Assigns the graphic data values from one Graphic Symbol
feature to another. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base”
symbol and the symbol or symbols to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MGS, MATCHSYMBOL, MATCHGRAPHICSYMBOL
Match User Text Properties - Assigns the graphic data values from one User Text feature to another.
Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the “base” text and the text item
or items to assign the base values to.

Command Line: MT, MATCHTEXT
196
Maximize Graphics Window - Increases the size of the Graphic Data Interface window to fill
the GASWorkS display area. Executing this command will cause the GDI window to be sized to
maximum dimensions that will fit on the current computer display.

Command Line: MAX, MAXWIN, MAXIMIZEWINDOW
Measure Distance - Calculates a distance based on two User specified points. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the points to measure between.
Similar to a polyline pipe or service, multiple points may be selected along a route. Right click
the mouse, enter an “E”, or press the ENTER (5) key to end the prompt process and display a
measure distance.

Command Line: MD, DISTANCE, MEASURE, MEASUREDISTANCE
Move Attribute Valve - Allows an attribute valve to be repositioned. Executing this command will cause
a series of prompts to appear to identify the valve to be moved and the new location.
Toolbar: Attribute Valve

Command Line: MAV, MOVEAVALVE, MOVEATTRIBUTEVALVE
Move Attribute Valve Text - Allows the text associated with an attribute valve to be
repositioned. Executing this command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the text
to be moved, and to specify the new location and rotation.
Toolbar: Attribute Valve

Command Line: MAVT, MOVEVALVETEXT
Move Background Image - Moves a background image based on User selected points. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to be displayed to identify the image to be affected, the base point,
and the new location. A prompt will appear to move the image, select an appropriate response.

Move Branch Customer Tap - Allows the tap location associated with a branch customer feature
to be repositioned. When selected, a series of prompts will appear to identify the affected
customer, and to specify the new tap location.
197
Command Line: MBT MOVEBRANCH, MOVEBRANCHTAP
Move Customer - Allows a customer symbol to be relocated. Executing this command will cause
a series of prompts to appear to identify the customer to be moved and the new location. This
command does not change the supply main assignment.

Command Line: MC, MOVEC, MOVECUSTOMER
Move Customer Text - Allows the text associated with a customer feature to be repositioned.
When selected, prompts will appear to identify the text to be moved, and to specify the new
location and rotation.

Command Line: MCT, MOVECTEXT, MOVECUSTOMERTEXT
Move Legend Text - Allows the legend text to be repositioned as a block. Executing this command causes
a prompt to appear to identify the new location.

Move Node - Moves a node and any connected pipes. Executing this command causes a series
of prompts to appear to identify the node to be moved, and the new location. The node's new
position may be entered by coordinates or by positioning with the mouse.
Toolbar: Graphic Edit Commands

Command Line: MN, MOVEN, MOVENODE
Move Node Text - Allows the text associated with a node feature to be repositioned. Executing
this command causes a series of prompts to appear to identify the node to move the text for, and
to specify the new location and rotation for the text.

Command Line: MNT, MOVENTEXT, MOVENODETEXT
198
Move Pipe End - Moves a pipe's end. Executing this command causes a series of prompts to
appear to identify the pipe to be moved, the end to be moved, and the new location. The pipes's
new position may be entered by coordinates or by positioning with the mouse. This command can
be used to connect or to disconnect a pipe from a node.

Command Line: MP, MOVEP, MOVEPIPE, MOVEPIPEEND
Move Pipe Text - Allows the text associated with a pipe feature to be repositioned. Executing
this command causes a series of prompts to appear to identify the pipe to move the text for, and
to specify the new location and rotation.

Command Line: MPT, MOVEPTEXT, MOVEPIPETEXT
Move Pipe Vertex - Allows a vertex for a polyline style pipe feature to be repositioned.
Executing this command causes a prompt to appear to identify the vertex to be moved, and to
specify its new location.

Command Line: MPV, MOVEPIPEVERTEX
Move Service Tap - Allows a customer service line tap location to be repositioned. Executing
this command causes a prompt to appear to identify the associated customer, and to specify the
new tap location.

Command Line: MST, MOVETAP, MOVESERVICETAP
Move Service Line Vertex - Allows a vertex for a polyline style service line to be repositioned.
Executing this command causes a prompt to appear to identify the associated customer, the vertex
to be moved, and to specify its new location.

Command Line: MSV, MOVESERVICEVERTEX
Move User Graphic Line - Allows a User Graphic Line end to be relocated. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the line to be moved, the end (or
vertex) to be moved and the new location.
199
Command Line: MGL, MOVELINE, MOVEGRAPHICLINE
Move User Graphic Symbol - Allows a User Graphic Symbol to be relocated. Executing this
command will cause a series of prompts to appear to identify the symbol to be moved, and the
new location.

Command Line: MGS, MOVESYM, MOVEGRAPHICSYMBOL
Move User Text - Allows the placement of a User Text feature to be changed. Executing this
command causes a prompt to appear to identify the text item to be moved, and to specify its new
location.

Command Line: MT, MOVET, MOVETEXT
Multiply Customer Loads - Multiplies all of the customer loads by a User specified value. Executing this
command will cause GASWorkS to change the load value for all of the customers by the specified value. The
existing load values are multiplied by the specified factor.

Multiply Node Loads - Multiplies all of the node loads by a User specified value. Executing this command
will cause GASWorkS to change the base load value for all of the nodes by the specified value. The existing
load values are multiplied by the specified factor.

Node Snap - See Snap Mode command.
Oops Customer (Undelete Customer) - The Oops Customer command can be used to restore
(undelete) a customer feature that has been recently deleted. The command should be executed
immediately following the accidental deletion. However, it can often be used even after several
commands have been executed. A beep will be sounded if the command cannot retrieve the most
recently erased customer feature.
200
Command Line: OOPSC, UNDELC, UNDELETECUSTOMER
Oops Pipe (Undelete Pipe) - The Oops Pipe command can be used to restore (undelete) a pipe
element that has been recently deleted. The command should be executed immediately following
the accidental deletion. However, it can often be used even after several commands have been
executed. A beep will be sounded if the command cannot retrieve the most recently erased pipe
element.

Command Line: OOPSP, UNDELP, UNDELETEPIPE
Oops User Graphic (Undelete Graphic) - The Oops User Graphic command can be used to
restore (undelete) a graphic symbol or line that has been recently deleted. The command should
be executed immediately following the accidental deletion. However, it can often be used even
after several commands have been executed. A beep will be sounded if the command cannot
retrieve the most recently erased graphic item.

Command Line: OOPSG, UNDELG, UNDELETEGRPAHIC
Oops User Text (Undelete Text) - The Oops User Text command can be used to restore
(undelete) a text item that has been recently deleted. The command should be executed
immediately following the accidental deletion. However, it can often be used even after several
commands have been executed. A beep will be sounded if the command cannot retrieve the most
recently erased text item.

Command Line: OOPST, UNDELT, UNDELETETEXT
Pan Image - Repositions the image based on a User specified displacement. Executing this
command causes a series of prompts to appear to identify two locations. The first location
identifies the reference point to be moved, the second location identifies the reference point’s new
position.

Command Line: P, PAN
201
Plot - Executes the GDI plot routine. Executing this command causes the Plot Control dialog box
to be displayed.

Command Line: PLOT
Purge Customers - Deletes unassigned, invalid coordinate customers. Executing this command will cause
all customers which are unassigned to a pipe and which possess invalid coordinate values, to be deleted.

Purge User Text - Deletes User Text items with invalid coordinate values. Executing this command will
cause all User text items which possess invalid coordinate values, to be deleted.

Reassign Customer - Assigns a customer to another (different) supply main. Executing this
command causes a series of prompts to appear to identify the affected customer, and the new
supply main.

Command Line: RC, REASSIGN, REASSIGNCUSTOMER
Reassign Customer Pipe ID Numbers - Allows the assigned pipe ID number for a customer to be changed.
Executing this command will cause a prompt to appear to allow the desired customer to be identified, and
the new value to be entered.

202
Repaint Display - Repaint (redraw) the current screen image. Executing this command causes
the model and background images to be redrawn in the GDI work area. If the Automatic Repaint
option is not selected, this command is useful for updating the display after various display
modifying commands are executed.

Command Line: RD, RP, REDRAW, REPAINT
Reduce Nodes - Eliminates unneeded nodes. Executing this command will cause the pipes in the model to
be searched for nodes that can be deleted. Based on User specified process values, nodes are removed where
a node between two pipes of the same size is encountered.

Regenerate Display - Re-reads the model data and background images from the disk file.
Executing this command causes the model data and background image data to be re-read from the
associated disk file. This command is useful to restore the original model conditions without
closing and reopening the model.

Command Line: RG, REGEN, REGENERATE
Report Customers With No Coordinates - Reports customers with invalid coordinates. Executing this
command will cause GASWorkS to find and report all customers which possess invalid coordinate values

Reset Colors - Resets the color of the model features to their saved values. Executing this command changes
the color of all of the model features to currently saved values. This command is useful to restore the original
colors after executing a trace or color coded query.

Command Line: RESET, RESETCOLORS
203
Reset Command List Location - Resets the position of the Command List to its default location. Executing
this command will cause Command List to be repositioned to the default location.

Reset Customer Colors - Resets the color of the customer features to their saved values. Executing this
command changes the color of all customer features to the currently saved values. This command is useful
to restore the original colors after executing a trace or color coded query.

Command Line: RESETC, RESETCUSTOMERCOLORS
Reset Node Colors - Resets the color of the node features to their saved values. Executing this command
changes the color of all node features to the currently saved values. This command is useful to restore the
original colors after executing a trace or color coded query.

Command Line: RESETN, RESETNODECOLORS
Reset Pipe Colors - Resets the color of the pipe features to their saved values. Executing this command
changes the color of all pipe features to the currently saved values. This command is useful to restore the
original colors after executing a trace or color coded query.

Command Line: RESETP, RESETPIPECOLORS
Resize Graphic Window - Resets the Graphic Data Interface window to its "normal" size.
Executing this command will cause the size of the GDI window to be set to a predetermined
height and width.

Save Current View - Saves the currently displayed view to the view list. Executing this
command will cause a prompt to appear to specify the name for the saved view.

204
Save Feature Colors - Saves the currently displayed/assigned model feature colors. Executing this command
causes the current feature colors to be saved. This is useful for saving colors assigned as a result of a trace
or color coded query.
Note: This command can also be executed from the Set Colors screen.

Command Line: SAVECOLORS
Scale Background Image - Adjusts the scale factor required to make an image match a specified linear
distance, based on a pair of known points on the image. Executing this command will cause a series of
prompts to be displayed to identify the image to be affected, the known points, and the actual distance. The
resulting adjustment factor will be calculated and displayed. A prompt will appear to automatically adjust
the scale factor, select an appropriate response.

Scroll Control - The GDI image can be moved up or down, or right or left using this icon. This
process of moving the image is referred to as “panning”. The amount that the image moves when
the scroll icon is selected, is determined by the value of the Horizontal and Vertical Pan Change
values. The pan values are set by selecting the Settings routine from the Graphics menu list. To pan
the image right, click the portion of the scroll icon that contains the arrow symbol that points right. To pan
the image up, click the portion of the scroll icon that contains the arrow symbol that points up.
Toolbar: None - Located in the lower left corner of the GDI screen
Set Attribute Valve Color - Sets the display color for the attribute valve symbols. Executing this
command causes the Color Selection dialog box to be displayed. To set a color - click on the
desired color, then click the OK command button to apply the change.

Set Attribute Valve Size - Sets the display size of the attribute valve symbols. Executing this
command will cause a prompt to appear for entering the new size value. The size value can be
set to an absolute value (in coordinate units) or to a relative value (in percent of the diagonal
screen width).
205
Set Colors - Sets the colors for the displayed features. Executing this command will open the
Display Colors dialog box.

Command Line: COLORS, SETCOLORS
Set Customer Color - Sets the display color for the customer symbols. Executing this command
will cause the Color Selection dialog box to appear. To set a color - click on the desired color,
then click the OK command button to apply the change.

Set Customer Size - Changes the default size setting for the customer symbols. Executing this command will
cause a prompt to appear to enter the new size value. The size value can be set to an absolute value (in
coordinate units) or to a relative value (in percent of the diagonal screen width).

Set Pipe Symbol Size - Changes the default size setting for the pipe symbols. Executing this command will
cause a prompt to appear to enter the new size value. The size value can be set to an absolute value (in
coordinate units) or to a relative value (in percent of the diagonal screen width).

Set Text Options - Provides access to the text display options. When selected, the Text Display
Options screen will appear.

Command Line: TEXT, SETTEXT
206
Set User Graphic Symbol Size - Changes the default size setting for the User Graphic symbols. Executing
this command will cause a prompt to appear to enter the new size value. The size value can be set to an
absolute value (in coordinate units) or to a relative value (in percent of the diagonal screen width).

Set User Text Color - Sets the display color for the User Text features. Executing this command
will cause the Color Selection dialog box to appear. To set a color - click on the desired color,
then click the OK command button to apply the change. Text colors may also be individually set
using the Edit Text command.

Shift Model Coordinates - Allows the model coordinates to be shifted, scaled, or rotated based on User
specified control values. Executing this command will cause the Shift Specification screen to be displayed.
Select the Shift command button to change the coordinate values.

Snap Mode - This icon is used to turn the node snap feature on and off. When selected
(depressed), the node snap feature will be enabled (turned on). When Snap is turned on, a circle
representing the snap target area will appear during coordinate entry. Node snapping attempts to
force (snap) new coordinate selections to an existing node near the selected location.
When a new node location is entered, GASWorkS will search for an existing node within the snap tolerance
of the entered location. If a node is found, the coordinates for the existing node will be used, and the new line
will be "snapped" to the existing node. If no node is found, a message will appear allowing you to use the
selected location or to attempt to select another location. The snap tolerance is set by selecting the Settings
item from the Graphics Menu list.
Note: As an alternative to using node snap, the SHIFT key can be held down while the left mouse button is
clicked when entering a node location, the pipe end will be automatically snapped to the nearest existing
node regardless of the current Snap mode.

Command Line: NODESNAP, SNAP
207
Solve - Indicates whether the model is "balanced", and provides access to the Solution Data
screen. Executing this command cause the Solution Data screen to appear.
Note: A tilted scale symbol indicates that the model is unbalanced (changes have been made since the last
solution). A level scale indicates that the model is balanced.
Toolbar: None - Located in the lower right corner of the GDI screen
Command Line: S, SOLVE
Swap Pipe Ends - Automatically exchanges the From and To Nodes for a pipe feature. Executing
this command will cause a prompt to appear to identify the affected pipe. This command is useful
for quickly correcting regulators or compressors that have been input backwards.

Command Line: SWAP, SWAPENDS, SWAPPIPEENDS
Tap Pipe - "Taps" (splits or breaks) a pipe segment. Executing this command will cause a prompt
to appear to identify the pipe to be tapped, and the tap location. This command splits a pipe into
two segments, updates the resulting pipe segments, and adds a new node at the tap location. Once
tapped, a new pipe may be extended from the tap node.
Note: If the CTRL key is held down while clicking the left mouse button (when selecting a From or To Node
location), the tap routine is automatically executed using the current mouse pointer location to find the pipe
to be tapped and the tap location.
Note: If the desired tap location coincides with an existing node (pipe end) location, holding down the SHIFT
key while pressing the left mouse button (when selecting the tap location), will cause existing node location
to be used as the tap location, and will automatically connect the pipe end associated with existing node to
the tap location.

Command Line: TP, TAP, TAPPIPE
Toggle Digitizing Tablet - Turns the digitizing tablet on or off. Executing this command causes
coordinate entry from the digitizing tablet to be turned on or off, depending on the current status.
The tablet must be calibrated before it can be turned on. If an attempt is made to turn the tablet
on before it is calibrated, the tablet calibration routine will automatically be started. When the
tablet is turned on, commands which expect a coordinate pair for input, will expect to receive the required
coordinate values from the tablet.
208
Command Line: TB, TABLET
Trace - Color codes features along a trace route. Executing this command causes the Trace
Specification screen to be displayed.

Command Line: T, TRACE
Trace & Update - Allows data values to be set for features found along a trace route. Executing this
command causes the Trace Update Specification screen to be displayed.

Command Line: TU, TRACEUPDATE
Undelete Customer (Oops) - See Oops Customer.
Undelete Pipe (Oops) - See Oops Pipe.
Undelete User Graphics (Oops) - See Oops User Graphics.
Undelete User Text (Oops) - See Oops User Text.
Undo - Undoes a previous data or graphic change. Executing this command causes the most
recent changes to be “undone”. The Allow Undo preference must be selected to allow this
command to be functional.
Note: Changes made by some commands cannot be undone, specifically feature additions (like adding a pipe
or customer) cannot be undone. New features must to be deleted to remove them.
Toolbar: None - Located near the upper left corner of the GDI screen.
Command Line: UNDO
Update Customer Count - Updates the customer count for all pipes. Executing this command will cause
the customer count for all pipes to be updated based on proximity to the customer tap locations. This
command is useful for correcting customer counts when the pipe customer counts become corrupt.

209
View Trace Report - Displays a previously created trace report. Executing this command allows
a previously saved trace report to be retrieved and displayed.

Command Line: None - Not available on Command Line
Zoom All - Redisplays the model schematic so that the entire image fits within the GDI work
area. Executing this command causes the display to be “zoomed” to fit all of the model and
background image in the GDI work area.

Command Line: ZA, ZALL, ZOOMA, ZOOMALL, ZOOMFIT
Zoom In - Enlarges the image size. Executing this command causes a prompt to display for
identifying the center of the zoom area. The image will be centered about the selected point. The
amount that the image size changes is determined by the value of the Zoom Factor value. The
Zoom Factor is set by selecting the Settings item from the Graphics menu list.

Command Line: ZI, ZIN, ZOOMI, ZOOMIN
Zoom Model - Redisplays the model schematic so that the entire model image fits within the GDI work area.
Executing this command causes the display to be “zoomed” to fit all of the model (only) image in the GDI
working area.

Command Line: ZM, ZMDL, ZMODEL, ZOOMM, ZOOMMODEL
Zoom Next - Displays the next image in the image list. Executing this command causes the scale
and position to be changed to the next image saved in the image list. Up to 10 images can be
maintained in the image list, per Display Panel.

Command Line: ZN, ZNEXT, ZOOMN, ZOOMNEXT
210
Zoom Out - Reduces the image size. Executing this command causes the display to be “zoomed”
out. The amount that the image size changes is determined by the value of the Zoom Factor value.
The Zoom Factor is set by selecting the Settings item from the Graphics menu list.

Command Line: ZO, ZOUT, ZOOMO, ZOOMOUT
Zoom Previous - Displays the previous image in the image list. Executing this command causes
the scale and position to be changed to the previous image saved in the image list. Up to 10
images can be maintained in the image list, per Display Panel.

Command Line: ZP, ZPREV, ZOOMP, ZOOMPREVIOUS
Zoom Scale - Reduces or enlarges the image by a User specified scale factor. Executing this
command causes a prompt to display for identifying a factor to scale the current image by. Scale
factors less than one reduce the image size. Scale factors greater than one enlarge the image size.

Command Line: ZS, ZSCALE, ZOOMS, ZOOMSCALE
Zoom View - Displays a previously saved view. Executing this command causes a prompt to
display for identifying the view name. Use the Save Current View command to save a view

Command Line: ZV, ZVIEW, ZOOMV, ZOOMVIEW
Zoom Window - Enlarges the image to fit in a User specified window. Executing this command
cause a series of prompts to appear to define the zoom window. Select the first corner of the
window by moving the mouse pointer to the desire position, then click the left mouse button.
Select the opposite corner in a similar manner. A dashed box will appear while the second corner
is being selected.

Command Line: ZW, ZWIN, ZOOMW, ZOOMWINDOW
211
Mouse Events...
While working in the GDI, when no command is executing, clicking the left and right mouse buttons will
cause certain actions to occur. The actions are described in the following table:
Mouse Event Resulting Action

Left Click Causes the pipe nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected, then
displays the Edit Pipe data screen.
SHIFT - Left Click Causes the node nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected, then
displays the Edit Node data screen.
CTRL - Left Click Causes the customer nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected, then
displays the Edit Customer data screen.
ALT - Left Click Causes the User Text item nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected,
then displays the Edit Customer data screen.
Right Click Causes the pipe nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected, then
displays the Pop-Up GDI menu list. Select the desired action from the
list, or close the menu without executing an action/command.
SHIFT - Right Click Causes the node nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected, then
CTRL - Right Click Causes the customer nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected, then
ALT - Right Click Causes the User Text item nearest to the mouse pointer to be selected,
then displays the Pop-Up GDI menu list. Select the desired action from
the list, or close the menu without executing an action/command.
Clicking the right mouse button when a command is executing, can cause various actions. If the command
is a repeating command, generally right clicking the mouse exists the command. If the command requires a
value entry, right clicking the mouse is the same as pressing the ENTER (5) key. If the command requires
a feature selection, right clicking the mouse is the same as a left click.
Display of the Pop-Up GDI menu can be enabled or disabled using the Options item in the Preferences
submenu of the File menu list. When display of the Pop-Up GDI menu is disabled, right clicking the mouse
when a command is not executing, will repeat the last command.
212
When the Pop-Up GDI menu is displayed, it lists various commands that can be
executed and actions that can be taken. Actions include repeating the last
command, or canceling the menu. Two command lists are generally included.
The basic command list includes the Pan and various Zoom commands. If a
feature is selected, an extended menu list will also be included. The contents of
the extend menu list will vary depending on the style used to display the menu.
The extended list will include commands that are associated with the selected
data feature. When an item in the extended list is selected, the command is
executed and applied to the selected feature as appropriate.
The display of the Pop-Up GDI menu can be turned off by selecting the Turn
Off GDI Pop-Up Menu item from the menu list (at the bottom of the list).
Key Events...
While working in the GDI, certain key strokes will cause various actions to occur. The actions are described
in the following table:
Key Event Resulting Action

CTRL-F Causes the “Find” option list to be displayed - select an item from the
list to execute the associated “find” command to be executed.
CTRL-Z Causes the “Undo” option list to be displayed - select an item from the
list to execute the associated “undo” command to be executed.
ENTER Causes the currently displayed prompt value to be accepted when a
command is executing. Or, repeats the last command if no command is
executing.
ESC Causes the current command to be canceled.
213
Entering Coordinates...
Many of the GDI commands require a location to be specified by coordinates. When a coordinate pair is
required, the value can be entered using one of several methods. The methods are described in the following
table:
Entry Method Entry Instructions

By Default The various “Add Pipe” commands remember the position of the last
To Node value. When re-executing one of the Add Pipe commands, the
last To Node's coordinate value will be displayed as the location for the
new From Node, when the From Node coordinate prompt appears. To
accept the value, press the ENTER (5) key, or press the right or middle
mouse buttons.
Coordinate Pair X and Y coordinate values can be entered by typing the desired X
value, followed by a comma or space, followed by the Y value. Do not
include a digit group separator when entering the coordinate values.
For example: 1000,1000 or 1000 1000

Relative Angle & Distance In some cases, a location can be entered using a relative angle and
distance. To use this method enter an "@" symbol, followed by the
distance value, then the "<" symbol, followed by the angle value.
For example: @500<90
The top of the screen represents an angle position of zero. Positive

angles are measured clockwise from 12 o’clock (North). In terms of
angle measurements, North is at the top of the screen.
The relative angle and distance method can be used with the Add Pipe
commands or the Add User Graphic Line command to specify the
“Next End”, To Node, or vertex location.
Fixed Length & Selected In some cases, a location can be entered using a fixed length and a
Angle graphically selected angle. To use this method enter an "@" symbol,
followed by the distance value, followed by "<?".
For example: @500<?
A prompt will appear after the entry to allow graphical selection of the
desired angle.
214
Entry Method Entry Instructions
The Fixed length and selected angle method can be used with the Add
Pipe commands or the Add User Graphic Line command to specify the
“Next End”, To Node, or vertex location.
Node Name The location of an existing node can be used by entering the node’s
name (number) at the prompt. To use this method enter an "N" followed
by the name of the node, or enter an "N" followed by a space and the
name of the node to be used.
For example: N REG1

Mouse Selection Free-style locations can be entered by moving the mouse pointer or
crosshairs to the desired position, then press the left mouse button to
select the current position.
Snapped To An Existing Node A location can be snapped to an existing node location using the “auto”
(Using Auto Snap) snap feature. The auto snap feature causes the coordinates of the
nearest node to the mouse pointer or crosshairs to be used. To use the
auto snap feature, hold down the SHIFT key while pressing the left
mouse button.
Snapped To An Existing Node A location can be snapped to an existing node location using the node
(Using Node Snap) snap features. The node snap feature causes the coordinates of a node
falling within the snap tolerance of the mouse pointer or crosshairs to
be used. To use the node snap feature, turn on the Node Snap mode by
clicking on the Node Snap icon located on the Construction toolbar.
The node snap tolerance is set by selecting the Settings item from the
Graphics menu list.
Digitized If a WinTab compliant digitizing tablet is connected, coordinate values
can be digitized using the GDI. Before the tablet can be used, it must
first be calibrated using the Calibrate Digitizing Tablet command. Once
calibrated, the tablet can be turned on or off using the Toggle Digitizing
Tablet command, to either accept or ignore coordinates from the tablet.
When the tablet is turned on, it will be automatically activated when a
command is executed which requires the entry of a coordinate pair, and
deactivated after the coordinate location has been digitized. See the On-
Line Help system for complete details and examples on using a
digitizing tablet with GASWorkS.
When entering coordinates for a new node's position, if an existing node is found within a distance equal to
the Node Size value, the new node's coordinates are ignored and the existing node's coordinates are used.
This prevents multiple nodes from being placed at the same location. Additionally, the Node Snap command
described earlier in this section can be used to force node snapping when entering new coordinate values.
215
Attribute Valve Data Screen...

If attribute valve data is included in the model, the data associated with the Attribute Valve features is
accessed through the Attribute Valve Data screen. The features associated with the data screen are described
below:
Data Items...
Pipe ID - This item specifies the internal identification number of the pipe that the valve is associated with.
The value is automatically assigned and cannot be directly changed by the user.
Valve Number - This item specifies a number used to identify the valve. The number can be up to 20
alphanumeric characters. To enter a value, type the desired value in the edit box.
Command Buttons...
Usage Notes...
216
Background Image Settings...

The settings that control the display of the background image are accessed through the Background Image
Settings screen. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items - General...
Attached Background Files - Displays the names of the currently attached background files. Select a name
from the list to make changes to its display properties. The display of a file can be controlled by checking
or unchecking the file in the list. If a check mark (U) is displayed next the filename, the contents of the file
will be displayed. To turn the display of a specific file off, uncheck it in the list.
217
Data Items - BMP File...
When a bitmap (BMP) style file is selected from the Filename list, the settings portion of the screen will
contain the following data items:
Scale Factor (Coordinate To Pixel Ratio) - Specifies the number of coordinate units represented by one
pixel. This value sets the scale for the image. See the Usage Notes for instructions on calculating this value.
Type the appropriate value in the edit box. Or, select the Calculate Scale Factor command button to calculate
a value.
Insertion Point (Upper Left Coordinates) - These items specify the position of the upper left (northwest)
corner of the image. The X value represents the horizontal coordinate value of the upper left corner. The Y
value represents the vertical coordinate value of the upper left corner. Enter the appropriate values by typing
them in the data field. The values are expressed in the current coordinate units.
218
Data Items - DXF File...
When a DXF style file is selected from the Filename list, the settings portion of the screen will contain the
following data items:
Convert Colors To Gray - This item indicates whether the DXF image will be displayed using its original
colors or using a light gray color. To display in gray, click in the adjacent box until it is checked. To display
in color, click in the adjacent box until it is empty.
Layer List - Displays the name of the layers found in the selected DXF file. The Status item specifies
whether the layer will be displayed (status On) or not (status Off). The Layer Names item lists the layers
found in the DXF file, all layers will be listed regardless of their status in the original drawing file.
Line Weight - This item specifies the width of the lines used to display the DXF image. The Line Weight
is expressed in screen pixels. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Origin Shift - This item specifies the amount to shift the image origin expressed in Coordinate Units. The
X value specifies the amount to move the image in the east-west (horizontal) direction. The Y value specifies
the amount to move the image in the north-south (vertical) direction. Type the desired values in the edit
boxes.
Scale Factor (Drawing Unit To Coordinate Ratio) - This item specifies the scale factor for the DXF
image. The image coordinates are multiplied by the scale factor when the image is processed. The original
image data is not changed, the changes are only made to the displayed image. Type the desired value in the
edit box.
219
Data Items - SHP File...
When a Shape (SHP) style file is selected from the Filename list, the settings portion of the screen will
contain the following data items:
Convert Colors To Gray - This item indicates whether the DXF image will be displayed using its original
colors or using a light gray color. To display in gray, click in the adjacent box until it is checked. To display
in color, click in the adjacent box until it is empty.
Line Weight - This item specifies the width of the lines used to display the image. The Line Weight is
expressed in screen pixels. Type the desired value in the edit box, or select a value from the list.
Line Style - This item specifies the style used to display the lines in the image. Select the desired value from
the list.
Origin Shift - This item specifies the amount to shift the image origin expressed in Coordinate Units. The
X value specifies the amount to move the image in the east-west (horizontal) direction. The Y value specifies
the amount to move the image in the north-south (vertical) direction. Type the desired values in the edit
boxes.
Point Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the symbols used to display the image. The size is
expressed in coordinate units. Type the desired value in the edit box, or select a value from the list.
Point Symbol Style - This item specifies the style used to display the symbols in the image. Select the
desired value from the list.
Scale Factor (Drawing Unit To Coordinate Ratio) - This item specifies the scale factor for the image. The
image coordinates are multiplied by the scale factor when the image is processed. The original image data
is not changed, the changes are only made to the displayed image. Type the desired value in the edit box.
220
Command Buttons...
Apply - Select this command button to close the data screen and apply any changes to the display.
Attach BMP - Select this command button to attach a bitmap (BMP) file to the model. When selected, the
File Selection dialog box will appear, select the desired file name and select the Continue command button
to attach the file.
Attach DXF - Select this command button to attach a Drawing Interchange File (DXF) to the model. When
selected, the File Selection dialog box will appear, select the desired file name and select the Continue
command button to attach the file.
Attach SHP - Select this command button to attach a Shape File (SHP) to the model. When selected, the File
Selection dialog box will appear, select the desired file name and select the Continue command button to
attach the file.
Calculate Scale Factor - Select this command button

to open the Scale Factor calculation screen. Enter the
appropriate values, select the Apply command button to
apply the factor to the Background Image Specification.
Or, select the Close command button to exit without
applying the calculated value.
Remove - Select this command button to remove the currently highlighted background file from the model.
Save Settings For Selected File - Select this command button to save changes to the currently highlighted
background file. Changes to a background file’s settings are not saved unless this command button is
selected.
Turn All Layers On/Off - Select this command button to turn all of the layers on or off for the selected DXF
file. Once all of the layers are turned on or off, the settings for individual layers can be set as desired.
221
Usage Notes...
! A bitmap (BMP) style image can be used as a background in the Graphical Data Interface (GDI). The
image file must adhere to Windows standard bitmap (BMP) file specifications. A bitmap file can contain a
scanned image, or the raster output of a graphic application which supports the Bitmap format.
! A Drawing Interchange File (DXF) style image can be used as a background in the Graphical Data
Interface (GDI). The image file must adhere to standard Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) file
specifications. The file can contain the output of a CAD, or vector based drawing application that supports
the DXF format.
! A Shape file style image can be used as a background in the Graphical Data Interface (GDI). The image
file must adhere to standard Shape file specifications. A shape file can contain output from a GIS , or other
application that supports the Shape file format. Shape files contain only one graphic type per file. For
example a Shape file can contain only point type features, or only line type features.
! A file of another format can potentially be used as a background image by first converting the file to the
a format supported by GASWorkS.
! Multiple files of varying type may be a attached to a model.
! The bitmap Scale Factor (Coordinate To Pixel Ratio) establishes the "scale" for bitmap style images.
Bitmap images contain raster style images. Raster images are made up of small "dots" called pixels. The scale
tells the GDI how many coordinates are represented by one pixel in the file. For example, the number of feet
per pixel. To determine this value, divide the original drawing or map scale by the image resolution in dots
per inch (dots per centimeter). For example, the Coordinate To Pixel Ratio for a 1 inch equal 2000 feet map
scanned at 400 dots per inch would be, 2000 ÷ 400 = 5 feet/pixel. The scale factor can be automatically
calculated by selecting the Calculate Scale Factor command button.
! Before attaching a BMP file, ensure that the GDI Coordinate Units are set to match the Coordinate To
Pixel Ratio. For example, if the Coordinate To Pixel Ratio is calculated as feet per pixel, the coordinate units
should be set to feet, or the Coordinate To Pixel Ratio should be recalculated to accommodate the current
coordinate units.
! Before attaching a DXF file, ensure that the GDI Coordinate Units are set to match the coordinate values
found in the DXF file, or use an appropriate Scale Factor to accommodate the current coordinate units. If
more than one DXF file is attached, the coordinate values for all of the files must be expressed in the same
units.
! For Shape files the line wight and style only apply to files containing line type features - the point size and
style only apply to files containing point type features.
222
Bitmap Scale Factor...

When the Calculate Scale Factor command button on the Background Image Settings screen is selected, the
Bitmap Scale Factor calculation screen will be displayed. The features associated with the screen are as
follows:
Data Items...
Dimensional Units - These items specify the dimensional units for the Resolution and Scale values. Select
the desired value from the list.
Image Resolution - This item specifies the resolution of the image contained in the file. Generally the
resolution is expressed in the number of dots (pixels) per inch. To set a value, type the desired value in the
edit box. Ensure that the value is expressed in terms of the specified dimensional units.
Image Scale - This item specifies the scale of the image. To set a value, type the desired value in the edit
box. Ensure that the value is expressed in terms of the specified dimensional units.
Scale Factor - This item displays the calculated scale factor, based on the input resolution and scale values.
The item is automatically set and cannot be directly changed by the User.
Command Buttons...
Apply - Select this command button to close the data screen and apply the calculated scale factor to the
Background Image Specification screen.
Close - Select this command button to close the data screen without applying the calculated scale factor.
223
Usage Notes...
! The bitmap Scale Factor (Coordinate To Pixel Ratio) establishes the "scale" for bitmap style images.
Bitmap images contain raster style images. Raster images are made up of small "dots" called pixels. The scale
tells the GDI how many coordinate units are represented by one pixel in the file - the width of the pixel in
coordinate units. For example, the number of feet per pixel. To determine this value, divide the original
drawing or map scale by the image resolution in dots per inch (dots per centimeter). For example, the
Coordinate To Pixel Ratio for a 1 inch equal 2000 feet map scanned at 400 dots per inch would be, 2000 ÷
400 = 5 feet/pixel.
224
Color Legend...
When a data item is color coded using the Color By Range routine. A legend of the colors and associated
ranges can be displayed using the Color Legend. The features associated with the screen are described as
follows:
Data Items...
Color Ranges - These items represent the value ranges associated with each display color. These values are
automatically assigned and cannot be changed by the User.
Usage Notes...
! The location of the color legend may be adjusted by dragging and dropping the legend at the desired
location.
! The size of the color legend may be adjusted by dragging the edges or corners.
! The legend can be converted to User Text so that it can be plotted using the “Add Legend Text” GDI
command.
225
Customer Data Screen...

If customer features are included in the model, the data associated with the features is accessed through the
Customer Data screen. The features associated with the data screen are described as follows:
Data Items - Model Data Tab...
Customer Link ID Number - This item specifies an identification number used to link to an external
database. When a “linked” database is attached, the number is automatically assigned. When any other type
of external database is attached, the number is assigned by the User. The number should generally represents
a value that is unique in the database. When no external database is attached, the number can be used to
maintain any User desired alpha-numeric value. The value can be a combination of up to twenty alpha
numeric characters.
ID Number - This item refers to the customer’s unique internal (to GASWorkS) identification number. This
value is automatically assigned and cannot be revised by the User.
226
Load Application - These options specify how to apply the customer’s load. “From” - indicates that the
entire load will be applied to the external load value of the assigned pipe’s From Node. “To” - indicates that
the entire load will be applied to the external load value of the assigned pipe’s To Node. “Both” - indicates
that one-half of the load will be applied to the external load value of the assigned the pipe’s From and To
Node. “Diversified” - indicates that the load will be applied to the pipe’s “downstream” node according to
the associated IGE standard. Click in the button adjacent to the desired option.
When the Diversified option is selected, the heating style type is enabled. Select an appropriate method from
the list.
Load Units - This item specifies the dimensional units for the customer’s load. Select the desired value from
the list.
Per Unit Load - This item specifies the load for each customer “unit”. If no database is attached, the item
may be manually input by the User. Otherwise, the item will be automatically assigned. To manually enter
a load value, type the desired value in the edit box. If the load is manually entered, ensure that the value is
consistent with the selected load units. Enter the value as negative (-) to indicate a demand (flow leaving the
system).
Record Number - This item refers to the position of the record in the data file of the selected customer
feature. This value is automatically assigned and cannot be revised by the User.
Supplied By Branch From Customer ID - If the selected customer is a “branch” customer, this item
displays the ID Number of the trunk customer to which the branch is attached. This value is automatically
assigned and cannot be revised by the User.
Supplies Branch Customer ID - If the selected customer is a “trunk” customer, this item displays the ID
Number of the branch customer assigned to it. This value is automatically assigned and cannot be revised
by the User.
Supply Pipe (Main)Link ID - This item displays the Link ID number of the pipe (main) that supplies the
customer - the pipe that the customer is assigned to. The customer’s load will be assigned to the external load
of the pipe’s From and To Node as specified by the Load Application setting. This value cannot be changed
by the User. If the assigned pipe does not have an assigned “Link ID” value, the record number of the
assigned pipe will be displayed.
Unit Count - This item specifies the total number of units (customers) that the selected individual customer
represents. The value must be in the range of 1 to 32,000. Type the desired value in the edit box.
227
Data Items - Graphic Data Tab...
The Graphic Data contains settings used to control the display of the customer in the GDI work area.
Display Text Values - If this item is selected (checked), the selected data items for the customer will be
displayed. To select this option, click in the adjacent box until a check mark (U) appears. To unselect this
option, click in the adjacent box until the box is empty.
Symbol Color - This item specifies the color used to display the symbol at the customer’s location. To set
a color, select the Selected Color item from the list, then click in the color display box, or select the Select
Symbol Color command button.
Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the symbol used to display the customer’s location. To set an
individual size, type it in the edit box. Or to use the default size, select the Use Default Size option. The size
can be entered either as an absolute value expressed in terms of the current coordinate units, or as a relative
value expressed as percentage of the diagonal distance across the screen.
Symbol Style - This item specifies the style of the symbol used to display the customer’s location. To set
an individual style, select it from the list. Or to use the default style, select the Default item from the list.
X Coordinate - This item specifies the customer’s horizontal location (east-west coordinate). To enter a
value, type it in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current coordinate units.
228
Y Coordinate - This item specifies the customer’s vertical location (north-south coordinate). To enter a
value, type it in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current coordinate units.
Data Items - Attribute Data Tab...
Link To Attribute File - If an external database is attached, this item specifies whether the customer feature
should be linked to the external database. If selected, the customer will be linked by matching the Link ID
value. Select this option by placing a check mark (U) in the adjacent box.
Pipe Facility Type - This item displays the assigned Facility Type of the pipe (main) that the customer is
attached to. The customer inherits the same Facility Type as the assigned pipe (main). This value is
automatically assigned and cannot be revised by the User.
Attribute File Data... - If a linked or external database is attached, these items will display the values
contained in the “linked” database record. If a linked database is attached, the values can be changed by the
User. If the attached database is of another type, the values are view-only and cannot be changed. To edit a
value, click in the cell containing the value to be changed - click another cell or press the ENTER (5) key
to save the change.
229
Command Buttons...
Close & Solve - Select this command button to close the data screen, save any changes, and execute the
solution routine.
Print - Select this command button to print the data associated with the current customer.
Select Symbol Color - Select this command button to set the customer display color. The Color Selection
dialog box will appear. Select the desired color, then select the OK command button to set the color and
return to the data screen.
Usage Notes...
! If an external database is attached, the Link ID is used to make a match between the selected data feature
and the corresponding record in the database. The first record in the database, with a matching Link ID value,
is displayed in the Attribute Data list.
! See the “Working With External Databases” topic for more information on using an external database.
! The Customer Data Screen can be accessed through the various command methods, or by placing the
mouse pointer near the desired customer and pressing the left mouse button while holding down the CTRL
key.
! The “total load” value associated with the customer, is computed by multiplying the Unit Count by the Per
Unit Load value.
230
Graphic Line Data Screen...

If User Graphics are present, the graphic line data can be accessed through the Graphic Line Data screen.
The features associated with the data screen are as follows:
Data Items...
Facility Type - This item specifies the facility type to associate with the selected feature. To set a type, select
a value from the list.
Length - This item displays the length of the line in length units. This value is automatically assigned and
cannot be revised by the User.
Line Color - This item specifies the color used to display the line. To set a color, click in the color display
box, or select the Set Line Color command button.
Line Style - This item specifies the style of the line used to display the graphic line. To set a style, select it
from the list.
231
Line Width - This item specifies the width of the line used to display the graphic line. To set a width, type
it in the edit box. The value must be greater than 0. The value is expressed in terms of screen pixels.
Pattern Spacing - This item specifies the spacing of the symbols in certain non-continuous line styles. To
set a value, type it in the edit box. The value must be greater than 0 and is expressed in coordinate units.
X Coordinate - This item specifies the horizontal location (east-west coordinate) of the start of the line. To
enter a value, type it in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current coordinate units.
X2 Coordinate - This item specifies the horizontal location (east-west coordinate) of the end of the line. To
Y Coordinate - This item specifies the vertical location (north-south coordinate) of the start of the line. To
Y2 Coordinate - This item specifies the vertical location (north-south coordinate) of the end of the line. To
Command Buttons...
Select Line Color - Select this command button to set the display color. The Color Selection dialog box will
appear. Select the desired color, then select the OK command button to set the color and return to the data
screen.
Usage Notes...
232
Graphic Settings...
The GDI control variables may be set using the Graphic Settings data screen. The features associated with
Data Items - Options...
An item is selected when a check mark (U) appears next to the associated item. Select the option by clicking
in the adjacent box until it is checked. To unselect the option, click in the adjacent box until it is empty.
Automatic Repaint - Selecting this item will cause the display to be automatically repainted after various
commands are executed (including the Solve command).
233
Automatic Zoom On Find - Selecting this item will cause the display to automatically zoom and pan so that
the selected feature’s location is centered in the display, when using one of the “Find” commands.
Display Flow Once Per Polyline Pipe - Selecting this item will cause the flow arrow symbol to be displayed
only once per polyline type pipe. If the item is not selected, a symbol will be placed on each segment of the
polyline.
Display Running Length - Selecting this item will cause the graphic length of a pipe being added, to be
displayed as the vertices and To Node locations are being selected. The length will be displayed in the
coordinate panel to the right of the XY coordinate values.
Display Solid Pipe Symbols - Selecting this item will cause the piping symbols to be filled with the current
symbol color.
Display Vertex Symbols - Selecting this item will cause symbols to be placed at the location of vertices
along a polyline type pipe or service line.
Display XXXX Facility - Depending on the number of Facility Types associated with the model, a series
of items will be displayed, allowing certain Facilities Types to be displayed or not. If a Facility Type is
selected for display all features associated with that type will be displayed. If a Facility Type is not selected,
none of the features associated with that type will be displayed.
Ignore Pipes Outside The Display - When this item is selected, pipes where the From and To Node
locations are outside the display, are not displayed. Selecting this item can help prevent the display of stray
lines when zooming in. Selecting this item will also reduce the time required to repaint the image.
Query During New Feature Entry - Selecting this item will cause the appropriate data screen to be
displayed when a new feature is entered.
Suppress Flow Arrow Where Flow Is Less Than Convergence Tolerance - Selecting this item will cause
the display of flow arrows to be suppressed on pipes where the flow value is less than the convergence
tolerance.
Feature Highlight Color - Indicates the color to use to identify (highlight) selected features. To use the
default value select (check) the Use Default Color item. To set a color, uncheck the Use Default Color item,
then click in the color box. The Color Selection dialog box will appear. Select the desired color, then select
the OK command button to set the color and return to the data screen.
Data Items - Settings...
To change a setting value, click in the data cell adjacent to the item label. If the item is associated with an
item list, select a value from the list. If the item is not associated with a list, type a value, then press the
ENTER (5) key or select another cell to save the change.
234
Coordinate Units - This item specifies the dimensional unit to be used for the GDI coordinate values. Select
the desired unit from the list. The dimensional units for the pipe lengths and the coordinate units can be
different values. The length and coordinate values will be automatically converted as necessary to ensure
consistency .
Customer Symbol Size - This item specifies the default size of the symbol to be used to display the customer
features. The size can be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value relative to the
diagonal distance across the GDI work area, expressed as a percentage. Type the desired value in the edit
box.
Customer Symbol Style - This item specifies the default symbol to be used to display the customer features.
Select the desired symbol from the list.
Flow Arrow Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the symbol to be used to display the pipe flow
arrows. The size can be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value relative to the
box.
Flow Arrow Symbol Style - This item specifies the symbol to be used to display the pipe flow arrows.
Select the desired symbol from the list.
Node Snap Ratio - This item specifies the Node Snap Ratio. The value is expressed as a factor. The node
Snap Ratio is used to control the sensitivity of the Node Snap command. See the Usage Notes for a
description of this setting's use. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Node Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the default symbol to be used to display the node features.
The size can be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value relative to the diagonal
distance across the GDI work area, expressed as a percentage. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Node Symbol Style - This item specifies the default symbol to be used to display the node features. Select
the desired symbol from the list.
Pipe Line Style - This item specifies the default line style to be used to display the pipe segments. Select
the desired style from the list.
Pipe Line Width - This item specifies the default line width to be used to display the pipe segments. The
width value is expressed in screen pixels. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Pipe Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the symbol to be used to display the pipe symbols (for
non-pipe hydraulic types). The size can be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value
relative to the diagonal distance across the GDI work area, expressed as a percentage. Or, enter a zero (0)
to indicate that symbol size will be determined by the distance between the From and To Nodes. Type the
desired value in the edit box.
235
Refresh Increment - This item specifies how often the display should be updated when the image is being
repainted. The value is expressed as a percentage of the image contents. The smaller the value, the more often
the display will be updated. The larger the value the less often the display will be updated. If the value is set
at 100, the display will not be updated until the image is completely repainted. Type the desired value
between 1 and 100 in the edit box.
Scroll/Pan Change - Horizontal - This item specifies the amount to change the image when panning the
image horizontally (right or left) using the Scroll icon. The value is expressed as a percentage of the
horizontal image extent. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Scroll/ Pan Change - Vertical - This item specifies the amount to change the image when panning the image
vertically (up or down) using the Scroll icon. The value is expressed as a percentage of the vertical image
extent. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Supply Flag Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the flag symbol to be used to identify supply
nodes. The size can be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value relative to the
box.
User Graphic Symbol Size - This item specifies the default size of the User Graphic Symbols. The size can
be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value relative to the diagonal distance across
the GDI work area, expressed as a percentage. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Zoom Ratio - This item specifies the Zoom Ratio. The value is expressed as a factor. The Zoom Ratio is
used to control the sensitivity of the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands. See the Usage Notes for a
description of this setting's use. Type the desired value in the edit box.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the screen without saving any changes.
Close - Select this command button to close the screen, save any changes, and apply the new settings to the
current display.
Save As Default - Select this command button to the save the current settings as the default values to use
when creating a new model.
236
Usage Notes...
! The Node Snap Ratio is used to adjust the sensitivity of the Node Snap Command. The product of the
Node Snap Ratio and the Node Size is referred to as the snap tolerance. When adding a new pipe or
measuring a distance, if Node Snap is selected, the GDI will attempt to find an existing node within the snap
tolerance of a selected point. A warning will be displayed if a node is not found.
! The Zoom ratio is used to indicate the magnitude of change in image size which occurs when either the
Zoom In or Zoom Out commands are used. For example, if the Zoom Ratio is set at two, the Zoom In
command will increase the size of the image by two times. Conversely, at a Zoom Ratio of two, the Zoom
Out command will decrease the size of the image by two times.
237
Graphic Symbol Data Screen...

If User Graphics are present, the graphic symbol data can be accessed through the Graphic Symbol Data
screen. The features associated with the data screen are as follows:
Data Items...
Rotation - This item specifies the rotation of the symbol. The value is expressed in degrees clockwise from
12 o’clock (North). In terms of angle measurements North is at the top of the screen. To set a value, type it
in the edit box. Not all symbols can be rotated. For those symbols, the rotation value is ignored.
Symbol Color - This item specifies the color used to display the symbol. To set a color, click in the color
display box, or select the Set Symbol Color command button.
Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the symbol to be displayed at the specified location. The size
can be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value relative to the diagonal distance
across the GDI work area, expressed as a percentage. To set an individual size, type the desired value (greater
than 0) in the edit box. To use the default size, select (check) the adjacent check box.
238
Symbol Style - This item specifies the style of the symbol used to be displayed at the specified location. To
set a style, select it from the list.
X Coordinate - This item specifies the horizontal location (east-west coordinate) of the center of the symbol.
To enter a value, type it in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current coordinate units.
Y Coordinate - This item specifies the vertical location (north-south coordinate) of the center of the symbol.
To enter a value, type it in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current coordinate units.
Command Buttons...
Select Symbol Color - Select this command button to set the symbol display color. The Color Selection
dialog box will appear. Select the desired color, then select the OK command button to set the color and
return to the data screen.
Usage Notes...
239
Multiple Edit Specification...

In the GDI, multiple pipes, nodes, and customers can be edited using one of the “multiple” edit commands.
When one of these commands is used, the desired changes are assigned using the Multiple Edit
Specifications screen. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items...
Equal To - This item specifies the new value for the specified data item. Depending on the selected Set item,
the Equal To item may display an edit box, or a data list. Either select the desired item from the list, or type
the desired item in the edit box.
Set - This item specifies the specific data item to be changed. Select the desired item from the list.
Command Buttons...
Apply - Select this command button to make the specified change.
Close & Solve - Select this command button to close the screen, and execute the Solution routine.
Usage Notes...
! Several changes can be made to the selected features by changing the Set and Equal To assignment, and
repeatedly selecting the Apply command button.
! If a change is inadvertently made, and the Allow Undo preference has been selected, immediately select
the Undo icon to restore the original values.
240
! Features can be selected by individually clicking on each feature, by drawing a window around the desired
features, or a combination of both. To draw a selection window, hold down the SHIFT key, place the mouse
pointer at the desired location of the first corner, then click the left mouse button. Move the mouse to the
other corner, a dashed box will be displayed, hold down the SHIFT key and select the second corner location.
If a feature that is already selected, is selected again, it will be removed from the selection set. Click the right
mouse button when the selection is complete. When using the selection window to select pipe features, only
pipes where both the From and To node fall within the selection window, will be included.
! In addition to being able to change or set specific values, several commands may also be executed from
the Multiple Edit Specification. The commands start with the “Cmd” prefix. The available commands are
listed in the following table.
Command Description
Customer Features
Delete Selected Executing this command will cause the selected customers to be deleted.
Customers Erroneously deleted customers can be restored using the Oops Customer
command.
Extract Selected Executing this command will cause the selected customers to be copied to a
Customers another model. The User will be prompted for various processing options
during execution of the command.
Move Customer Executing this command will cause the selected customers to be moved to a
Locations new location. The customers will be moved by a User specified displacement.
The relative configuration of the selected customers will not be changed.
Reassign Supply Main Executing this command will cause the selected customers to be reassigned to
a new pipe/main.
Remove Service Lines Executing this command will cause the selected customers to be unattached
(Unassign Customers) from their current supply main(s), and their service lines to be eliminated. The
selected customers will be “unassigned” after completion of the command.
Stack Customers Executing this command will cause the selected customers to be “stacked”
directly upon each other at a specified location.
Summarize Selected Executing this command will cause a summary of various data values to be
Customers created for the selected customers.
241
Command Description
Node Features
Clear Intersection Flag Selecting this command will cause any displayed intersection flags to be
removed.
Summarize Selected Selecting this command will cause a summary of various data values to be
Nodes created for the selected nodes.
Pipe Features
Delete Selected Pipes Selecting this command will cause the selected pipes to be deleted.
Erroneously deleted pipes can be restored using the Oops Pipe command.
Extract Selected Pipes Executing this command will cause the selected pipes to be copied to a another
model. The User will be prompted for various processing options during
execution of the command.
Summarize Selected Selecting this command will cause a summary of various data values to be
Pipes created for the selected pipes.
242
Node Data Screen...

In the GDI, the node data is accessed using the Node Data screen. The screen appears when the Edit Node
Data command is selected, or may appear when a new node feature is added using one of the construction
or edit commands. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items - Hydraulic Tab...
Adjust Base Load By Design Factor - When this item is selected (checked), the node’s base load value will
be multiplied by the Design Factor during the solution process. The original data value is not changed by this
setting, the load value is only modified during the solution calculation.
Adjust External Load By Design Factor - When this item is selected (checked), the node’s external load
value will be multiplied by the Design Factor during the solution process. The original data value is not
changed by this setting, the load value is only modified during the solution calculation.
Base Load - This item specifies the node's base load. If the value is known, type it in the data field - ensure
that the value is consistent with the displayed load units. If the value is unknown, select the check box
adjacent to the load units field. Initially the field is populated with the default load value. If the model has
been recently solved and the load is unknown, the item will contain the calculated load value for the node.
See the Usage Notes for additional information on the base and external load values.
243
Base Load Status - This item specifies whether the base load value is consider On or Off during the solution
process. If the status is set to “Off” the value is assumed to be zero (0) during the solution calculation. The
original data value is not changed by this setting.
Dimensional Units - These items are used to display and set the value of the various dimensional units. To
activate a list, click the arrow symbol adjacent to the box. A list of available unit names will appear. Make
a selection by clicking on the desired name.
Elevation - This item specifies the node's height above sea level. Type the appropriate value in the data field.
The value must be consistent with the displayed elevation units. Initially, the field is populated with the
default elevation value.
External Load Status - This item specifies whether the external load value is consider On or Off during the
solution process. If the status is set to “Off” the value is assumed to be zero (0) during the solution
calculation. The original data value is not changed by this setting.
Node Name - This item specifies a unique name or number for the selected node. The name may contain up
to forty alphanumeric characters. The name is automatically assigned when a new node is added, however
the User can change the name to any desired value. The name must be unique to the model. To change the
name, type the new value in the edit box. A warning will appear if the name already exists.
Pressure - This item specifies the node's pressure. If the value is known, type it in the data field - ensure that
the value is consistent with the displayed pressure units. If the value is unknown, select the check box
adjacent to the pressure units field. Initially, the field is populated with the default pressure value. If the
model has been recently solved and the pressure is unknown, the item will contain the calculated pressure
value for the node.
Record Number - This item refers to the position of the current node record in the node data file. This value
is automatically assigned and cannot be revised by the User.
Temperature - This item specifies the average flowing temperature of the gas at the node's location. If the
value is known, type it in the data field - ensure that the value is consistent with the displayed temperature
units. If the value is unknown, select the check box adjacent to the temperature units label. Initially, the field
is populated with the default temperature value. If the model has been recently solved and the temperature
is unknown and the Calculate Temperature option was selected, the item will contain the calculated
temperature value for the node.
244
Data Items - Gas Properties Tab...
Allow Calculation of Gas Properties - This item specifies whether the gas properties for this node are
calculated during the solution process. To indicate that the values are known, click in the adjacent box until
a check mark (U) appears. To indicate that the values are unknown, click in the adjacent box until the box
is empty. Appropriate gas property values must always be entered. Gas properties are only calculated if the
gas property values are allowed to be calculated, and the Calculate Gas Properties option is set during the
solution. If the Calculate Gas Properties option is not chosen during the solution, the entered values will be
used.
Heating Value - This item specifies the heating value of the gas as measured (calculated) at the node. Type
the desired value in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the displayed dimensional unit.
Specific Gravity - This item specifies the specific gravity value of the gas as measured (calculated) at the
node. Enter the appropriate value by typing it in the data field. As used by GASWorkS, the specific gravity
represents the weight or density of the gas compared to dry air.
Specific Heat - This item specifies the specific heat ratio of the gas as measured (calculated) at the node.
Enter the appropriate value by typing it in the data field. As used by GASWorkS, the specific heat ratio
represents the constant pressure specific heat divided by the constant volume specific heat of the gas mixture.
245
Viscosity - This item specifies the dynamic viscosity of the gas as measured (calculated) at the node. Type
the desired value in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the displayed dimensional unit.
Data Items - Graphic Tab...
Display Text Values - If this item is selected (checked), the selected data items for the node will be
Symbol Color - This item specifies the color used to display the node symbol. To set a color, select the
Selected Color item from the list, then click in the color display box, or select the Select Symbol Color
command button.
Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of the symbol used to display the node’s location. The size can
be expressed as an absolute value in coordinate units, or as a value relative to the diagonal distance across
the GDI work area, expressed as a percentage. To set an individual size, type the desired value (greater than
0) in the edit box. To use the default size, select (check) the adjacent check box.
Symbol Style - This item specifies the style of the symbol used to display the node’s location. To set an
individual style, select it from the list. Or to use the default style, select the Default item from the list.
246
X Coordinate - This item specifies the node’s horizontal location (east-west coordinate). To enter a value,
type it in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current coordinate units.
Y Coordinate - This item specifies the node’s vertical location (north-south coordinate). To enter a value,
type it in the edit box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current coordinate units.
Data Items - Calculated Tab...
This section of the screen displays various calculated values associated with the node. The calculated values
cannot be directly altered by the User. If the model data has been changed since the most recent solution,
some of the calculated data values may not be displayed. The values which may appear in this section are
described in the following table:
247
Item Description
Atmospheric Pressure This value represents the calculated atmospheric pressure value based on the
node's elevation. The units for this item are set the same as the Base Pressure
dimensional units.
Base Load If the load value was known, this value represents the base load times the
design factor (if the Adjust Base Load By Design Factor option is selected). If
the load value is unknown, this value represents the value calculated by the
solution process.
External Load This value represents the external load times the design factor (if the Adjust
External Load By Design Factor option is selected).
Pressure This value represents the calculated (or entered) pressure value.
Record Number This value represents the position of the current node record in the node data
file.
Total Energy Load This value represents the total (volumetric) load value times the heating value.
Total Load This value represents the total of the (adjusted) base and external load values.
Command Buttons...
solution routine.
Calculate Property Values - Select this command button to open the Gas Properties calculation screen.
Make any desired changes, calculate the new values, then select the Apply command button on the
calculation screen to return to the data screen. The new values will be entered into the appropriate data fields
on the data screen.
Print - Select this command button to print the data associated with the current node.
Select Symbol Color - Select this command button to set the node display color. The Color Selection dialog
box will appear. Select the desired color, then select the OK command button to set the color and return to
the data screen.
248
Usage Notes...
! The load for a node is comprised of two separate values, the base load and the external load. The base load
represents a load value that can be directly input by the User, or calculated during the solution process. The
external load represents the load associated with the customers attached to the pipe associated with the node.
The external load cannot be directly changed by the User.
The external load item is so named, because the value is often derived by means of data extracted from an
external database.
! The Node Data Screen can be accessed through the various command methods, or by placing the mouse
pointer near the desired customer and pressing the left mouse button while holding down the SHIFT key.
249
Pipe Data Screen...

In the GDI, the pipe data is accessed using the Pipe Data screen. The screen appears when the Edit Pipe
command is selected, or the screen may appear when a new pipe is created using one of the construction or
edit commands. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items - Hydraulic Tab...
The contents of the Hydraulic tab varies depending on the selected Element Type. The various content items
are described as follows:
Allow Size Calculation - This item indicates whether the pipe size can be calculated during the solution
process, when the Calculate Pipe Sizes solution option is selected. This item is only displayed for pipe type
elements.
Coefficient - This item specifies the equation coefficient for a well type element when the well’s size/type
value is set to “Unique”. Type the appropriate value in the data field. The value is dimensionless. This item
is only displayed for well type elements.
250
Control Style - This item specifies whether the set pressure for a compressor is to be applied to the
downstream (discharge) node, or the upstream (suction) node. This item is only displayed for compressor
type elements.
Dimensional Units - These items are used to display and set the value of the various dimensional units. To
activate a list, click the arrow symbol adjacent to the box. A list of available unit names will appear. Make
a selection by clicking on the desired value.
Drop Units - This item specifies the pressure drop unit to be used for the segment. Select the desired value
from the list.
Efficiency - This item specifies the efficiency value for compressor, fitting, and pipe type elements. Type
the desired value in the edit box. The value must be consistent with the displayed efficiency units. Initially,
the efficiency is set to the default Efficiency value. For compressor type elements, this item refers to the
mechanical efficiency of the compressor.
Element Type - This item specifies the Hydraulic element type for the segment. Select the desired type from
the list. The content of the Data and Calculated Values section of the screen will vary depending on the
selected value. This value is initially set to a Pipe type element.
Equation - This item specifies the flow equation to be used with fitting and pipe type elements. Select an
appropriate equation from the list.
Exponent - This item specifies the equation exponent for a well type element, when the well’s size/type
value is set to “Unique”. Type the appropriate value in the data field. The value is dimensionless. This item
is only displayed for well type elements.
Flow Units - This item specifies the flow unit to be used for the segment. Select the desired value from the
list.
Length - This item specifies the Hydraulic length of pipe type elements. Type the desired value in the data
field - ensure that the value is consistent with the displayed length units. Initially, the length is set to the
pipe's "graphic" length.
Number - This item specifies the number of wells grouped together for a well type element. Type the desired
value in the data field. This item is only displayed for well type elements.
Percent Open - This item specifies the opening position for a valve type element. Type the appropriate value
in the data field. The value is expressed as a percentage, with zero (0) being completely closed and one
hundred (100) being completely open. This item is only displayed for valve type elements.
Set Pressure - This item specifies the set pressure value for compressor and regulator type elements. Type
the desired value in the data field - ensure that the value is consistent with the selected pressure units. This
item is only displayed for regulator and compressor type elements.
251
Size/Type - This item specifies the size and type for the segment. The meaning of this item varies depending
on the selected element type. The various meanings are listed below:
Element Type Size/Type Meaning

Compressor The value represents the size/type code for the compressor. The desired size/type code
may be selected from the list. The content of the list represents the size/type codes found
in the currently selected Compressor Properties table.
Fitting The value represents the size/type code for the fitting. The desired size/type code may
be selected from the list. The content of the list represents the size/type codes found in
the currently select Fitting Properties table.
Pipe The value represents the size/type code, or the inside diameter value for the pipe. The
desired size/type code may be selected from the list, or the inside diameter value may
be manually entered by typing the value in the edit field. The content of the list
represents the size/type codes found in the currently selected Pipe Properties table.
Regulator The value represents the size/type code for the regulator. The desired size/type code may
be selected from the list. The content of the list represents the size/type codes found in
the currently selected Regulator Properties table.
Valve The value represents the size/type code for the valve. The desired size/type code may be
selected from the list. The content of the list represents the size/type codes found in the
currently assigned Valve Properties table.
Well The value represents the size/type code for the well. The desired size/type code may be
selected from the list. The content of the list represents the size/type codes found in the
currently assigned Well Properties table. If the “Unique” value is selected, the required
well parameters may be manually entered in the appropriate data fields.
Initially, this item is set to the default Size/Type value.
Status - This item specifies whether the segment is turned on or off. Select the status by clicking the button
adjacent to the desired option.
252
Data Items - Fitting Tab...
Available Fittings - This item lists the fittings available for attachment to the segment. The content of the
list represents the size/type codes found in the currently select Fitting Properties table. When a value is
selected, it is added to the Attached Fittings list.
Attached Fittings - This item lists the fittings that are currently attached to the segment. Double click on
an item to remove it from the list.
Total Equivalent Length - This item displays the summation of the equivalent length values (in terms of
the current inside diameter value) for the items listed in the Attached Fittings list. The value cannot be
directly changed by the User.
253
Data Items - Graphics Tab...
Display Text Values - If this item is selected (checked), the selected data items for the pipe will be
Line Style - This item specifies the style of the line used to represent the segment. To set an individual style,
select it from the list. Or to use the default style, select the Default item from the list.
Line Width - This item specifies the width of the line used to represent the segment. To set an individual
width select a value from the list. Or to use the default style, select the Default item from the list. The size
is expressed in screen pixels.
Line Color -This item specifies the color used to draw the line representing the segment. To set an individual
color select the Selected Color item from the list, then select the Select Line Color command button, make
a selection, then select the OK command button to save the selection.
254
Data Items - Attribute Tab...
The values contained in the attribute data list varies depending on the Hydraulic element type, and on
whether an attribute file is attached. The various contents of the list are as follows:
Customer Count - This item specifies the number of customers attached to the segment. This item is
automatically calculated, however the calculated value may be overridden by the User. To enter a new value
click in the data cell adjacent to the label, respond appropriately to the prompt, type the new number, then
press the ENTER (5) key to save the change.
Note: Changing this item can corrupt the automatic external load accounting. Particular care should be taken
when changing this value.
Facility Type - This item specifies the facility to be associated with the pipe segment. To set a value click
in the data cell adjacent to the label, select the desired value from the list.
255
Link ID Number - This item specifies an identification number used to link to an external database. When
a “linked” database is attached, the number is automatically assigned. When any other type of external
database is attached, the number is assigned by the User, and generally represents a value that is unique in
the database. When no external database is attached, the number can be used to maintain any User desired
alpha-numeric value. The value can be a combination of up to twenty alpha numeric characters.
Attribute File Data... - If a linked or external database is attached, these items will display the values
contained in the “linked” database record. If a linked database is attached, the values can be changed by the
User. If the attached database is of another type, the values are view-only and cannot be changed. To edit a
value, click in the cell containing the value to be changed - click another cell or press the ENTER (5) key
to save the change.
Data Items - Calculated Tab...
This section of the screen displays various calculated values associated with the pipe segment. The calculated
values cannot be directly altered by the User. If the model has been changed since the last solution, some
items may not be displayed. The values which may appear in this section are described in the following table:
256
Item Description
General Items
From Node This item represents the name of the segment's From Node.
Internal ID Number This item represents the segment's unique identification number. This value is
set automatically.
Record Number This item represents the position of the current pipe record in the pipe data file.
Hydraulic Data
Average This item represents the calculated compressibility factor for the segment. The
Compressibility Factor value is based on the average pressure and temperature values.
Average Pressure This item represents the average pressure along the segment.
Average Temperature This item represents the average temperature along the segment.
Drop Per XXX This item represents the unit pressure drop along the pipe segment. This value
is calculated by dividing the overall pressure drop by the segment’s length then
multiplying the result by the specified Pressure Drop Per Length value. The
pressure drop per length value can be set by selecting the Report Options item
from the Report menu list.
Flow Rate This item represents the calculated flow rate for the segment. If this value is
positive, it indicates that the flow direction is from the From Node to the To
Node. If the value is negative, it indicates that the flow direction is from the To
Node to the From Node.
From Pressure This item represents the calculated or entered pressure value for the segment’s
From Node.
Pressure Drop This item represents the linear pressure drop for the segment - the From
Pressure minus the To Pressure. Note that when elevation differences are
present along the pipe segment, it is possible for the downstream pressure to
be larger than the upstream pressure. If this value is positive, it indicates that
the From Node pressure is larger than the To Node pressure. If the value is
negative, it indicates that the To Node pressure is greater than the From Node
pressure.
To Pressure This item represents the calculated or entered pressure value for the segments's
To Node.
257
Item Description
Values For Compressor Type Elements
Compression Ratio This item represents the calculated compression ratio for the compressor. The
value is calculated using the calculated inlet and outlet pressures for the
compressor.
Estimated Fuel Usage This item represents the estimated fuel used of the compressor. The value is
calculated using the Fuel Usage Rate and the Estimated Power. This item is not
displayed if the fuel usage rate is zero in the Compressor Properties table for
the assigned Size/Type code.
Estimated Power This item represents the estimated power requirements of the compressor. The
value is calculated using the inlet and outlet pressures, the flow rate, the
specified efficiency, and the power equation associated with the compressor.
Estimated Outlet T This item represents the estimated temperature of the gas leaving the
compressor. The value is calculated using the compression ratio for the
compressor, and the specific heat ratio of the upstream node.
Flow Mode This item indicates whether the compressor is “operating” in compression
mode or free flowing. If the inlet pressure to the compressor is greater than the
set pressure, the solution will automatically place the compressor in free flow.
Fuel Usage Rate This item represents the fuel usage rate extracted from the Compressor
Properties table for the assigned compressor Size/Type code.
Inlet Temperature This item represents the temperature of the gas entering the compressor.
Rated Power This item represents the rated power extracted from the Compressor Properties
table for the assigned compressor Size/Type code.
Values For Fitting Type Elements
Equivalent Diameter This item represents the equivalent diameter value for the fitting. The value is
extracted from the Fitting Properties table for the assigned Size/Type code.
Equivalent Length This item represents the equivalent length value for the fitting. The value is
extracted from the Fitting Properties table for the assigned Size/Type code.
Values For Pipe Type Elements

Estimated Cost This item represents the estimated cost for the segment. The cost is calculated
by multiplying the segment’s length by the "cost per length" value found in the
Pipe Properties table. This item is not displayed if the cost per length value is
zero (0) in the table, or if the Size/Type code is not found in the table.
258
Item Description
Graphic Vertex Count This items represents the number of vertices associated with a polyline type
pipe segment.
Hoop Stress This item represents the calculated hoop stress value for the segment. The
value is based on the larger of the From or To Pressures, and the outside
diameter and wall thickness values found in the Pipe Properties table. This
item is not displayed if the Size/Type code is not found in the table.
Inside Diameter This item represents the pipe's inside diameter value. If the Size/Type value
represents a code, this value represents the Inside Diameter value extracted
from the appropriate Pipe Properties table. Otherwise this item represents the
interpreted numeric value of the Size/Type alphanumeric value.
Line Volume This item represents the volume of gas contained in the pipe segment. The
value is calculated using the average pressure value, and the inside diameter
and length of the pipe segment.
Percent SMYS This item represents the ratio of the hoop stress value to the Specified
Minimum Yield Strength (SMYS) value. The value is based on the SMYS
value found in the Pipe Properties table. This item is not displayed if the
SMYS value is zero in the table for the assigned Size/Type code, or if the
Size/Type code is not found in the table.
Roughness This item represents the inside pipe wall roughness for the pipe segment. The
value is extracted from the Pipe Properties table for the assigned Size/Type
code.
Velocity This item represents the maximum velocity of the gas flow in the pipe segment.
The value is calculated using the lower of the segment’s end pressures, the
volumetric flow rate, and the inside diameter value for the segment.
Total Efficiency This item represents the efficiency value used in the solution calculation. See
the Usage Notes for information on how the total efficiency is calculated.
Values For Regulator Type Elements

Coefficient Ratio This item represents the ratio of the estimated valve coefficient to the rated
valve coefficient. Generally, the ratio should be between .2 and .8 for proper
sizing. A value less than .2 indicates that the regulator may be oversized. A
value greater than .8 indicates that the regulator may be undersized.
Estimated Coefficient This item represents the estimated valve coefficient for the regulator. The
value is calculated based on the flow rate, pressure differential, and various
values found in the Regulator Properties table for the assigned Size/Type code.
259
Item Description
Estimated Outlet T This value represents the estimated temperature of the gas leaving the
regulator. The value is calculated using the pressure drop across the regulator.
Flow Mode This value indicates whether the regulator is “operating” in control or an upset
mode. During the solution process, the operating mode of the regulator can be
automatically changed depending on the inlet and outlet pressure values.
Inlet Temperature This value represents the temperature of the gas entering the regulator.
Min Differential This item represents the minimum required differential pressure value
extracted from the Regulator Properties table for the assigned Size/Type code.
Rated Coefficient This item represents the rated valve coefficient value extracted from the
Regulator Look-Up table for the assigned size and type.
Set Pressure This item represents the set pressure for the regulator.
Command Buttons...
Clear Attached Fittings List - Select this command button to delete all items in the Attached Fittings list.
solution routine.
Print - Select this command button to print the model data associated with the current pipe.
Recalculate Length - Select this command button to force the Total Equivalent Length value to be
recalculated.
Select Line Color - Select this command button to set the pipe display color. The Color Selection dialog box
will appear. Select the desired color, then select the OK command button to set the color and return to the
data screen.
View From Node Data - Select this command button to display the Node Data screen for the From Node
associated with the pipe segment. When the Node Data screen is closed, control will be returned to the Pipe
Data screen.
260
View To Node Data - Select this command button to display the Node Data screen for the To Node
associated with the pipe segment. When the Node Data screen is closed, control will be returned to the Pipe
Data screen.
Usage Notes...
! For pipe type elements the Size/Type data item can represent one of two values. It can represent a value
that matches a Size/Type code found in the Pipe Properties table. Or it can represent the actual inside
diameter value of the pipe. If the value represents a matching code, the inside diameter value is extracted
from the Pipe Properties table when it is needed. If the value does not represent a matching value, it is
converted to a numeric value when the inside diameter is required.
! During the solution calculation a “total” efficiency is computed for pipe type elements, and used in the
hydraulic calculation. The total efficiency value is computed as the product of the efficiency assigned
directly to the pipe segment, and the efficiency value found in the Pipe Properties table for the matching
Size/Type code. If no matching record is found in the Pipe Properties table, only the assigned value is used.
! Fittings may be attached to a pipe type element. The total equivalent length of the attached fittings is added
to the hydraulic length of the segment during the solution calculations. The equivalent length value is based
on the inside diameter and equation values. In most cases, attachment of fittings has negligible affect on the
hydraulic calculation results, however in cases where many fittings are encountered in a short distance (like
meter sets, regulator sets, or compressor yard piping) it is best to include the affect of the fittings in the
hydraulic calculations by attaching the appropriate fittings to the associated pipe segment.
! The displayed line style, width, and color can be assigned by one of several methods. By the default value,
by manual selection, by a value assigned in the Pipe Properties table, or by a value assigned in the Facilities
list.
! If an external database is attached, the Link ID is used to make a match between the selected data feature
and the corresponding record in the database. The first record in the database with a matching Link ID value,
is displayed in the Attribute Data list.
! See the “Working With External Databases” topic for more information on using an external database.
! The Pipe Data Screen can be accessed through the various command methods, or by placing the mouse
pointer near the desired customer and pressing the left mouse button.
261
Plot Settings...
When the Plot command is selected, the Plot Settings dialog box will appear to allow the User to set the
various plot control options. The features associated with the dialog box are described below:
Data Items - Page Layout Tab...
Border Width - This item specifies the width of the line used to draw the border. Type the desired value in
the edit box. The value is expressed in the currently specified printer dimensional units. This item is only
enabled when the Include Border and Title is selected (checked).
dimensional units.
262
Include Border And Title - When this option is selected (checked), a border and title will be included with
the plotted image.
Landscape Orientation - When this option is selected (checked), the image will be plotted in a landscape
orientation, with relation to the current paper size.
dimensional units.
Printer - This item specifies the currently selected printer/plotter. To change the selection, select a printer
from the list or select the Printer Setup command button.
dimensional units.
Data Items - Settings Tab...
263
Customer Size - This item specifies the base size of the symbols used to plot the customers. Type the desired
value in the edit box. The value is expressed in the currently specified printer dimensional units.
Font Name - This item specifies the name of the font to be used when printing the report. The value is set
the dialog box, then select the OK command button to save the changes and close the Font dialog box.
Font Size - This item specifies the size of the font to be used when printing the report. The value is set using
the Font dialog box. Click in the data field to open the Font dialog box. Select the desired settings in the
dialog box, then select the OK command button to save the changes and close the Font dialog box. The size
is expressed in printer points. One printer point is approximately equal to 1/72 of an inch.
Line Width - This item specifies the base width of the lines used to plot the pipes. Type the desired value
in the edit box. The value is expressed in the currently specified printer dimensional units.
Node Size - This item specifies the base size of the symbols used to plot the nodes. Type the desired value
in the edit box. The value is expressed in the currently specified printer dimensional units.
264
Number Of Copies - This item specifies the number of copies to be printed. Enter a value greater than 1 in
the edit box.
Plot Background Image - When this option is selected (checked), any attached background images will be
included with the plotted image.
Plot Data Values - When this option is selected (checked), the text values for the selected node, pipe, and
customer data items will be included with the plotted image.
Plot In Black And White - When this option is selected (checked), the image will be plotted in black and
white, except that the bitmap style background images may be printed in grayscale, not true black and white.
If this option is not selected, the image will be printed using the currently displayed screen colors.
Scale - This item specifies the scale to plot the image at. If the “Fit” option is selected, the image will be
scaled to fit within the available plot space. The scale value is expressed in terms of the currently selected
printer and coordinate dimensional units.
Use Bold Font - When this option is selected (checked), all text values will be printed using a bold (heavy)
font style.
265
Data Items - Style Tab...
Plot Current Display - Select this option to plot the contents of the image currently displayed in the GDI
work area.
Plot A User Selected Window - Select this option to plot the view as defined by a User selected window.
When selected, during plotting, a prompt will appear to allow the User to specify the plot window size. Use
the mouse to select the corners of the plot window. A dashed box will be displayed to represent the selected
plot window's size.
Plot Full Extents Of Model & Background Image - Select this option to plot the full contents of the model
and background image.
Plot A User Selected View - Select this option to plot the contents of a previously saved “view”. Select the
desired View from the associated View Name list.
266
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to cancel the plot routine. Depending on the status of the current plot
activities, the plot routine may not be terminated immediately.
Plot - Select this command button to execute the plot process.
setting changes, then select the OK command to return to the Plot Settings dialog box.
Usage Notes...
! Many printers and plotters have an internally set margin around the edges of the page. If the current margin
values are less than these preset values, a warning will appear when trying to plot. If this occurs, reset the
margins to appropriate values.
! The Windows System Printer is used to plot the image. The image is scaled as specified and centered
within the margins of the currently selected page size and page orientation. The page size may be changed
by selecting the "Setup" command button.
! The line width, node size, and customer size values are used as the base value for plotting the associated
features. What this means, is that this size is used to plot all features where their size value is set to the
default size value. Features with other size values will be plotted proportional to the base value. For example,
if the default line width is 2, all pipes with a display width set at 2 or to “default” will be plotted at the
specified line width. If a pipe feature has a display width set at 1, it will be plotted at 1 divided by 2 (or .5)
times smaller than the specified line width. And if a pipe feature has a display width set at 3, it will be plotted
at 3 divided by 2 (or 1.5) times larger than the specified line width.
267
Set Display Colors...

When the Set Color command is selected, the Set Display Color dialog box will appear. The dialog box
allows the display color of the basic GDI features to be set by the User. Using this dialog box, colors may
be set by three methods - by overall default colors, by query selection of a specific data value, or by range
assignment. The screen is segregated into three sections, each associated with one of the color assignment
methods. The features associated with each section are described below:
Default Colors...
This section specifies the default color values for the background and basic data features.
268
Background - This item specifies the color for the background of the image display area (work area). To
set the color, click in the adjacent colored box - the Color Selection dialog box will appear. Select the desired
value in the Color Selection dialog box, then select the OK command button.
Customer -This item specifies the default color used to display the customer features. To set the color, click
in the adjacent colored box - the Color Selection screen will appear. Select the desired value in the Color
Selection dialog box, then select the OK command button.
Node -This item specifies the default color used to display the node features. To set the color, click in the
adjacent colored box - the Color Selection screen will appear. Select the desired value in the Color Selection
dialog box, then select the OK command button.
Pipe - This item specifies the default color used to display the pipe features. To set the color, click in the
adjacent colored box - the Color Selection screen will appear. Select the desired value in the Color Selection
dialog box, then select the OK command button.
Symbols - This item specifies the default color used to display the symbols for non-pipe type elements. To
set the color, click in the adjacent colored box - the Color Selection screen will appear. Select the desired
value in the Color Selection dialog box, then select the OK command button.
Color By Query...
This section can be used to apply a highlight color to a selected set of customer, node, or pipe features -
based on a User specified selection criteria.
Color - This item specifies the color to use to highlight the features found by the query selection. To set the
color, click in the adjacent colored box - the Color Selection screen will appear. Select the desired value in
the Color Selection dialog box, then select the OK command button.
Color By Range...
This section can be used to color code customer, node, and pipe features based on User specified range
criteria. The section consists of a group of color boxes and range fields. Each color box is associated with
the adjacent value range. The range values may be manually set by the User or automatically set using either
the Allocation or Calculation method.
Color Boxes - A group of color boxes which are used to display and set the color associated with the
adjacent range. To set a color, click the desired box - the Color Selection screen will appear. Select the
desired value in the Color Selection dialog box, then select the OK command button.
269
From - A group of display boxes which are used to display the "From" value of the associated range. The
"To" value from the preceding range is automatically set as the "From" value for the following range. The
"From" values cannot be directly accessed.
To - A group of edit boxes which are used to display and edit the "To" value of the associated range. The
"To" values may be set by two methods. One is to automatically set the values using the Allocate and
Calculate methods. The other is to manually set the value by typing the desired value.
Item - A drop-down list used to specify which data item to associate with the specified ranges.
Units - A drop-down list used to specify the dimensional units to use during the Allocate or Calculate
process. The Units list will only be displayed when an appropriate item is selected in the Item list.
Command Buttons...
Allocate - Select this command button to automatically establish the range values using the “allocate”
method. The Allocate method attempts to create ranges with approximately the same number of features in
each range group. The Allocate method does not always use all of the range colors.
Apply Default Colors - Select this command button to apply the current settings to the displayed image.
Apply Query Colors - Select this command button to apply the highlight color to the selected features.
Apply Range Colors - Select this command button to apply the color code values to the associated features.
Calculate - Select this command button to automatically establish the range values using the “calculate”
method. The calculate method creates eight evenly "spaced" ranges based on the overall value range of the
selected item.
Define Query Specification - Select this command

button to open the Query Specification screen and
establish the query specification. Using the Query
screen, a selection set may be defined by specifying
which features to assign the specified color. Enter and
select the desired specification settings, then select the
Perform Query command button to create the selection
set. See the Query Specification screen description for
a complete description of the query screen.
270
Save Feature Colors - Select this command button to save the currently displayed colors. Setting the feature
colors using the Display Color commands only temporarily applies those colors to the current display. To
"permanently" save the colors, select the Save Feature Colors command button.
Usage Notes...
! Features are considered to be within a range if the value associated with the feature is greater than the
"From" value, and less than or equal to the "To" value for the range.
! After color coding, use the various GDI “Reset” commands to reset the feature colors to the values
currently saved in the model data files.
271
Set Text Options...

When the Set Text command is selected, the Text Display Options screen will appear. The dialog box allows
the text display color and options to be set by the User. The features associated with the dialog box are
described below:
Data Items...
Bold Font - When this option is selected (checked), all text values will be displayed using a bold (heavy)
font style.
Color Boxes - These color boxes display the currently set value used to display the associated data items.
To set a color, click the desired box - the Color Selection screen will appear. Select the desired value in the
Color Selection dialog box, then select the OK command button.
Customer Items - When this item is selected (checked), the customer item list will be enabled. The list
displays items available for display. To display an item, select (check) the box adjacent to the item
Dimensional Units - When this item is selected (checked), dimensional units are displayed as a suffix to
each data item, where appropriate.
272
Display Limit - This item specifies the limit used to determine wether to display the text values or not. When
the diagonal distance across the GDI work area is less than the display limit, the text values are displayed.
When the diagonal distance is greater then the display limit, the text is not displayed. The value is expressed
in terms of the current coordinate units. To set a value, type the desired value in the edit box. To set the limit
to the current display, double click in the edit box.
Node Items - When this item is selected (checked), the node item list will be enabled. The list displays items
available for display. To display an item, select (check) the box adjacent to the item
Pipe Items - When this item is selected (checked), the pipe item list will be enabled. The list displays items
available for display. To display an item, select (check) the box adjacent to the item
Text Rotation - This item specifies the rotation angle used to display the text values. The rotation angle is
measured as degrees clockwise from 12 o’clock (North). In terms of angle measurement, North is at the top
of the display. To set a value, type the desired value in the edit box.
Text Size - This item specifies the size of the text used to display the data values. The value is specified in
“printer points”. To set a value, type the desired value in the edit box.
Transparent Font - When this option is selected (checked), the Font background will be displayed
transparently. When this item is not selected, the text background will be opaque and will “blank out” the
image behind the text.
Variable Identifiers - When this item is selected (checked), item identifiers will be displayed as a prefix
to each data item. For example, a “P =” prefix would be included when node pressure values are displayed.
Command Buttons...
Apply - Select this command button to exit the screen, save any changes, and apply the current settings to
the displayed image.
Cancel - Select this command button to exit the screen without saving or applying any changes.
Usage Notes...
273
Shift Specification...
The Shift Model Coordinates command allows a model to be graphically shifted, scaled, and rotated. The
command is controlled using the Shift Specification screen. The features associated with the screen are
described as follows:
Data Items...
Rotation Angle - This item specifies the angle to rotate the image before it has been shifted. The rotation
angle is measured as degrees clockwise from 12 o’clock (North). In terms of angle measurement, North is
at the top of the display. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data field.
Rotation Point X - This item specifies the east-west location of the pivot point for rotating the image. The
value is expressed in the current GDI coordinate units. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data field.
Rotation Point Y - This item specifies the north-south location of the pivot point for rotating the image. The
value is expressed in the current GDI coordinate units. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data field.
Scale - This item specifies the amount to increase or decrease all length and coordinate values by. The value
is expressed as a multiplying factor, not a percentage. Values less than one (1.00) will decrease the image
size. Values greater than one (1.00) will increase the image size. Enter the desired value by typing it in the
data field.
X Shift - This item specifies the amount to move the image in the east-west direction. The value is expressed
in the current GDI coordinate units. Positive values move the image east. Negative values move the image
west. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data field.
274
Y Shift - This item specifies the amount to move the image in the north-south direction. The value is
expressed in the current GDI coordinate units. Positive values move the image north. Negative values move
the image south. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data field.
Update Pipe Lengths - When this item is selected (checked), the length value of all pipe type elements will
be recalculated based on the new X and Y coordinate values of the nodes and vertices. If the original length
values were entered manually and the original values are to be maintained, do not select this option.
Otherwise, generally this option should be selected.
Command Buttons...
Shift - Select this command button to calculate the new coordinates. A message box will appear when the
calculations are complete.
Usage Notes..
! The new coordinates are calculated in the following order. First the image is rotated about the specified
rotation location. The scale factor is then applied. Last the image is shifted by the specified amounts.
! This routine can be used to move models that were imported from another application where negative or
large coordinate values were supported. Or, where a different scale factor was used.
! This routine can be used to recalculate corrupt pipe length values by setting all of the shift specification
values to zero (0), except the scale factor. Set the scale to one (1.00), and ensure that the Update Pipe
Lengths item is selected. When the shift is performed, the model will not move, however all of the length
values will be recalculated based on the current node and vertex coordinate values.
275
Text Data Screen...

If User text features are included in the model, the data associated with the features is accessed through the
Text Data screen. The features associated with the basic data screen are described below:
Data Items...
Bold - When this option is selected (checked), the text value will be displayed using a bold (heavy) font
style.
Height - This item specifies the display height of the Text value, expressed in coordinate units. To enter a
value, type the desired value into the edit box.
Italic - When this option is selected (checked), the text value will be displayed using an italic font style.
Rotation - This item specifies the rotation angle used to display the text values. The rotation angle is
measured as degrees clockwise from 12 o’clock (North). In terms of angle measurement, North is at the top
of the display. To set a value, type the desired value in the edit box.
Text Value - This item specifies the value to be associated with the data feature. To enter a value, type the
desired value into the edit box.
Underline - When this option is selected (checked), a line will be placed under the text value when it is
displayed.
276
Command Buttons...
Set Color - Select this command button to set the text display color. The Color Selection dialog box will
appear. Select the desired color, then select the OK command button to set the color and return to the data
screen.
Usage Notes...
277
Tool Palette Edit Screen...

The configuration of the icons on the tool palette can be arranged by the User, using the Tool Palette Edit
screen. The features associated with the screen as follows:
The tool palette contains command icons similar to those found on the GDI toolbars. It also contains an
arrangement grid. The icons can be moved between grid locations by dragging and dropping the icons with
the mouse.
When the icons have been arranged as desired. Click the Tool Palette Close icon to exit the edit
mode, and to resize the tool palette to the smallest size possible to display all of icons. Once
closed, the tool palette may be resized using standard Windows screen manipulation methods.
278
Usage Notes...
! To control the display of the tool palette, select the Toggle Tool Palette icon to turn the tool palette on or
off, depending on its current status.
! The displayed location of the tool palette may be changed by dragging it with the mouse. The size of the
tool palette can be changed by dragging its edges or corners.
! When the tool palette is displayed, a command may be executed by clicking on the associated icon. When
the command is selected, the tool palette will be hidden until the command is complete. Once complete (or
canceled) the tool palette will be redisplayed.
279
Trace Specification...
The Trace function is controlled using the Trace Specification dialog box. The features associated with the
dialog box are described below:
Data Items...
Create A Trace Results File - When selected (checked), this item indicates that a Trace Results file will
be created. If selected, the report options listed below this item will be enabled.
Highlight Customers - When selected (checked), this item indicates that any customers found along the
trace route will be highlighted with the Trace Highlight Color.
Reset Colors Before Tracing - When selected (checked), this item causes the feature colors to be reset to
their currently saved values before the trace is performed.
280
Report Customers Along Route - When selected (checked), this item indicates that any customers found
along the trace route will be included in the Trace Results file. This item is only enabled when the Create
A Trace Results File is selected.
Report Pipes Along Route - When selected (checked), this item indicates that the pipes found along the
trace route will be included in the Trace Results file. This item is only enabled when the Create A Trace
Results File is selected.
Report Summary Of Features Along Route - When selected (checked), this item indicates that all features
found along the trace route will be included in the Trace Results file. This item is only enabled when the
Create A Trace Results File is selected.
Report Valves And Control Devices Along Route - When selected (checked), this item indicates that any
valves, regulators, compressors, or turned off elements found along the trace route will be included in the
Trace Results file. This item is only enabled when the Create A Trace Results File is selected.
Start Trace At - The selected item specifies the type of feature to use as the starting point for the trace.
Select the desired option by clicking on the button adjacent to the desired feature.
Trace Highlight Color - This item specifies the color to use when highlighting the pipes associated with
the trace. To set the color, click in the adjacent colored box - the Color selection screen will appear. In the
dialog box, select the desired color value. Then select the OK command button to save the selection and
return to the Trace Specification screen.
Trace Style - The selected item specifies the style of trace to be created. Select the desired option by clicking
on the button adjacent to the desired style. The function of each of the trace styles is described below:
Trace Style Description

Trace All Directions Performs a trace in all directions, stopping only at pipes that are turned off. All
pipes which are connected to the specified starting feature will be highlighted.
Trace Downstream Performs a downstream trace. All pipes which are fed (flow) from the specified
starting feature will be highlighted.
Trace To Valves Performs a trace in all directions, stopping only at valves, regulators or
compressors, or pipes that are turned off. All pipes which are connected to the
specified starting feature will be highlighted until a valve, regulator, or
compressor type element is encountered - or until an attribute valve is
encountered.
Trace Upstream Performs an upstream trace. All pipes which feed (flow) toward the specified
281
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the dialog box without performing the trace.
Trace - Select this command button to close the dialog box and perform the trace.
If the Create Trace Results File option is selected, a prompt will appear for entering the desired name for the
results file. Enter the desired name and select the Continue command button to continue. The trace results
file can posses any valid name, and does not necessarily need to be named similar to the model.
A prompt will appear to indicate the starting position, select the appropriate feature to create the trace.
Usage Notes...
! Using the valve trace option, the trace will proceed from the start feature until a valve, regulator, or
compressor type element is encountered - or until an attribute valve is encountered. However, attribute valves
are only considered if the valves are displayed prior to executing the trace. A pipe with an attached attribute
valve may or may not be highlighted depending on the location of the attribute valve. If the valve is located
on the "upstream" end of the pipe, the pipe will be highlighted. If the valve is located at the "downstream"
end of the pipe, the pipe may not be highlighted. In this case, upstream and downstream refer to the relative
position from the trace origin.
! See the "Using Attribute Valves" section of the manual for a complete description of attribute valves, their
usage, and their relationship to the trace function.
282
Trace Report...
When the Create A Trace Results File option is selected when using the Trace function, the results are stored
in a file referred to as a “trace report”. The contents of the report are displayed using the Trace Report screen.
283
Print - Selecting this icon executes a routine that prints the contents of the report. When selected,
Controls...
display right and left. If the report contents are wider than the display window, the horizontal scroll bar
The scroll bars may be adjusted by moving the bars’ "slider" with the mouse, or by clicking on the Arrow
284
Trace & Update Specification...

The Trace & Update function is controlled using the Trace & Update Specification dialog box. The features
associated with the dialog box are described below:
Data Items...
Equal To - This item indicates the new value for the selected item. Select the desired value from the list, or
type a new value if the item is not associated with a data list.
Highlight Customers - When selected (checked), this item indicates that any customers found along the
trace route will be highlighted using the Trace Highlight Color.
Set - This item indicates which data item is to be updated. Select the desired value from the list.
Start Trace At - The selected item specifies the type of feature to use as the starting point for the trace.
Select the desired option by clicking on the button adjacent to the desired feature.
285
Trace Highlight Color - This item specifies the color to use when highlighting the pipes associated with
the trace. To set the color, click in the adjacent colored box - the Color selection screen will appear. In the
dialog box, select the desired color value. Then select the OK command button to save the selection and
return to the specification screen.
Trace Style - The selected item specifies the style of trace to be created. Select the desired option by clicking
on the button adjacent to the desired style. The function of each of the trace styles is described below:
Trace Style Description

Trace All Directions Performs a trace in all directions, stopping only at pipes that are turned off. All
pipes which are connected to the specified starting feature will be highlighted.
Trace Downstream Performs a downstream trace. All pipes which are fed (flow) from the specified
Trace To Valves Performs a trace in all directions, stopping only at valves, regulators or
compressors, or pipes that are turned off. All pipes which are connected to the
specified starting feature will be highlighted until a valve, regulator, or
compressor type element is encountered - or until an attribute valve is
encountered.
Trace Upstream Performs an upstream trace. All pipes which feed (flow) toward the specified
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the dialog box without performing the trace.
Trace & Update - Select this command button to close the dialog box, perform the trace, and update the
specified item values A prompt will appear to indicate the starting position, select the appropriate feature to
create the trace.
Usage Notes...
286
287
288
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Property Tables
PROPERTY TABLES
289

This section describes the features associated with the various Property Tables and their report screen. It also
provides some suggestions on using the Property Tables to effectively manage common data associated with
the “pipe” features.
Using Property Tables...

The Property Table feature allow redundant pipe data to be included in a common file, and helps support the
modeling of non-pipe type elements. The Property Tables use relational data management techniques to
maintain a relation between the pipe data files and the Property Tables. A Property Table can be thought of
as a reference table. Information can be stored in the table and then referenced or "looked-up" based on a
common link value. The pipe data and the data contained in the Property Table are said to be "related" by
these link values. Through this relation, GASWorkS can access the data found in the Property Tables as
needed, without storing all of the required data in the pipe data files.
Several items in the pipe data file can be linked to a single item in a Property Table. This feature allows
redundant data to be stored only once, reducing data storage and entry requirements. This feature also allows
mass changes to be made by changing the value one time in the Property Table, and automatically change
all of the pipe features that are related to that particular table.
The Size/Type code is used to establish the link between the pipe data files and Property Tables.
To demonstrate how Property Tables can be used, consider the Pipe Property Table. This table contains
information about the dimensional properties of the pipes in the system. For each unique Size/Type code,
the table stores the wall thickness, outside diameter, and calculated inside diameter of the pipes. The
Size/Type code associated with the desired Property Table record may be entered in the Size/Type field of
the pipe data file, instead of actual inside pipe diameters. For example, the code "2P" (which represents two-
inch plastic) might be input for a pipe's Size/Type (diameter), instead of an actual inside diameter value of
"1.885". When an actual inside diameter for this pipe is required, the Pipe Property Table will be searched
for a Size/Type value equal to "2P". If a match is found, the value of the inside diameter associated with that
record is extracted from the Property Table.
There are several advantages to using Property Tables to store the dimensional pipe data. First, it eliminates
the need for the User to remember the values of the actual inside pipe diameter for every pipe in their system.
Instead, by defining the Property Table using logical codes for the pipe types, (like "2P" to represent a two-
inch plastic pipe), the User only needs to remember these easily identified codes.
Second, the use of Property Tables helps ensure the integrity of the model data. By maintaining the pipe sizes
in a single location, and by selecting the Size/Type codes from the size list when entering data, entry errors
can be reduced and consistent size values can be assured.
291
The Property Tables can be revised, added to, or deleted from by the User. When choosing values to be used
as the codes for the related items, attempt to choose codes that are short and logical. If you choose codes that
are long or hard to remember or understand, you have defeated one of the biggest advantages of using the
Property Table features.
"Standard" Property Tables are included when GASWorkS is installed. The content of the various tables are
described in the Appendix can be reviewed and modified as necessary to meet the User’s specific needs.
To change the contents of the Property Tables, select the Property Tables item from the Report menu list.
Select the tab associated with the desired table.
The remainder of this section describes the Property Table report screen.
Property Table Report...

The data contained in the Property Tables can be viewed, printed, and edited using the Property Table report.
The displayed content of the report will change depending on the selected table type. The general features
associated with the Property Table Report screen are described below:
292
Close - Select this command button to close the report screen. If changes have been made to any of the tables,
a prompt will appear to save the changes, respond appropriately.
Add Record - Select this icon to add a new record to the end of the currently displayed table.
Enter new data by clicking in the associated data cell. An entry box or data list will appear. Type
the desired value, or select a value from the list. Press the ENTER (5) key or click in another cell
to save the change.
Delete Record - Select this icon to delete the currently “selected” record in the currently
displayed table.
Expand Columns - Select this icon to expand all of the columns (data fields) associated with the
currently displayed table.
Insert Record - Select this icon to insert a new record just before the current record location in
the currently displayed table. Enter new data by clicking in the associated data cell. An entry box
or data list will appear. Type the desired value or select a value from the list. Press the ENTER
(5) key or click in another cell to save the change.
Move Record - Select this icon to move the currently selected record to a new location.
293
Open - Select this icon to open a previously saved property table. The type of table to be opened,
is controlled by the currently displayed table. When selected, the File Selection dialog box will
appear. Enter or select the desired filename, then select the Continue command button to open and
display the file.
Note: GASWorkS 7.0 look-up tables can be opened by navigating to the directory containing the desired files
(generally in the “\program files\gasworks 7\ini” (or lookup) directory), then enter *.lut in the Filename entry
box - the look-up tables will be listed. All version 7.0 look up (property) tables end in a “.lut” extension.
Select the appropriate file from the list. It will be translated to a GASWorkS 9.0 format - save the file to a
new name to save the results of the translation.
Print - Select this icon to print the contents of the tables. When selected, the Print Control box
Save - Select this icon to save the contents of the currently displayed table. The type of table to
be saved, is controlled by the currently displayed table. When selected, the File Selection dialog
box will appear. To save to a new name, enter or select the desired filename, then select the
Continue command button to save the file.
Set Columns - Select this icon to indicate which data fields to be displayed on the currently
displayed table. When selected, the Columns dialog box will appear. Select the desired columns
(data fields) by placing or removing the check mark adjacent to the field name. Select the Close
command button to apply the changes.
Note: Column display and widths can be adjusted by dragging the column separator lines.
Swap Yes And No - Select this icon to change all of the Yes values in the Use When Sizing
column to No, and change the No values to Yes. This is useful to reset the Use When Sizing
values, before making new selections. For example if the plastic type pipes are set to “No” and
the steel sizes are set to “Yes”, the two settings could be change quickly by selecting this icon.
After processing, all of the steel sizes would be set to “No” and the plastic sizes would be set to “Yes”.
Yes To No - Select this icon to change the values in the Use When Sizing column from Yes to No.
This is useful to reset the Use When Sizing values, before making new selections.
294
Report Controls...
Report Tabs - A series of tabs are displayed above the report data. The tabs access specific information for
each table type. The contents of each tab are described later in this section.
295
Compressor Data...
The unique features of the Compressor Property Table are described below:
Data Items...
Enter a new, or change a data value by clicking in the associated data cell. An entry box or data list will
appear. Type the desired value or select a value from the list. Press the ENTER (5) key or click in another
cell to save the change.
Dimensional Units - These items are used to specify the value of the various dimensional units. Select the
desired value from the entry list.
Equation - This item specifies the power equation that will be used to describe the compressor's power-
pressure-flow characteristics. Select the appropriate value from the entry list.
Fuel Consumption Rate - This item specifies the fuel consumption rate for the current compressor. Type
the desired value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the selected dimensional units.
296
Parameter 1 - The definition of this item varies depending on the selected power equation. Type the desired
value in the entry box. The following table summarizes the definition of this item as associated with each
of the individual power equations:
Power Equation Parameter 1 Definition

Empirical K1 - Equation Constant
Empirical2 Not Used
Theoretic Not Used

Empirical2 Not Used
Theoretic Not Used

Empirical2 Not Used
Theoretic Not Used
Rated Power - A data field used to display and enter the rated power of the current compressor. The Rated
Power is only used as a comparison value by the report and display routines. Type the desired value in the
entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the selected dimensional units.
Rec # - This item specifies the record number, in the data file, of the items displayed in the table. The values
are used for User reference only.
297
Size/Type - This item specifies the current compressor's unique Size/Type code. This item is used to relate
the Compressor table to the pipe data files. The Size/Type code can be any group of alphabetic, numeric, or
special characters. The value can be no longer than twenty (20) characters. Use a logical code to identify the
Size/Type value. Type the desired value in the entry box.
298
Fitting Property Data...

The unique features of the Fitting Property Table are described below:
Data Items...
Efficiency - This item specifies the Efficiency value to be used with the associated fitting. Type the desired
value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the selected dimensional units. See the Usage
Notes for additional information on the use of the efficiency in the solution process.
Equivalent Diameter - This item specifies the value of the Equivalent Diameter for the fitting. The
Equivalent Diameter represents the inside diameter value that was used as the basis for calculating the
Equivalent Length value. Type the desired value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with
the selected dimensional units.
Equivalent Length - This item specifies the value of the calculated Equivalent Length of the fitting. Type
the desired value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the selected dimensional units.
299
Roughness - This item specifies the value of the inside pipe wall roughness to be used for the fitting. Type
the desired value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current dimensional units.
Size/Type - This item specifies the current fitting’s unique Size/Type code. This item is used to relate the
Fitting table to the pipe data files. The code can be any group of alphabetic, numeric, or special characters.
The value can be no longer than twenty (20) characters. Use a logical code to identify the Size/Type value.
For example, “1.5 L-90" might represent a one and one-half inch ninety degree elbow. Type the desired value
in the entry box.
300
Pipe Property Data...

The unique features of the Pipe Property Table are described below:
Data Items...
Cost Per Unit Length - A data field used to display and enter the unit value of the pipe's installation cost.
Any currency unit may be used. Enter the appropriate value by typing it in the data field. The value should
be consistent with the length units used with the pipe segments. For example, if the length units are “feet”,
the Cost Per Unit Length should be expressed in cost per foot. If the length units are “Kilometer”, the Cost
Per Unit Length should be expressed in cost per kilometer. Type the desired value in the entry box.
Display Color - This item specifies the color to be used to display the associated pipe size/type, when the
color value of an assigned pipe is set to “Pipe Table”. Click in the data cell to open the Color Selection dialog
box, or select the Default value from the entry list.
301
Display Line Style - This item specifies the line style to be used to display the associated pipe size/type,
when the line style value of an assigned pipe is set to “Pipe Table”. Select the desired value from the entry
list.
Display Line Width - This item specifies the line width to be used to display the associated pipe size/type,
when the line width value of an assigned pipe is set to “Pipe Table”. Select the desired value from the entry
list.
Efficiency - This item specifies the efficiency value to be used with the associated pipe. Type the desired
value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the selected dimensional units. See the Usage
Notes for additional information on the use of the efficiency in the solution process.
Inside Diameter - This item displays the calculated value of the inside diameter of the pipe. The value is
calculated using the wall thickness and outside diameter values. The User cannot directly modify this item.
To change the value of the inside diameter, modify the wall thickness or outside diameter values.
Outside Diameter - This item specifies the value of the outside diameter of the associated pipe. If
manufacturing tolerances are available, adjust the outside diameter to reflect the smallest possible diameter
(this will result in a conservative inside diameter value). Type the desired value in the entry box. Ensure that
the value is consistent with the current dimensional unit.
Roughness - This item specifies the value of the internal wall roughness of the associated pipe. Type the
desired value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the current dimensional unit.
Size/Type - This item specifies the current pipe's unique Size/Type code. This item is used to relate the Pipe
Properties table to the pipe data files. The code can be any group of alphabetic, numeric, or special
characters. The value can be no longer than twenty (20) characters. Use a logical code to identify the
Size/Type value. For example, "2P" could be used to represent a two-inch plastic pipe. Type the desired value
in the entry box.
Sizing Group - This item specifies the “sizing group” to associate the current pipe with. Several sizes can
be assigned to a group - for example, plastic sizes could be assigned to one group and steel to another. Each
pipe segment can be assigned to a specific group. When using the pipe sizing routine, only pipe sizes
associated with the assigned group will be considered during the pipe selection.
SMYS - This item specifies the Specified Minimum Yield Strength value to be used with the associated pipe.
Type the desired value in the entry box. Ensure that the value is consistent with the selected dimensional
units. The SMYS value is used for reporting purposes only.
302
Wall Thickness - This item specifies the value of the wall thickness of the associated pipe. If manufacturing
tolerances are available, the pipe wall thickness should be adjusted so that it reflects the greatest thickness
possible (this results in a conservative inside diameter value). Type the desired value in the entry box. Ensure
that the value is consistent with the current dimensional unit.
Use When Sizing - When this item is set to Yes, the current type will be available for use when the Calculate
Pipe Sizes option is selected during the Solution process (when the model is optimized). During the
optimization routine, only pipe types identified for use (set to Yes) will be considered when finding the
required pipe sizes for the system being modeled. Select the desired value from the entry list.
303
Regulator Property Data...

The unique features of the Regulator Property Table are described below:
Data Items...
Dimensional Units - This item specifies the dimensional units for the various data values. Select the desired
value from the entry list.
Equation - This item specifies the flow equation that will be used to describe the regulator's pressure-flow
characteristics. Select the appropriate value from the entry list. The following table summarizes the available
equations and their general application by manufacturer:
Manufacturer Applicable Flow Equation

Equimeter Rockwell
Fisher Universal
Grove - Models 900 & 83 Grove
304
Grove - Model 80 Flexflo Grove80
Mooney Universal
Rockwell Rockwell
Min Differential - This item specifies the minimum differential of the associated regulator. Type the desired
value in the entry box. Ensure that the value corresponds to the selected dimensional units.
Parameter 1 - The definition of this item varies depending on the selected flow equation. Type the desired
value in the entry box. The following table summarizes the definition of this item based on the various flow
equations:
Flow Equation Parameter 1 Definition

Grove Not Used
Grove80 Tube Expansion Factor
Rockwell Not Used
Universal C1 - Valve Recovery Factor
Size/Type - This item specifies the current regulator's unique Size/Type code. This item is used to relate the
Regulator table to the pipe data files. The code can be any group of alphabetic, numeric, or special
characters. The value can be no longer than twenty (20) characters. Use a logical code to identify the
Size/Type value. For example, "FC 1-1098" could be used to represent a Fisher Controls 1" model 1098
regulator. Type the desired value in the entry box.
Valve Factor - This item specifies the published "regulating" valve coefficient of the regulator. Type the
desired value in the entry box. The following table summarizes the applicable values based on each specific
flow equation:
Flow Equation Applicable Coefficient

Grove80 C1 - Critical Flow Factor
Universal Cg (Regulating) - Gas Sizing Coefficient
305
Wide-Open Factor - This item specifies the published “wide-open” valve coefficient of the regulator. For
some manufacturers this value is the same as the “regulating” valve coefficient. Type the desired value in
the entry box. The following table summarizes the coefficient's definition, based on each specific flow
equation:

Grove80 Cp - Valve Wide Open Capacity Coefficient
Universal Cg (Wide-Open) - Gas Sizing Coefficient
306
Valve Property Data...

The unique features of the Valve Property Table are described below:
Data Items...
Equivalent Diameter - This item specifies the equivalent diameter of the valve. The physical definition of
this item varies according to the selected flow equation. Type the desired value in the entry box. Ensure that
the value is consistent with the selected dimensional units. The following table summarizes the item
definition associated with each of the individual flow equations:
307
Flow Equation Applicable Parameter

Crane Varies. See the Crane Publication No. 410 for a detailed description. For
approximate calculations use the inside diameter of the inlet pipe connection.
Grove-Reg The inside diameter of the inlet pipe connection.
RW-Reg The inside diameter of the inlet pipe connection.
Rockwell Valve The inside diameter of the inlet pipe connection.
Univ-Reg The inside diameter of the inlet pipe connection.
Dimensional Units - This item specifies the dimensional units for the various data values. Select the desired
value from the entry list.
Equation - This item specifies the flow equation that will be used to describe the valve's pressure-flow
characteristics. Select the appropriate value from the entry list. The following table summarizes the available
equations and their general application:

Equimeter Regulator RW-Reg
Fisher Regulator Univ-Reg
Generic Fittings, Valves, and Regulators Crane
Grove Regulator Grove-Reg
Mooney Regulator Univ-Reg
Rockwell Regulator RW-Reg
Rockwell Valve Rockwell
Sensus Regulator RW-Reg
308
Parameter 1 - The definition of this item varies depending on the selected flow equation. Type the desired
value in the entry box. The following table summarizes the definition of this item based on the various flow
equations:
Flow Equation Parameter 1 Definition

Crane Not Used
Grove-Reg Fk - Specific Heat Ratio
RW-Reg Not Used
Rockwell Not Used
Univ-Reg C1 - Valve Recovery Factor
Size/Type - This item specifies the current valve's unique Size/Type code. This item is used to relate the
Valve table to the pipe data files. The code can be any group of alphabetic, numeric, or special characters.
The value can be no longer than twenty (20) characters. Use a logical code to identify the Size/Type value.
For example, "1 Ball" could be used to represent a generic 1inch ball valve. Type the desired value in the
entry box.
Valve Coefficient - This item specifies the published coefficient for the valve. The definition of this item
varies depending on the selected flow equation. Enter the appropriate value by typing it in the data field. The
following table summarizes the applicable values based on each specific flow equation:

Crane K - Resistance Coefficient
Grove-Reg Cv - Valve Capacity Factor
Rockwell "F" Factor - Pressure Drop Factor
RW-Reg "K" Factor - Regulator Constant
Univ-Reg Cg (Wide-Open) - Gas Sizing Coefficient
309
Well Property Data...

The unique features of the Well Property Table are described below:
Data Items...
Coefficient - This item specifies the value of the equation coefficient (constant) of the associated well. Type
the desired value in the entry box.
Exponent - This item specifies the value of the equation exponent of the associated well. Type the desired
value in the entry box.
Well ID/Type - This item specifies the current well's unique identification code. This item is used to relate
the Well table to the pipe data files. The code can be any group of alphabetic, numeric, or special characters.
The value can be no longer than twenty (20) characters. Use a logical code to identify the ID value. Type the
desired value in the entry box.
310
Usage Notes...
! The number of columns in the report will vary according to the selected table type.
! If the report is too wide to print, reduce the column widths by adjusting their width using the mouse, set
the printer to use landscape mode, and reduce the printer font size. If the contents of a report will not fit on
a single page width, multiple pages will be used to print the report.
! The compressor power equations are described in the Appendix.
! The values of the compressor parameters must be based on an equation whose dimensional units are
consistent with the following:
Equation Parameter Dimensional Units

Volumetric Flow Rate Cfh
Pressure or Pressure Drop Psia
Temperature Rankine
! The "Fitting" type can be used to model any device for which an equivalent length can be calculated.
! Fittings are modeled as a segment of pipe using the Equivalent Length for the pipe's length and the
Equivalent Diameter for the pipe's diameter.
! The equivalent length can be determined from manufacturer tables, or from a piping design handbook.
Most equivalent lengths are expressed in terms of length of standard wall thickness pipe. It is important to
know and correctly set the Equivalent Diameter that was used to calculate the Equivalent Length.
! The dimensional units for the Equivalent Diameter and Equivalent Length items are independent of the
diameter and length units used for the pipes. In other words, the Property Table dimensional units can be
different from the units used for the pipes. For example, the Equivalent Diameter values could be expressed
in “Inches” and the pipe diameter values could be expressed in “Centimeters”. The appropriate unit
conversion will automatically take place when using and reporting the Property Table values.
! The dimensional units for the Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness items are independent of the diameter
units used for the pipes. In other words, the Property Table dimensional units can be different from the
diameter units used for the pipes. For example, the Property Table values could be expressed in “Inches” and
the pipe diameter values could be expressed in “Centimeters”. The appropriate unit conversion will
automatically take place when using and reporting the Property Table values.
311
! The Specified Minimum Yield Strength value is only truly applicable for steel pipe types. However, for
plastic pipe types, the Long Term Hydrostatic Strength can be used in place of the Specified Minimum Yield
Strength to estimate the hoop stress to strength ratio.
! The Cost Per Unit Length is used in the Summary Report to calculate the cost of the system. Costs of
various system configurations can be compared to determine the cost and benefits of the various scenarios.
! The regulator flow equations are described in the Appendix.
! Use the "Regulator" hydraulic type to model regulators operating in the "control" or "working monitor"
mode. To model a regulator in a "wide-open monitor" mode, or in an upset condition, model the regulator
as a "Valve" element.
! The values of the regulator parameters must be based on a flow equation whose dimensional units are
consistent with the following values:

Temperature Rankine
! The valve flow equations are described in the Appendix.
! The "Valve" hydraulic type can also be used to model fittings (using the Crane Equation), or regulators
operating in the "wide-open monitor" mode, or in an upset condition (using the Crane or "Reg" equations).
! The dimensional units for the Equivalent Diameter item are independent of the diameter units used for the
pipes. In other words, the Property Table dimensional units can be different than the units used for the pipes.
For example, the Equivalent Diameter values could be expressed in “Inches” and the pipe diameter values
could be expressed in “Centimeters”. The appropriate unit conversion will automatically take place when
using and reporting the Property Table values.
! During the solution, a “total” efficiency is computed for pipe and fitting type elements. This value is used
in the hydraulic calculations. The total efficiency value is computed as the product of the efficiency assigned
directly to the pipe segment, and the efficiency value found in the Pipe Properties table for the matching
Size/Type code. If no matching record is found in the Pipe Properties table, only the assigned value is used.
To apply only the values in the Property Tables, set the pipe segment value to one (1.00). To apply only the
pipe segment value, set the associated Property Table value to one (1.00).
312
! The values of the valve parameters must be based on an equation whose units are consistent with the
following:

Temperature Rankine
! Only one well equation is supported, it is described in the Appendix. The equation coefficient and equation
exponent are well dependent. Their values are determined by performing a multipoint curve fit of data
derived from a standard performance test of the well.
! The Well Property table is useful for maintaining generic or assumed well performance data for untested
or similar performing wells. The equation coefficient (constant) and exponent can also be uniquely entered
for an individual well feature without using the Property table. To allow entry of unique values for a well
feature, select the Unique item from the size/type list in the pipe data for the well.
! The values of the well parameters must be based on an equation whose units are consistent with the
following:

Temperature Rankine
313
314
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Attribute Data
ATTRIBUTE DATA
315

GASWorkS allows non-model data to be attached to a model through the use of an external database. This
non-model data is referred to as attribute data. Attribute data can be attached to both customer and pipe
features. An external database can also be used to indirectly assign the load values for customer features.
This section describes the various routines and associated data screens associated with the attribute data and
external database functions.
Attaching A Customer Attribute File...

A “linked”customer attribute file, or another external database file can be attached to the customer features
in a model. The attribute file settings are defined using the Customer Attribute Settings screen. The screen
is accessed by selecting the Attribute File item from the Customer Data submenu of the Utilities menu list.
Data Items...
Address Field - This item specifies the name of the database field (in the attached attribute file) which
contains the customer address values. The address is only used for certain reporting routines. Select the
appropriate field name from the list. This item is optional, if it is not used, leave the field empty. This item
is only enabled if the file type is set to other than “None” or “Linked Attribute”.
317
Attribute File Type - This item specifies the type of the attached attribute file. Select the appropriate type
from the list.
Connection Status - This item specifies the status of the connection between the model and attribute file.
If the status is turned off, the connection will be disabled until turned back on.
Link ID Field - This item specifies the name of the database field (in the attached attribute file) which
contains the customer identification number. The Link ID is used to “link” the customer features contained
in the model, to the data contained in the attached attribute file. Select the appropriate field name from the
list. A field name must be specified. This item is only enabled if the file type is set to other than “None” or
“Linked Attribute”.
Filename - This item specifies the name of the attached attribute file. Select the Browse command button
to display the File Selection dialog box. Select the desired filename, then select the Continue command
button to attach the file. This item is only enabled if the file type is set to other than “None” or “Linked
Attribute”.
Total Load Field - This item specifies the name of the database field (in the attached attribute file) which
contains the total load values. If this item is specified, it is assigned to the total load value of the associated
customer feature. This item is optional, if it is not used, leave the field empty. This item is only enabled if
the file type is set to other than “None”.
Total Load Units - This item specifies the dimensional unit value for the total load values contained in the
attached attribute files. If the Total Load Field is specified, this item must be assigned. Select the appropriate
value from the list. This item is only enabled if the file type is set to other than “None”.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to leave the screen without saving any changes.
Close - Select this command button to leave the screen, and save and apply any changes.
318
Usage Notes...
! The available attribute file types are described below:
File Type Description

None Use this item when no attribute file is attached.
dBASE III Select this item when the attribute data is contained in a dBASE III format file.
The file does not need to contain a record for each customer feature. Only
records that match an existing customer feature will be available for display.
Customers are matched using the Link ID value.
dBASE IV Select this item when the attribute data is contained in a dBASE IV format file.
The file does not need to contain a record for each customer feature. Only
records that match an existing customer feature will be available for display.
Customers are matched using the Link ID value.
Excel 4.0 Select this item when the attribute data is contained in a Excel 4.0 Worksheet
(xls Worksheet) format file. The file does not need to contain a record for each customer feature.
Only records that match an existing customer feature will be available for
display. Customers are matched using the Link ID value.
Linked Attribute Select this item to use the GASWorkS “linked” attribute file features. When this
type of file is selected, GASWorkS creates a database file from a “seed” file,
and manages the addition and deletion of records associated with the file.
! When an attribute file is attached, and turned on, the attribute data will be displayed in Customer Report,
on the Customer Data screen, and will be available for manipulation with some of the edit commands and
SQL edit feature
! After attaching or changing an attribute file, remember to update the node loads, as appropriate, using the
Update External Loads item from the Customer Data submenu list.
! When a “Linked Attribute” file is initially attached , GASWorkS creates a new dBASE 4.0 format database
file possessing the same name as the model, with a “.cdb” extension. The contents of the file are extracted
from a “seed” file. The seed file is a database file that contains the name of the data fields and associated data
types to be used in the linked file. The contents of the file can be manipulated by the User using any
application which will open and save files in dBASE 4.0 format (for example Microsoft Excel or Access).
319
The seed file must be named “cattseed.dbf”, must be located in the currently specified Initialization File
directory, and must be in dBASE 4.0 format. A sample file is included when GASWorkS is installed. Review
the contents of that file for an example of how to organize the file. The file must contain one text type data
field named “LINK_ID” and one named “ADDRESS”.
! Once a Linked Attribute file is attached and created, GASWorkS manages the addition and deletion of the
associated records. One database record is maintained for each customer data feature contained in the model.
Individual customers may be “attached” or “unattached” from the attribute file by appropriately setting the
Link To Attribute customer data item.
! Additional fields may be added to or removed from the attribute file after its initial creation, using an
appropriate database application. Ensure that GASWorkS is not using the file when the changes are made.
If a Linked Attribute file is used, do not add or remove records from the file using a non-GASWorkS
application.
! When an attribute file is attached, the model and database files are linked using the Link ID value. When
a function needs to display or report information contained in the attribute file, a search of the database is
performed. The first record in the database with a matching Link ID value is retrieved. Multiple customer
features may contain the same Link ID value, however only unique Link ID values should appear in the
attribute database.
! Depending on the size of the attached database, processor speed, and “connection” speed, the search
process may take some time to complete. If the connection is slow, the attribute file connection can be
temporarily turned off using the Connection Status data item, at times when the attribute data is not needed.
! When working with a linked style database, turning the status “off”, does not prevent records from being
added to or deleted from the database file - it only suppresses the display of attribute data in the various
report and display routines.
320
Attaching A Pipe Attribute File...

A “linked”pipe attribute file, or another external database file can be attached to the pipe features in a model.
The attribute file settings are defined using the Pipe Attribute Settings screen. The screen is accessed by
selecting the Attribute File item from the Pipe Data submenu of the Utilities menu list. The features
Data Items...
Address Field - This item specifies the name of the database field (in the attached attribute file) which
contains the pipe address values. The address is only used for certain reporting routines. Select the
appropriate field name from the list. This item is optional, if it is not used, leave the field empty. This item
is only enabled if the file type is set to other than “None” or “Linked Attribute”.
Attribute File Type - This item specifies the type of the attached attribute file. Select the appropriate type
from the list.
Connection Status - This item specifies the status of the connection between the model and attribute file.
If the status is turned off, the connection will be disabled until turned back on.
321
Link ID Field - This item specifies the name of the database field (in the attached attribute file) which
contains the pipe identification number. The Link ID is used to “link” the pipe features contained in the
model, to the data contained in the attached attribute file. Select the appropriate field name from the list. A
field name must be specified. This item is only enabled if the file type is set to other than “None” or “Linked
Attribute”.
Filename - This item specifies the name of the attached attribute file. Select the Browse command button
to display the File Selection dialog box. Select the desired filename, then select the Continue command
button to attach the file. This item is only enabled if the file type is set to other than “None” or “Linked
Attribute”.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to leave the screen without saving any changes.
Close - Select this command button to leave the screen, and save and apply any changes.
Usage Notes...
! The available attribute file types are described below:
File Type Description

None Use this item when no attribute file is attached.
dBASE III Select this item when the attribute data is contained in a dBASE III format file.
The file does not need to contain a record for each pipe feature. Only records
that match an existing pipe feature will be available for display. Pipes are
matched using the Link ID value.
dBASE IV Select this item when the attribute data is contained in a dBASE IV format file.
The file does not need to contain a record for each pipe feature. Only records
that match an existing pipe feature will be available for display. Pipes are
matched using the Link ID value.
Excel 4.0 Select this item when the attribute data is contained in a Excel 4.0 Worksheet
(xls Worksheet) format file. The file does not need to contain a record for each pipe feature.
Only records that match an existing pipe feature will be available for display.
Pipes are matched using the Link ID value.
Linked Attribute Select this item to use the GASWorkS “linked” attribute file features. When this
type of file is selected, GASWorkS creates a database file from a “seed” file,
and manages the addition and deletion of records associated with the file.
322
! When an attribute file is attached, and turned on, the attribute data will be displayed in Pipe Report, on
the Pipe Data screen, and will be available for manipulation with some of the edit commands and SQL edit
feature
! When a “Linked Attribute” file is initially attached , GASWorkS creates a new dBASE 4.0 format database
file possessing the same name as the model, with a “.pdb” extension. The contents of the file are extracted
from a “seed” file. The seed file is a database file that contains the name of the data fields and associated data
types to be used in the linked file. The contents of the file can be manipulated by the User using any
application which will open and save files in dBASE 4.0 format (for example Microsoft Excel or Access).
The seed file must be named “pattseed.dbf”, must be located in the currently specified Initialization File
directory, and must be in dBASE 4.0 format. A sample file is included when GASWorkS is installed. Review
the contents of that file for an example of how to organize the file. The file must contain one text type data
field named “LINK_ID” and one named “ADDRESS”.
! Once a Linked Attribute file is attached and created, GASWorkS manages the addition and deletion of the
associated records. One database record is maintained for each customer data feature contained in the model.
Individual pipes may be “attached” or “unattached” from the attribute file by appropriately setting the Link
To Attribute pipe data item.
! Additional fields may be added to or removed from the attribute file after its initial creation, using an
appropriate database application. Ensure that GASWorkS is not using the file when the changes are made.
If a Linked Attribute file is used, do not add or remove records from the file using a non-GASWorkS
application.
! When an attribute file is attached, the model and database files are linked using the Link ID value. When
a function needs to display or report information contained in the attribute file, a search of the database is
performed. The first record in the database with a matching Link ID value is retrieved. Multiple customer
features may contain the same Link ID value, however only unique Link ID values should appear in the
attribute database.
! Depending on the size of the attached database, processor speed, and “connection” speed, the search
process may take some time to complete. If the connection is slow, the attribute file connection can be
temporarily turned off using the Connection Status data item, at times when the attribute data is not needed.
! When working with a linked style database, turning the status “off”, does not prevent records from being
added to or deleted from the database file - it only suppresses the display of attribute data in the various
report and display routines.
323
Using SQL To Update Attribute Data...

GASWorkS provides a routine for updating data values contained in pipe and customer attribute files (not
all file types support SQL). This routine is particularly useful for modifying customer data contained in an
attribute file. The modifications are defined by the use of a Standard Query Language (SQL) statement. SQL
is a special language used to control and define changes to supported format database files. A complete
discussion and review of SQL is beyond the scope of this document, however the On-Line Help system
contains a variety of examples which will provide some insight into using SQL to modify data in an attribute
file. The SQL statement is entered and executed using the SQL Statement Definition screen. The features
Data Items...
Saved Statements - This item lists any previously saved SQL statements. Select a statement from the list.
SQL Statement - This item is used to specify the desired SQL statement. Enter the desired statement by
typing it in the edit box. Refer to the Usage Notes for further information about the statement format
requirements.
Command Buttons...
Close - Select this command button to leave the screen.
Delete Current Specification - Select this command button to delete the currently displayed Saved
Statement.
Execute - Select this command button to execute the specified statement.
324
Save Current Specification - Select this command button to save the currently displayed SQL Statement.
Usage Notes...
! The SQL statement represents the “Set” and “Where” portions of a standard Update statement. For
example, to increase the values in a field called “TOTAL” by ten (10) percent, the required SQL statement
would be: SET TOTAL = TOTAL * 1.1.
! Changes made to the attribute file using this method are “permanent”. You may be able to undo a change
by immediately executing a “reciprocal” SQL statement. For example, to undo the change described above,
the reciprocal SQL statement would be: SET TOTAL = TOTAL / 1.1.
325
326
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Import & Export Routines
IMPORT & EXPORT

ROUTINES
327

This section describes the features associated with the GASWorkS Import & Export routines, and provides
suggestions on using these features to effectively use GASWorkS with data from other applications.
GASWorkS provides translation routines for importing or exporting data associated with several types of
file formats. Using the Import/Export routines, data contained in ASCII Text files, older version GASWorkS
files, database files, spreadsheet files, CAD files, and GIS files may be used with GASWorkS. The following
table describes the Import and Export features supported by GASWorkS:
File Type Supports

Import Export Merge Quick
Export
ASCII Customer, Node, And Pipe Data (Delimited) U U U U
ASCII Customer, Node, And Pipe Data (Column) U U
dBASE III (3.0) Customer, Node, And Pipe Data U U U U
dBASE IV (4.0) Customer, Node, And Pipe Data U
dBASE V (5.0) Customer, Node, And Pipe Data U
DXF U U U
GASWorkS 7.0 U U U U
Microsoft Access U
Microsoft Excel 4.0 Worksheet Customer, Node, and Pipe U U U U
Data
Microsoft Excel 5.0 Workbook Customer, Node, and Pipe U
Data
Shape Attribute Valve U U
Shape Customer, Node, And Pipe Data U U U U
Stoner PD & XY U U U
X-Y Customer U U
X-Y Node U U U
329
The import and export routines are accessed through the Import/Export item in the Utilities menu list. When
selected, the Import/Export Control screen will appear. All of the import routines are controlled through this
screen. The features associated with the control screen and file selection screen, along with the specific
requirements associated with each supported file type are described on the following pages. Where specific
file format or data requirements are present, they are described in the appropriate section.
The Quick Export routines are accessed using the Quick Export submenu of the File menu list. The Quick
Export routines automatically export the customer, node, and pipe data contained in the model to a single
file or set of files in the specified format, depending on the target data type. When using the Quick Export
routines, the contents of the data files associated with the currently open model are used to create the export
files - not the data contained in memory - save the model before exporting to include any changes were made
after the model was opened or last saved.
330
Import/Export Control...
The Import routines are controlled from the Import/Export Control screen. The features associated with the
screen are described below:
Data Items...
File Type - This item specifies the type of file to be imported. Select the desired type from the list. When
selected, the type will be highlighted in the File Type list and displayed in the Import/Export Log list.
Import/Export Log - This item displays the activity of the Import/Export routine.
Processing Record - This item displays the number of the record or line that is currently being processed.
Command Buttons...
Merge - Select this command button to merge a file with an existing GASWorkS model. Selecting this
command button will cause the Import/Export File Selection dialog box to be displayed. Select the desired
files, then click the Continue command button to perform the file translation.
Import - Select this command button to translate a file and create a new GASWorkS model. Selecting this
command button will cause the Import/Export File Selection dialog box to be displayed. Select the desired
files, then click the Continue command button to perform the file translation.
Export - Select this command button to translate a GASWorkS model into the selected file format. Selecting
this command button will cause the Import/Export File Selection dialog box to be displayed. Select the
desired files, then click the Continue command button to perform the file translation.
331
Close/Cancel/Exit - The function and caption of this command button varies depending on the current
activity and status of the translation routine. When “Close” is displayed, select this command button to close
the Import/Export Control screen without performing a translation. When “Cancel” is displayed, select this
command button to stop the translation activity. When “Exit” is displayed, select this command button to
close the Import/Export Control screen.
Usage Notes...
! The features associated with the Import/Export File Selection dialog box are presented later in this section.
! Selecting certain File Types may cause an additional option or data screen to appear. These screens allow
additional translation specifications to be defined. These screens are discussed later in this section.
! The Merge routine allows a file to be merged with an existing GASWorkS file. When using Merge, the
import (source) file is compared to the GASWorkS (target) file. Where matching records are found, only the
defined data fields are updated. If a matching record is not found in the Target file, a new record is added
to the GASWorkS file.
! The Export routine creates a new set of files in the specified format, it does not change the format or
content of the GASWorkS model data files.
! The Import routine creates a new set of GASWorkS model data files. If existing model files are present,
they will be sent the Windows Recycle Bin before the import routine is executed.
332
Import/Export File Selection...

When using the Import, Export, or Merge routines, the source and target file names are specified using the
Import/Export File Selection screen. The features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items...
The upper portion of the screen contains items associated with the source (input) file. The lower portion of
the screen contains items associated with the target (output) file.
Directories - These items are used to specify the directory (folder) containing the desired files. Select the
desired directory from the list. When a directory has been selected, all files matching the specified extension
or search pattern will be displayed in the Files list box.
333
Drives - These items are used to specify the disk drive containing the desired files. Select the desired drive
from the list. When a drive is selected, the directories contained on that drive will be listed in the Directories
list box. The directory that is current for the specified drive, will be at the top of the list.
Files - These items are used to select the source and target file names. To select a file, double-click on the
desired file's name, its name will be placed in the appropriate Filename edit box.
File Name - This item is used to modify the name of the currently selected file. The filename can be
manually entered by typing it in the edit box, or by selecting a file from the associated Files list.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the Import/Export File Selection dialog box without
performing the translation.
Continue - Select this command button to close the Import/Export File Selection dialog box, and to proceed
with the translation routine.
Usage Notes...
! The Source and Target Filename items are linked to each other - when a file is entered or selected in the
Source Filename edit box, a suggested name is also entered in the Target name box. The target name can be
changed by selecting a filename from the associated Files list, or by manually typing a value in the edit box.
! When importing or merging a file, the file to be imported is referred to as the "Source" file, and the
GASWorkS model being imported into is referred to as the "Target" file. When exporting a file, the
GASWorkS model to be exported is referred to as the "Source" file, and the file being created is referred to
as the "Target" file.
! The import routine will overwrite existing files. If a target file is named the same as an existing file, the
original contents of the file will be sent to the Windows Recycle Bin. A warning will appear if an existing
file is about to be overwritten. When the warning appears, select the appropriate option to proceed.
334
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Import Routines
IMPORT ROUTINES
335

Importing Files...
This section of the manual provides descriptions and requirements for importing data from the various
supported file formats. Where an additional data screen is used to further define the import specifications,
it will be described in the appropriate section. The On-Line Help system contains a variety of step by step
examples of importing the various data files.
When importing data files, ensure that the data values and dimensional units contained in the source file are
compatible with the values supported by GASWorkS.
The import (source) file does not need to be completely inclusive. Items not included in the file will be set
to applicable default values and may be revised after the import is complete, using the Mass Update or data
edit routines. The default values can be set before importing a file using the Set Defaults item from the
Utilities menu list.
337
Importing Column Format ASCII Files...

Fixed column format ASCII files can be used to import or merge customer, pipe, or node data into a
GASWorkS model. The import or merge routine for these type files is controlled by a ASCII File Format
specification screen. The layout of the source file must be defined using the screen before the file can be
processed.
The functionality of the specification is similar for each data type. The specific contents of the screen
changes with the selected File Format (Column or Delimited) and data type. The general features associated
with the Column Format screen are described below:
Data Items...
End - This item specifies the ending position of the displayed (selected) data item in the source file. The
position is described as the number of characters from the left of the file. The position of the first character
is one (1). If an item is not contained in the source file, its start and end values should be empty.
File Format - These items indicate the basic format of the data in the source file. Click on the button
adjacent to the Column label to indicate a column format file. Column format refers to a file where the data
is presented in uniform columns and rows. Each column is associated with a specific data field, and each row
is associated with an individual record.
338
Item - This item displays the currently selected data item. Once selected, the field assignment can be made.
To select an item, click on it in the list below the Item data box.
Item List - Displays the various GASWorkS data items associated with the date type being imported. In the
list, adjacent to each data item, is the column assignment information. Click on an item name to display its
values in the Item, Start, and End data fields. Select the Enter command button to save the specification
values to the item list.
Start - This item specifies the starting position of the displayed (selected) data item in the source file. The
position is described as the number of characters from the left of the file. The position of the first character
is one (1). If an item is not contained in the source file, its start and end values should be empty.
Command Buttons...
Cancel - Select this command button to close the screen without performing the translation.
Clear All Settings - Select this command button to remove all column specification information shown in
the Item List.
Continue - Select this command button to close the screen and proceed with the translation routine.
Enter - Select this command button to save the current item and column assignment values.
Usage Notes...
! The Start and End fields designate the beginning and ending character positions of the various data items.
The end position must always be equal to or greater than the start position. If a data item is not used, leave
the Start and End values empty.
! The item list appearing directly below the Items and Assignment data fields, displays the GASWorkS data
items associated with the data type being processed, along with their column assignments. If a data item is
assigned a column, the start and end positions will appear to the right of the item's name, separated by a
comma (","). Unassigned items appear by themselves.
! The import files can contain other non-related data, however no more than 50 individual columns may be
present in the import record.
! Generally, customer data should be imported after the piping system has been created.
! When using the merge routine with customer data, the Link ID number must be assigned.
339
! After importing a customer file, when the model is first opened in the GDI, a message will appear asking
whether to create the “service” line assignments. Select the Yes command button to automatically create the
service lines. If the pipe assignments are not included in the imported data, the customers and service lines
will be assigned and attached to the geographically closest pipe. If the pipe assignments are included in the
imported data, the customers and service lines will be assigned and attached to the specified pipes. When
a service line is created, where possible, the location of the connection to the assigned pipe (main) is placed
at a point that would cause the service line to be perpendicular from the pipe to the center of the customer
location. After the customer assignments have been made and corrected, remember to update the model loads
by executing the Update External Loads routine found in the Customer Data submenu of the Utilities menu
list.
!When importing customer data, the negative of the imported load value is saved in the customer data. That
is, if the value contained in the source file is positive, the value saved in the target file will be negative.
Therefore, load values that represent demands, should be positive in the source file. Load values that
represent supplies, should be negative in the source file.
! Generally, it is not necessary to import node data. However if node data is to be imported, the node data
should be imported before the pipe data.
! When importing or merging node data, a unique name (or number) must be included for each record.
! When importing pipe data, the From Node and To Node data fields must be assigned.
! When using the merge routine with pipe data, the Link ID number must be assigned.
! The node data must be imported before the pipe data is imported. If the associated node data file does not
already exist, an error message will appear.
340
Importing Delimited Format ASCII Files...

Character delimited (for example, comma separated) format ASCII files can be used to import or merge
customer, pipe, and node data into a GASWorkS model. The import or merge routine for these type files is
controlled by a ASCII File Format specification screen. The layout of the source file must be defined using
the screen before the file can be processed.
The functionality of the screen is similar for each data type. The specific contents of the screen changes with
the selected File Format (Column or Delimited) and data type. The general features associated with the
Delimited Format screen are described below:
Data Items...
Delimiter - This item specifies the character used to separate the individual items in the data list. A comma
is most commonly used, however most any unique character can be used. Enter the appropriate character by
typing it in the edit box.
Field - This item specifies the field number for the displayed data item. The field number represents the data
item's position in the import list. The first item in the import list is associated with field number one (1).
341
File Format - These items indicate the basic format of the data in the source file. Click on the button
adjacent to the Delimited label to indicate a delimited format file. Delimited format refers to a file where
the data is presented in individual lists containing data items separated by a delimiter (character). Each row
contains one list, and each list represents the data associated with an individual record.
Item - This item displays the currently selected data item. Once selected, the field assignment can be made.
To select an item, click on it in the list below the Item data box.
Item List - Displays the various GASWorkS data items associated with the date type being imported. In the
list, adjacent to each data item, is the field assignment information. Click on an item name to display its
values in the Item, and Field data fields. Select the Enter command button to save the specification values
to the item list.
Command Buttons...
Clear All Settings - Select this command button to remove all field specification information shown in the
Item List.
Enter - Select this command button to save the current item and field assignment.
Usage Notes...
! The Field value designates the position in the import data list corresponding to the displayed data item.
If a data item is not used, leave the Field value empty.
!When using delimited files, if a space is used as the delimiter, ensure that extra spaces are not included in
any of the data fields.
! The item list appearing directly below the Items and Assignment data fields, displays the GASWorkS data
items associated with the data type being processed, along with their field assignments. If a data item is
assigned a field, the assigned value will appear to the right of the item's name. Unassigned items appear by
themselves.
! The import files can contain other non-related data, however no more than 50 individual columns may be
present in the import record.
! Generally, customer data should be imported after the piping system has been created.
342
a service line is created, where possible, the location of the connection to the assigned pipe is placed at a
point that would cause the service line to be perpendicular from the pipe (main) to the center of the customer
location. After the customer assignments have been made and corrected, remember to update the model loads
by executing the Update External Loads routine found in the Customer Data submenu of the Utilities menu
list.
343
Importing Customer X-Y Files...

A Customer X-Y file is an ASCII format file which contains the X-Y coordinates for each customer location.
Each line in the file must contain an identification number, address, or alias value followed by the X
coordinate value, then the Y coordinate value. The identifier and coordinate values must be separated by a
comma (","). The match item is specified using the Customer X-Y Specification dialog box. The contents
of the box are described below:
Data Items...
Match On Which Data Item - The selected option indicates which data item to attempt to match customers
by when merging. Or, when importing (not merging), the item indicates which identifying item is included
in the source file. Select the appropriate option by clicking on the adjacent button.
Command Buttons...
Usage Notes...
! The GASWorkS GDI supports coordinate values in the range from 0 to 9,999,999. If the X-Y file contains
coordinate values outside this range, they may be modified using the "Shift X-Y" routine after the file has
been imported.
344
! The import process reads each record in the X-Y file and will try to find a matching customer in the target
file. If a match is found, the coordinate values are assigned to the customer. The next time the model is
displayed in the GDI after importing the customer coordinates, the "service line" coordinates will be created.
! When merge is used, the translation routine will try to find an existing customer record which matches the
specified match item. If a match is found, the coordinate values for the matching record will be replaced with
those from the source file. The service line locations will be set to 0,0 if a match is found - this ensures that
the lines will be properly located in case that customer location has moved. If a match is not found, a new
customer feature will be added to the target file.
! When the model is opened in the GDI after the translation, a message will appear asking whether to create
the “service” line assignments. Select the Yes command button to automatically create the service lines. The
customers and service lines will be assigned and attached to the geographically closest pipe. When a service
line is created, where possible, the location of the connection to the assigned pipe is placed at a point that
would cause the service line to be perpendicular from the main to the center of the customer location. After
the customer assignments have been made and corrected, remember to update the model loads by executing
the Update External Loads routine found in the Customer Data submenu of the Utilities menu list.
! The Customer ID Number refers to the customer Link ID data item.
345
Importing dBASE Format Files...

When importing a dBASE file, GASWorkS requires the User to specify the layout of the import file. The file
definition is described using the Database Specification screen.
The functionality of the screen is similar for each data type. The specific contents of the screen changes with
the data type. The general features associated with the screen are described below:
Data Items...
Available Fields - This item specifies the individual data fields found in the selected source file. Double
click a field to assign it to the currently selected (highlighted) data item.
Customer/Node/Pipe Items - This item contains a list of the GASWorkS data items and their current field
assignments. To assign a field to an item, first select (highlight) the data item in the Items list, then assign
the field by double clicking on the desired field in the Available Fields list. To un-assign an item, double
click on it in the Items list.
Command Buttons...
Clear - Select this command button to clear all field assignments.
346
Usage Notes...
! GASWorkS expects the source file to be a dBASE III Plus format, however other version dBASE files,
and files created by other dBASE compatible applications may also be acceptable.
! The import files can contain other non-related data, however no more than 50 individual data fields may
be present in the source file.
! Generally customer data should be imported after the piping system has been created.
a service line is created, where possible, the location of the connection to the assigned pipe is placed at a
point that would cause the service line to be perpendicular from the main to the center of the customer
location. After the customer assignments have been made and corrected, remember to update the model
loads, by executing the Update External Loads routine found in the Customer Data submenu of the Utilities
menu list.
347
Importing DXF Files...

When importing a DXF file, GASWorkS requires the User to specify certain information about the import
file. The file definition is specified using the DXF Import Specification screen. The features associated with
Pipe Settings Tab...
Arc Resolution - This item specifies the resolution to use when processing an arc from the source file. If the
value is greater than zero (0), arc entities will be converted to polyline type pipes with a vertex placed
according to the resolution value. Type a value in the edit box or select one from the list. The value is
expressed in terms of the degrees of arc.
348
Assign Entity Handle To Pipe Identification Number - This item specifies whether the entity handles in
the drawing are assigned to the Link ID field for pipes processed during the import routine. Select (check)
the item to use entity handles as Link ID numbers.
Attribute Valve Layer - This item indicates whether attribute valves are to be processed during the import
routine. If symbols (blocks) indicating the location of valves is present in the drawing, select the associated
layer from the list. If a layer is assigned, attribute valves will be processed during the import routine. If no
layer is assigned, attribute valves will be ignored.
Fuzzy Tolerance - This item specifies the fuzzy tolerance to use when processing the source file. Line ends
that fall within the fuzzy tolerance, are snapped together. Type a value in the edit box or select one from the
list. The value is expressed in terms of the specified model coordinate units.
Pipe Layers - This item lists Pipe Size and Layer assignments. To make an assignment - under the Pipe Size
column, click on a data cell. A list of pipe sizes will be displayed, select a value from the list. Click the
adjacent data cell under the Layer Assignment column. A list of available drawing layers will be displayed,
select a value from the list.
Pipe Length Units - This item specifies the dimensional units for the imported pipes. It is used to make the
appropriate conversion between pipe lengths, drawing coordinate units, and model coordinate units. Select
349
Other Settings Tab...
Allow Multiple Customers At Same Location - This item specifies whether multiple customers can be
located at the same location. When selected (checked), if multiple customers are found at the same location
in the source (drawing) file, they will be “stacked” in the model at the same location. If the item is not
selected (unchecked), only one customer (the first customer encountered) will be allowed within the fuzzy
tolerance of a given location
350
Assign Text Value To Customer identification Number - If the Customer Entity Type is a text type entity,
this item specifies whether the entity value will be assigned as the Link ID number for the imported customer
features. Select (check) the item to assign the text values as the Link ID.
Customer Entity Type - This item specifies the entity type used to indicate the customer locations in the
drawing. Select the appropriate type from the list.
Customer Layer - This item indicates whether customers are to be processed during the import routine. If
customer locations are present in the drawing, select the associated layer from the list. If a layer is assigned,
customers will be processed during the import routine. If no layer is assigned, customers will be ignored.
Drawing Coordinate Units - This item specifies the dimensional units for the coordinate values in the
source (drawing) file. It is used to make the appropriate conversion between pipe lengths, drawing coordinate
units, and model coordinate units. Select a value from the list.
Model Coordinate Units - This item specifies the dimensional units for the coordinate values in the target
(model) file. It is used to make the appropriate conversion between pipe lengths, drawing coordinate units,
and model coordinate units. Select a value from the list.
Origin Shift - These two items specify the amount to shift the coordinate values during the import process.
The X value indicates the horizontal (east-west) amount to shift the coordinates. The Y value indicates the
vertical (north-south) amount to shift the coordinates. The values are expressed in terms of the drawing
coordinate units. Type a value in the edit boxes.
Scale Factor - Indicates a value to scale the imported coordinate values by. Not used if the drawing
dimensional units are specified.
User Text Layer - This item indicates whether text values will be imported as “User Text” during the import
routine. If text values are present in the drawing, and it is desired to import these values as GASWorkS User
Text, select the associated layer from the list. If a layer is assigned, the text contained on the assigned layer
will be processed as User Text during the import routine. If no layer is assigned, text values will be ignored.
Command Buttons...
Retrieve Specification - Select this command button to retrieve a previously saved set of specification
values. When this button is selected, the File Specification screen will appear. Enter or Select an appropriate
file name. Select the Continue command button to apply the saved settings and return to the DXF Import
screen.
351
Save Specification - Select this command button to save the current specification values to a file for use at
a later time. When this button is selected, the File Specification screen will appear. Enter or Select an
appropriate file name. Select the Continue command button to save the current settings and return to the DXF
Import screen.
Set Default Values - Select this command button to open the Default Data screen. Select the Close command
button to return to the DXF Import screen.
Usage Notes...
! The various Layer Assignment items designate the assigned layer in the source file. If a data item is not
used, leave the Layer Assignment value empty.
! GASWorkS expects the source file to be an AutoCAD (Release 2000 or older) Drawing Interchange File
format, however newer version files, and files created by other DXF compatible applications may also be
acceptable.
! The DXF translation routine allows Drawing Interchange Files created by various CAD or other graphics
packages to be used to create a GASWorkS model. A complete model is created when the routine is used,
including a Header, Customer (if included), Node, and Pipe data file.
! GASWorkS constructs the new model by using the linear graphic features on the "Pipe" layers as the pipes
in the GASWorkS model. A pipe is created for each line, polyline, or arc feature found on the specify "Pipe"
layers. The geographic/scaled length value of the original feature is used as the length for the new pipe
element. The specified pipe size is assigned to pipes processed from the associated layer.
! A node is placed at the beginning and end of each pipe (linear feature).
! The translation routine cannot sense your intentions, the drawing used to create the DXF should accurately
reflect the intended topology (connectivity) of the model to be created. The following table lists some
common mistakes made when working with DXF files:
352
Problem Comments
Lines are not broken at Nodes are only placed at the beginning and end of the linear entities
intersections in the drawing. found on the designated Pipe layers. Often a long single unbroken
line is drawn along several blocks of a street. The laterals coming off
this line will create nodes at their ends and will appear that there is
a node at the intersection, however because the line being connected
to is not broken at the intersections, no nodes are placed at the lateral
connections. Remedy this problem by breaking all lines at all
intersections where a connection to another line is intended.
Nodes appear at locations other This often occurs because multi-segment lines are created using a
than pipe intersections. combination of several line and/or arc segments. These type of lines
should be constructed of polyline segments to accurately reflect the
model connectivity. To remedy this problem convert and join the
individual line segments into a single multi-segment polyline which
is continuous between the intended pipe ends.
Many nodes appear around valve This occurs because the symbol is depicted by a small “drawing” of
and regulator symbols. the symbol and the line work representing the symbol is contained on
the designated Pipe layer. To remedy the problem use “blocks” to
depict the symbols, and/or move the line work representing the
symbols to a separate (unique and individual) layer.
The length of pipes in the This occurs when using AutoCAD and architectural units are used in
GASWorkS model are twelve the original drawing. When a DXF file is created from a drawing with
times longer than they were in the these units, the resulting coordinate values are represented in inches
original drawing. (DXF from instead of the standard feet units. To remedy this problem, change the
AutoCAD) drawing units to engineering and rescale the drawing. Or, set the
appropriate coordinate units when importing the file. Or, rescale the
model in GASWorkS after it has been imported - use a scale factor of
.08333 (1/12).
The coordinate values in the This occurs when creating a DXF file from MicroStation.
GASWorkS model are different MicroStation does not internally store the graphical representation of
than the original drawing. (DXF the drawing in true coordinates, but uses positional units to represent
from MicroStation) the drawing. When the DXF is created, the positional units are
reported in the file as opposed to the true coordinates (working units).
To remedy this problem, set the Translation Units to Master when
exporting (creating) the DXF from MicroStation. Or, rescale the
model in GASWorkS after its has been imported.
353
! The GASWorkS GDI provides tools for repairing many of the problems listed in the previous table.
However, it is best to correct the original drawing and recreate the DXF so that the modifications will not
need to be done again, if the drawing is ever re-imported.
! The GASWorkS GDI supports coordinates in the range from 0 to 9,999,999. If the DXF file contains
coordinates outside this range, they may be modified using the "Shift X-Y" routine after the file has been
imported. However, it is best to correct the original drawing and recreate the DXF so that the modifications
will not need to be done again, if the drawing is ever re-imported.
! Do not leave empty rows between entries in the Pipe Layers list.
! Do not included extraneous data on the layers selected for importing. GASWorkS does not know the
difference between a line intended to represent a pipe, and line intended to represent a street right-of-way.
Or, a block representing a customer location and a block representing a fire hydrant. Imported layers should
contain only the graphics representing the features for which they have been selected.
! After importing, the “Flag Unbroken Intersections” GDI command can be used to find and mark locations
where the header pipe may not be broken (tapped) at a lateral intersection. Once flagged, the locations can
be reviewed and manually corrected using the “Tap A Pipe” GDI command, or automatically corrected using
the “Break Flagged Intersection” GDI command
354
Importing Shape Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for importing GIS files meeting the shape (SHP) file format of Environmental
Systems Research Institute (ESRI). The files may be created by an ESRI GIS package, or by another package
supporting the SHP file format.
An advantage of using the SHP file format is that the “file” contains both graphic and attribute information.
Actually a “SHP” file consists of at least three separate files. A shape file which ends in a “.shp” extension -
this file contains the geographic information. A data file which ends in a “.dbf” extension - this file contains
the attribute data in a dBASE III format. An index file which ends in an “.shx” extension - this file contains
relationship information that links the geographic and attribute data.
GASWorkS supports shape files containing node, pipe, customer, and attribute valve data. A complete
GASWorkS model can be created from just a pipe file. Or, if node data is available, it can be included to
create a more comprehensive model - however generally a node file is not required or desired.
The file contents of the attribute data file must be defined before the file can be imported. During the import
process, the appropriate dBASE definition screen will be displayed. When the screen appears, enter the
appropriate definition, then select the Continue command button to complete the translation.
The translations are performed as follows:
Import Type Translation Description

Customer The customer locations are taken from the geographic data file (SHP file). After
the customer locations have been created, the attribute data is read from the
attribute file (DBF file). See the Importing dBASE Customer Files section for
information on specifying the attribute data file definition and additional
considerations.
When the merge option is selected, matching between the existing model and
the new data is performed geographically. If an existing customer is found
within the “fuzzy” tolerance of a new customer’s X-Y location, a match is
assumed.
The first time that the GDI is opened after the customer file is imported, a
prompt will appear asking whether to automatically assign the customers. Enter
an appropriate response. See the dBASE import usage notes for additional
information on this process.
Generally the customer data should be imported after the pipe data has been
created.
355
Import Type Translation Description
Node The node locations are taken from the geographic data file (SHP file). After the
node locations have been created, the attribute data is read from the attribute file
(DBF file). See the Importing dBASE Node Files section for information on
specifying the attribute data file definition and additional considerations. If a
node shape file is to be imported, perform the import prior to importing the pipe
file.
the new data is performed geographically. If an existing node is found within
the “fuzzy” tolerance of a new node’s X-Y location, a match is assumed.
Pipe The pipe locations are taken from the geographic data file (SHP file). After the
pipe locations have been created, the attribute data is read from the attribute file
(DBF file). See the Importing dBASE Pipe Files section for information on
specifying the attribute data file definition and additional considerations. If a
node shape file is to be imported, perform the import prior to importing the pipe
file.
the new data is performed geographically. If an existing pipe’s From and To
Node is found within the “fuzzy” tolerance of a new pipe’s node X-Y locations,
a match is assumed.
Valve (Attribute) The valve locations are taken from the geographic data file (SHP file). After the
valve locations have been created, the attribute data is read from the attribute
file (DBF file).
the new data is performed geographically. If an existing valve is found within
the “fuzzy” tolerance of a new valve’s X-Y locations, a match is assumed.
After importing the file, use the “Assign Attribute Valves” command in the GDI
Command List to link the valves to their associated mains.
356
Importing Node X-Y Files...

A Node X-Y file is an ASCII format file which contains the X-Y coordinates for each node. Each line in the
file must contain a node name value followed by the X coordinate value, then the Y coordinate value. The
node name and coordinate values must be separated by a comma (",").
The GASWorkS GDI supports coordinate values in the range from 0 to 9,999,999. If the X-Y file contains
coordinate values outside this range, they may be modified using the "Shift X-Y" routine after the file has
been imported.
When merge is used, the import process reads each record in the X-Y file and will try to find a matching node
name in the target GASWorkS file. If a match is found, the coordinate values are assigned to the node. If a
match is not found, a new node feature will be added to the target file.
Importing Stoner PD & XY Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for importing Stoner & Associates "PD" & “XY” format files. The files may
be created by a Stoner modeling package, or by another package supporting the PD file format. The routine
is based on our best knowledge of the Stoner files.
There is some variation in the PD file format, depending on the Stoner program version that created the file.
Some files may or may not import correctly.
Not all options supported by the Stoner modeling software are supported by GASWorkS - messages may
appear during the import warning of unsupported options. After import, you will need to correct any
inconsistencies resulting from unsupported options before attempting to solve the imported model.
If an XY file is detected during the import routine, the graphical data contained in the XY file will be
assigned to the pipes and nodes imported from the PD file.
Importing XLS Format Files...

When importing a XLS format file, GASWorkS requires the User to specify the layout of the import file. The
file definition is described using the Database Specification screen. The screen contents and functionality
are the same as those described in the Importing dBASE Format Files. Please see that section for information
on using the screen.
GASWorkS expects the source file to be in a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 Worksheet.
357
358
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Export Routines
EXPORT ROUTINES
359

Exporting Files...
This section of the manual provides descriptions and requirements for exporting data from GASWorkS into
a supported file format. Where an additional data screen is used to further define the export specifications,
it will be described in the appropriate section. The On-Line Help system contains a variety of step by step
examples of exporting various data files.
Exporting ASCII Customer Files...

Individual customer files can be exported to an ASCII customer file. When exporting an ASCII Customer
file, a single comma delimited ASCII text file will be created.
The basic customer model data is always included in the exported file. If an attribute file is attached, the
items contained in the attribute file will also be included in the exported file.
A description of the various items included in the exported file are described in the following tables. Each
item is separated by a comma (","). Each line of the file represents one record from the customer data file.
String (character) values are enclosed between double quotes.
ASCII Customer File Description - Model Data

Field # Field Description
1 Internal identification number of the customer
2 Link identification number of the customer
3 Link identification number of the supplying pipe (main)
4 Record number in the pipe data file of the supplying pipe (main)
5 Load assignment indicator...
BOTH = Assigned (one-half) to both of the pipe’s nodes
FROM = Assigned to the pipe’s From Node
NEITHER = Not assigned
TO = Assigned to the pipe’s To Node
DIV-WET<76 = Diversified, wet central pre 1976 type
DIV-WET>77 = Diversified, wet central post 1976 type
361
ASCII Customer File Description - Model Data
DIV-NON_OLD = Diversified, non-central older construction type
DIV-NON_NEW = Diversified, non-central newer construction type
6 Per Unit Load
7 Per Unit Load dimensional units
8 Unit Count
9 Load Status...
ON = Load is turned on
OFF = Load is turned off
10 X (horizontal) coordinates of the customer’s location
11 Y (vertical) coordinates of the customer’s location
12 X (horizontal) coordinates of the service line’s connection to the main
13 Y (vertical) coordinates of the service line’s connection to the main
14 Attribute connection status...
NO = Customer is not linked to the attribute file (if present)
YES = Customer is linked to the attribute file (if present)
15... Attribute data items. If an attribute file is attached and turned on, and the link connection status
is YES, the contents of the attribute file associated with the customer, will be included in the
export file. The content of the attribute section varies according to the content of the attached
attribute file.
362
Exporting ASCII Node Files...

Individual node files can be exported to an ASCII node file. When exporting an ASCII Node file, a single
comma delimited ASCII text file will be created.
item is separated by a comma (","). Each line of the file represents one record from the node data file. String
(character) values are enclosed between double quotes.
ASCII Node File Description

1 Node name
2 Pressure
3 Pressure dimensional units
4 Pressure known indicator...
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
5 Base Load - this item represents the unadjusted base load for the node.
6 Base Load Known indicator...
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
7 Base Load adjustment flag...
NO = Do not adjust by Design Factor
YES = Adjust by Design Factor
8 Base Load Status...
OFF = The base load is turned off
ON = The base load value is turned on
9 External Load - this item represents the unadjusted external load for the node.
363
10 External Load adjustment flag...
11 External Load Status...
12 Total Load - represents the total adjusted load for the node.
13 Load dimensional units
14 Average flowing temperature
15 Average flowing temperature dimensional units
16 Temperature Known indicator...
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
17 Elevation
18 Elevation dimensional units
19 Atmospheric Pressure
20 Atmospheric Pressure dimensional units
21 Specific Gravity
22 Viscosity
23 Viscosity dimensional units
24 Heating Value
25 Heating Value dimensional units
26 Specific Heat Ratio
364
27 Gas Properties Known indicator...
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
28 X (east-west) node location
29 Y (north-south) node location
365
Exporting ASCII Pipe Files...

Individual pipe files can be exported to an ASCII pipe file. When exporting an ASCII Pipe file, a single
comma delimited ASCII text file will be created.
item is separated by a comma (","). Each line of the file represents one record from the pipe data file. String
(character) values are enclosed between double quotes.
Items 1-15 are the same for all element types, items 16 and higher vary according to element type.
Pipe Section Description

1 Internal identification number of the segment
2 Link identification number of the segment
3 From Node name
4 To Node name
5 Hydraulic Type...
C = Compressor
F = Fitting
P = Pipe
R = Regulator
V = Valve
W = Well
6 Status
OFF = Segment is turned off
ON = Segment is turned on
7 Flow (a negative value indicates that the flow direction is from the To Node to the From
Node)
8 Flow dimensional units
9 Maximum Velocity - not be reported for non-pipe element types
366
10 Velocity dimensional units
11 Linear Pressure Drop
12 Linear Pressure Drop dimensional units
13 Compressibility factor
14 Facility Type
15 Attribute connection status...
NO = Segment is not linked to the attribute file (if present)
YES = Segment is linked to the attribute file (if present)
Compressor Type Element...
16 Size/Type code
17 Set Pressure value
18 Set Pressure dimensional units
19 Mechanical efficiency
Fitting Type Element...

16 Flow Equation name
17 Size/Type code
18 Inside diameter
19 Inside wall roughness
20 Diameter and roughness dimensional units
21 Length
22 Length dimensional units
23 Efficiency
24 Efficiency dimensional units
367
Pipe Type Element...
16 Flow Equation name
17 Size/Type code
18 Inside diameter
19 Inside wall roughness
20 Diameter and roughness dimensional units
21 Length
22 Length dimensional units
23 Efficiency
24 Efficiency dimensional units
25 Allow size calculation indicator...
NO = Do not allow sizing of this segment
YES = Allow the segment to be sized
26 Attached Fitting Count
27 Equivalent Length of the attached fittings
28 Attached Customer Count
Regulator Type Element...
16 Size/Type code
17 Set Pressure value
18 Set Pressure dimensional units
Valve Type Element...

16 Size/Type code
17 Open Position, expressed as a percentage of full open
368
Well Type Element...
18 Size/Type code
19 Equation Coefficient
20 Equation Exponent
Attribute Data...
... Attribute data items. If an attribute file is attached and turned on, and the link connection status
is YES, the contents of the attribute file associated with the segment, will be included in the
export file. The content of the attribute section varies according to the content of the attached
attribute file.
369
Exporting dBASE Customer Files...

Individual customer files can be exported to a dBASE customer file. When exporting to a dBASE Customer
file, a single dBASE III (3.0) database file will be created.
The basic customer model data is always included in the exported file. If an attribute file is attached, the
items contained in the attribute file will also be included in the exported file.
record in the database represents one record from the customer data file.
dBASE Customer File Description - Common Section

Field # Field Name Contents Field Type
1 GW_ID Internal identification number of the customer L
LINK_ID Link identification number of the customer C,20
2 PIPE_ID Link identification of the assigned supply pipe (main) C,20
PIPE_NO Record number in the pipe data file of the assigned supply L
pipe (main)
3 NODE_ASGN Load assignment indicator... C,11
BOTH = Assigned (one-half) to both of the pipe’s nodes
FROM = Assigned to the pipe’s From Node
NEITHER = Not assigned
TO = Assigned to the pipe’s To Node
DIV-WET<76 = Diversified, wet central pre 1976 type
DIV-WET>77 = Diversified, wet central post 1976 type
DIV-NON_OLD = Diversified, non-central older
construction type
DIV-NON_NEW = Diversified, non-central newer
construction type
6 TOT_LOAD Per Unit Load S
7 TQ_UNIT Per Unit Load dimensional units C,10
370
dBASE Customer File Description - Common Section
8 COUNT Unit Count I
9 STATUS Load Status... C,3
ON = Load is turned on
OFF = Load is turned off
10 X_COORD X (east-west) location of the customer D
11 Y_COORD Y (north-south) location of the customer D
12 SX_COORD X (east-west) location of the service line connection to the D
main
13 SY_COORD Y (north-south) location of the service line connection to D
the main
14 LINK_OK Attribute connection status.. C,3
NO = Customer is not linked to the attribute file (if
present)
YES = Customer is linked to the attribute file (if present)
15... Varies Attribute data items. If an attribute file is attached and Varies
turned on, and the link connection status is YES, the
contents of the attribute file associated with the customer,
will be included in the export file. The content of the
attribute section varies according to the content of the
attached attribute file.
Field Type Definitions
C,X = Character type, X characters wide
D = Double precision number, maximum 15 digits
I = Integer
L = Long integer
S = Single precision number, maximum 7 digits
371
Exporting dBASE Node Files...

Individual node files can be exported to a dBASE customer file. When exporting to a dBASE Customer file,
a single dBASE III (3.0) database file will be created.
record in the database represents one record from the node
data file.
dBASE Node File Description

1 NODENAME The node's name C,40
2 PRESSURE Pressure value S
3 P_UNIT Pressure dimensional units C,10
4 PKNOWN Pressure Known indicator... C,3
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
5 BASE_LOAD Base Load - this item represents the unadjusted base S
load for the node.
6 BASE_KNOWN Base Load Known indicator... C,3
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
7 BASE_DF Base Load adjustment flag... C,3
8 BASE_STAT Base Load Status... C,3
9 EXT_LOAD External Load - this item represents the unadjusted S
external base load for the node
372
10 EXT_DF External Load adjustment flag... C,3
11 EXT_STAT External Load status... C,3
12 TOT_ADJ_Q Total Load - represents the total adjusted load for the S
node.
13 Q_UNIT Load dimensional units C,10
14 TEMP Average flowing temperature S

15 T_UNIT Temperature dimensional units C,10
16 T_KNOWN Temperature Known indicator... C,3
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
17 ELEVATION Elevation value S
18 Z_UNIT Elevation dimensional units C,10
19 P_ATM Atmospheric Pressure value S
20 PA_UNIT Atmospheric Pressure dimensional units C,10
21 SG Specific Gravity S
22 VISCOSITY Viscosity S
23 V_UNIT Viscosity dimensional units C,10
24 HV Heating Value S
25 HV_UNIT Heating Value dimensional units C,10
26 S_HEAT Specific Heat Ratio S
373
27 GP_KNOWN Gas Properties Known indicator... C,3
NO = Unknown
YES = Known
28 X_COORD X (east-west) node location D
29 Y_COORD Y(north-south) node location D
I = Integer
374
Exporting dBASE Pipe Files...

Individual pipe files can be exported to a dBASE pipe file. When exporting to a dBASE pipe file, a single
dBASE III (3.0) database file will be created.
The basic pipe model data is always included in the exported file. If an attribute file is attached, the items
contained in the attribute file will also be included in the exported file.
record in the database represents one record from the pipe data file.
dBASE Pipe File Description

1 GW_ID Internal identification number for the segment L
2 LINK_ID Link identification number for the segment C,20
3 FROM_NODE Name of the segment's From Node C,40
4 TO_NODE Name of the segment's To Node C,40
5 HYD_TYPE Indicates the hydraulic type C,1
C = Compressor
F = Fitting
P = Pipe
R = Regulator
V = Valve
W = Well
6 STATUS Operational Status C,3
OFF = Segment is turned off
ON = Segment is turned on
7 FLOW Flow (a negative value indicates that the flow direction is S
from the To Node to the From Node)
8 Q_UNIT Flow rate dimensional units C,10
375
9 VELOCITY Maximum Velocity - not be reported for non-pipe element S
types
10 VEL_UNIT Velocity dimensional units C,10
11 DP Linear Pressure Drop S
12 P_UNIT Linear Pressure Drop dimensional units C,10
13 Z_FACTOR Compressibility Factor S
14 FACILITY Facility Type C,20
15 LINK_OK Attribute connection status... C,3
NO = Segment is not linked to the attribute file (if present)
YES = Segment is linked to the attribute file (if present)
16 EQUATION Flow Equation name (Pipe & Fitting types only) C,20
17 SIZE_TYPE Size/Type code C,20
18 DIAMETER Inside diameter value (Pipe & Fitting types only) S
19 ROUGHNESS Internal pipe wall roughness value (Pipe & Fitting types S
only)
20 D_UNIT Diameter dimensional units (Pipe & Fitting types only) C,10
21 LENGTH Length value (Pipe & Fitting types only) S
Set Pressure value (Compressor & Regulator types only)
Position (Valve type only)
Equation Coefficient (Well type only)
22 L_UNIT Length dimensional units (Pipe & Fitting types only) C,10
Set Pressure dimensional units (Compressor & Regulator
types only)
23 EFFICIENCY Efficiency value (Compressor, Pipe & Fitting types only) S
Equation Exponent (Well type only)
24 E_UNIT Efficiency dimensional units (Compressor, Pipe & Fitting C,10
types only)
376
25 SIZE_OK Allow size calculation indicator... C,3
NO = Do not allow sizing of this segment
YES = Allow sizing of this segment
26 FITTINGS Attached Fitting Count I
27 EQ_LENGTH Equivalent Length of the attached fittings S
27 CUSTOMERS Attached Customer Count I
... Varies Attribute data items. If an attribute file is attached and Varies
turned on, and the link connection status is YES, the
contents of the attribute file associated with the pipe, will
be included in the export file. The content of the attribute
section varies according to the content of the attached
attribute file.
I = Integer
L = Long integer
377
Exporting DXF Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for creating a DXF file. The contents of the exported file can be specified by
the User. The export settings are specified using the DXF Export Options screen. The contents of the screen
are described below:
Data Items...
Customer Items - When selected, the Customer Items list will be enabled. Select the items to be included
in the DXF by clicking on the desired item until the adjacent box is checked. To unselect an item, click on
the item until the adjacent box is empty. Only the selected items will be included to the DXF file.
Customer Symbol Size - This item specifies the size of customer symbols in the DXF file. Customer
symbols are represented in the DXF file by a block entity. The Customer Symbol Size value specifies the X
and Y scale for the block entity. Enter the desired value by typing it in the data field. The value is expressed
in model coordinate units.
Data Text Size - Specifies the size of the data text values in the DXF file. This value only applies to text
values derived from pipe, node, or customer data values. It does not change the size of User Text features.
Enter the desired value by typing it in the data field. The value is expressed in model coordinate units.
378
Dimensional Units - When selected, this item indicates that variable identifiers are to be included in the
DXF file. For example, if selected, pressure values will be followed by their assigned pressure unit (for
example "Psi"). To select this option, click in the adjacent box until a mark appears. To unselect this option,
click in the adjacent box until the box is empty.
Include Extended Entity Data - When selected, this item indicates that certain extended entity data are to
be included in the DXF file. To select this option, click in the adjacent box until a mark appears. To unselect
this option, click in the adjacent box until the box is empty. See the Usage Notes for additional details on this
option.
Node Items - When selected, the Node Items list will be enabled. Select the data items to be included in the
DXF by clicking on the desired item until the adjacent box is checked. To unselect an item, click on the item
until the adjacent box is empty. Only the selected items will be included to the DXF file.
Node Size - This item specifies the size of node symbols in the DXF file. Node symbols are represented in
the DXF file by a block entity. The Node Size value specifies the X and Y scale for the block entity. Enter
the desired value by typing it in the data field. The value is expressed in model coordinate units.
Pipe Items - When selected, the Pipe Items list will be enabled. Select the data items to be included in the
DXF by clicking on the desired item until the adjacent box is checked. To unselect an item, click on the item
until the adjacent box is empty. Only the selected items will be included to the DXF file.
User Text - When selected, this item indicates that the User Text Features are to be included in the DXF file.
To select this option, click in the adjacent box until a mark appears. To unselect this option, click in the
adjacent box until the box is empty.
Variable Identifiers - When selected, this item indicates that variable identifiers are to be included in the
DXF file. For example, if selected, the pressure values will be preceded by the string "P =". To select this
option, click in the adjacent box until a mark appears. To unselect this option, click in the adjacent box until
the box is empty.
Command Button...
Continue - Select this command button to close the screen, and proceed with the translation.
Usage Notes...
! The DXF export routine creates a Drawing Interchange Format file. Once created, the file can be imported
into or used directly with a variety of CAD or graphics packages.
379
! GASWorkS attempts to match the colors found in the model with colors supported in the DXF file. Please
be aware that matching is not always possible. Color values may need to be adjusted after the file has been
opened in its destination application.
! The contents of the exported file are generally as described in the following table.
DXF Export File Description

Section Name Contents
Header Point size and mode definitions.
Tables Layer Definitions for the various data layers. Node features are placed on the
GWNODE layer. Node name text is placed on the GWNODETX layer. Pipe features
are placed on the GWPIPE layer. And the Pipe Size text is placed on the
GWPIPETX layer. Other layers may be present.
Block definition for node and customer symbols.
Application definition for GW90DATA if the Include Extended Entities option was
selected.
Entities Definitions for the node point and text features.
Definitions for the pipe (line) and text features
Definitions for the customer location and text features
Definitions for the User Text features
! If the destination application does not read the header section of the DXF file, the layer, block, and
application information may not be processed correctly. If this occurs, the imported features may need to be
manually moved to the appropriate layers after importing into the destination application.
! If the Include Extended Entity Data option is selected, an application named “GW90DATA" will be
registered in the DXF file. In addition to the required graphic data, each pipe, node, or customer feature will
also include extended entity data which includes the features unique identification. For pipes and customers,
the identifier is the Internal Identification Number. For nodes, the identifier is the Nodename.
! Generally the “Graphics” or “Graphic Symbol” items should always be selected when including customer,
node, or pipe items. For pipes, “Graphics” refers to the graphic lines that show the pipe location. For nodes,
“Graphic Symbol” refers to the block symbols that show the node locations. For customers, “Graphic
Symbol” refers to the block symbols that show the customer locations.
380
! If the “Individual Layers” option in the Pipe Items list is selected, pipes will be grouped on layers
representing each unique pipe size. For example, all pipes with a Size/Type code equal to “2P”, will be
placed on a layer named “GWPIPE_2P” in the DXF file.
! Select the “Attribute Valve” option in the Pipe Items list to include Attribute Valves and their associated
number in the DXF file.
381
Exporting GASWorkS 7.0 Files...

Older versions of the GASWorkS model files may be created using either the Export or Quick Export
routines. When exporting to a GASWorkS 7.0 file, a set of GASWorkS 7.0 compatible model files is created.
Because the older version of GASWorkS does not support all of the data fields supported by the newer
version, some data loss will occur when exporting to the older version.
Attribute data will not be exported when creating the older files.
Exporting Microsoft Access Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for creating a Microsoft Access database from a GASWorkS model. The
routine is only available using the Quick Export routine. When exporting to an Access file, an Access
compatible database (MDB extension) will be created. The file may be opened and manipulated using any
application which supports that format.
The contents of the exported file are similar to the items listed in the dBASE customer, node, and pipe export
sections. Refer to those sections for a description of the data items included in the file.
Exporting Microsoft Excel Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for creating Microsoft Excel spreadsheet files from a GASWorkS model. The
4.0 Worksheet routine is available using either the Export or the Quick Export routines. The 5.0 Workbook
routine is only available using the Quick Export routine.
When exporting to an Excel 4.0 Worksheet using the Export routine, an individual worksheet (XLS
extension) will be created for the associated model feature. When the 4.0 Worksheet is exported using the
Quick Export routine, a set of worksheets is created - one sheet/file for each associated data feature. The files
may be opened and manipulated using any application which supports the Excel 4.0 Worksheet format.
When exporting to an Excel 5.0 Workbook, a single workbook (XLS extension), with multiple worksheets,
will be created. The file may be opened and manipulated using any application which supports the Excel 5.0
Workbook format.
The contents of the exported files are similar to the items listed in the dBASE customer, node, and pipe
export sections. Refer to those sections for a description of the data items included in the file.
382
Exporting Node X-Y Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for creating Node X-Y files. The exported file contains a list of node names
along with their associated X and Y coordinates. The file is in ASCII format, each line represents the data
for one node. The data on each line is separated by commas (",").
Exporting Stoner Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for creating Stoner PD files from a GASWorkS model. The PD file will
contain various chapters including a System, NCE, and Node chapter. If graphics are included in the model,
an XY file will also be created. The XY file will include both a Node and GNode chapter.
Exporting Shape Files...

GASWorkS provides a routine for creating Shape files from a GASWorkS model. The routine is available
using either the Export or the Quick Export routines.
When exporting to a Shape file using the Export routine, an individual set of “shape” files will be created
for the associated model feature. When exported using the Quick Export routine, a group of “shape” file sets
is created - one set for each associated data feature. The files may be opened and manipulated using any
application which supports the ESRI Shape format.
The shape file set includes a geographic file (SHP extension), an attribute database file (DBF extension), and
an index file (SHX extension). The contents of the attribute database files are similar to the items listed in
the dBASE customer, node, and pipe export sections. Refer to those sections for a description of the data
items included in the database file.
383
384
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Miscellaneous
MISCELLANEOUS
385

Using Non-Pipe Elements...

The majority of most piping systems consists of “pipe” type elements. However, there are of course other
elements that can sometimes be found in a piping system - compressors, fittings, regulators, valves, wells.
GASWorkS allows inclusion of these items in its models, in addition to the standard pipe type elements.
Following are some considerations that might be useful when including non-pipe type elements in a model:
Element Type Considerations...

Compressor When a compressor is included in a model, two requirements must be adhered to for
the element to function correctly. The first, is that the compressor element must be
input so that the From Node represents the upstream (suction) side of the compressor,
and the To Node represents the downstream (discharge) side of the compressor. When
the compressor symbol is drawn in the GDI, the large end is the suction side or From
Node end of the compressor. If the element is input backwards, use the Swap Pipe
Ends command to automatically change the element’s input direction.
The second requirement, is that a pressure must known on one side of the compressor.
GASWorkS models a compressor as a “black box”. It does not consider any of the
characteristics (power rating, etc.) of the compressor during the solution. The software
only considers that the element is a compressor and as such knows that the inlet
pressure must be less than the outlet pressure.
If the downstream pressure is set as unknown, the set pressure is used as a check. If
the upstream pressure is greater than the set pressure, the compressor is set to “free
flow”. In this mode the outlet pressure is set equivalent to the inlet pressure.
The compressor operating characteristics are calculated and reported separate of the
solution routine. The characteristics can be viewed using the Summary report, or by
using the Edit/View command and selecting a compressor feature in the GDI.
Fitting For systems where the pipe lengths are generally much longer than the equivalent
lengths of the fittings (distribution, gathering, and transmission type systems), it is not
really beneficial to include the fittings in the model. For systems like these, the
inclusion of fittings unnecessarily complicates the model, while providing only a very
little increase in the model’s accuracy.
For systems where the pipe lengths are generally comparable to the equivalent lengths
of the fittings (fuel piping, meter sets, regulator sets, and yard piping systems), it is
beneficial to include the fittings in the model. For systems like these, the inclusion of
fittings does tend to complicate the model, however in this case their inclusion does
provide a significant increase in the model’s accuracy.
387
Inclusion of fittings can sometimes cause the number of iterations required to solve
the model to increase. This occurs because generally the pressure drop across fittings
is quite small, and elements with small pressure drops tend to take longer to solve or
balance.
An alternative to including fitting hydraulic type elements in a model, is to include the
equivalent length of the fittings in the length of the associated pipe segments. Or,
attach fittings directly to the associated pipe segment. The latter method is the easiest
way to handle fittings.
Regulator When a regulator is included in a model, the regulator element must be input so that
the From Node is the upstream (high pressure) side of the regulator, and the To Node
is the downstream (low pressure) side of the regulator. When the regulator symbol is
drawn in the GDI, the upstream or From Node side of the regulator is allows shown
to the left of the “control head”, when the head is pointing up. If the element is input
backwards, use the Swap Pipe Ends command to automatically change the element’s
input direction.
GASWorkS models regulators in two different manners. If the downstream pressure
is set as known, the regulator is modeled as a “black box”. It does not consider any of
the characteristics (valve coefficient, etc.) of the regulator during the solution. In this
case the software only considers that the element is a regulator and as such knows that
the inlet pressure must be greater than the outlet pressure - the outlet pressure is also
maintained at the set pressure.
If the downstream pressure is set as unknown, the regulator is modeled as follows. If
the inlet pressure is greater than the set pressure, the element is considered to be
controlling or regulating - the outlet pressure of the regulator is maintained at the set
pressure. If the inlet pressure is less than the set pressure, the regulator operating
characteristics (valve coefficient, etc.) are used to calculate the outlet pressure of the
regulator. In this case the outlet pressure will always be less than the set pressure.
When the outlet pressure is set to unknown, and the inlet pressure is less than the set
pressure, the flow and pressure drop across the regulator element will be calculated
similar to that of a valve. In this case the pressure drop across the regulator may be
quite small, and will tend to cause the solution to take more iterations to converge -
especially when the resulting outlet pressure is very close to the set pressure.
The regulator operating characteristics are calculated and reported separate of the
solution routine. The characteristics can be viewed using the Summary report, or by
using the Edit/View command and selecting a regulator feature in the GDI.
388
Valves For systems where the pipe lengths are generally much longer than the equivalent
lengths of the valves (distribution, gathering, and transmission type systems), it is not
really beneficial to include the valves in the model. For systems like these, the
inclusion of valves unnecessarily complicates the model, while providing only a very
little increase in the model’s accuracy.
For systems where the pipe lengths are generally comparable to the equivalent lengths
of the valves (fuel piping, meter sets, regulator sets, and yard piping systems), it is
beneficial to include the valves in the model. For systems like these, the inclusion of
valves does tend to complicate the model, however in this case their inclusion does
provide a significant increase in the model’s accuracy.
Inclusion of valves can sometimes cause the number of iterations required to solve the
model to increase. This occurs because generally the pressure drop across valves
(especially valves the same size as the associated pipe) is quite small, and elements
with small pressure drops tend take longer to solve or balance.
Use the “%-Open” parameter to account for partially open valves. Set the status to
“Off” to turn a valve completely off. Note that any flow element may be turned off
using the status parameter.
An alternative to including valves as hydraulic elements in a model, is to include the
equivalent length of the valves in the length of the associated pipe segments. Or, attach
the valve as a fitting directly to the associated pipe segment. The latter method is the
easiest way to handle valves.
For tracing purposes, an alternative to including hydraulic valves is to include them
using attribute type valves. Attribute valves are not included in the flow (hydraulic)
model, but can be used for designing and checking emergency isolation areas.
Well GASWorkS allows inclusion of wells as flow elements, provided that the well
performance characteristics are available. To include a well as a flow element, the
equation coefficient and exponent must be calculated from a multi-point flow test of
the well. This data is not always available and if it is available, it is generally only
valid for the earlier life of the well. Unless retested, this data is seldom valid for a
mature well.
The advantage of including a well as a flow element is that the well’s flow rate will
behave more realistically in the model. As the downstream system pressure increases,
the well flow decreases. And as the downstream system pressure decreases, the well
flow increases.
As an alternative to including wells as flow elements in the model, a well can be
modeled as a node with a known supply (positive load).
389
Using The Pipe Sizing (Optimization) Features...

GASWorkS provides a feature for determining the required pipe sizes based on certain User defined criteria.
The process involved in finding these sizes is referred to as optimizing. The optimization process involves
three separate steps to implement.
The first two steps involve identifying which pipes are to be sized in the model, and identifying which pipe
sizes and types can be used from the Pipe Property Table. The third step, the actual pipe sizing routine, is
implemented as part of the Solution routine. When the Calculated Pipe Sizes option is selected, the Solution
routine will attempt to minimize the size or cost of the system being modeled, by attempting to find the least
size or least cost combination of pipes that will satisfy the User specified pressure requirements. Pipe sizes
and cost values are extracted from the Pipe Property Table. Only pipe sizes and types in the Pipe Property
Table, where the Use When Sizing item is set to Yes, will be considered or used during the optimization. In
the model, only pipes where the Allow Size Calculation item has been selected will be sized.
The Summary Report compliments the Optimize feature by allowing the cost and size totals to be quickly
estimated and compared between varying design scenarios. By comparing the total cost of the various
designs, the most cost effective design can be easily identified. The cost values are calculated by multiplying
the pipe lengths by the “Cost Per Unit Length” values contained in the Pipe Property Table. For example,
the cost of a 1000 foot long segment of pipe with a unit cost of 8 would be, 8 times 1000 or 8000.
The Optimize feature may be used to size an entire system, or to size only a single pipe segment. It is
especially useful when designing a new system or designing replacement or renewal facilities for an existing
system. The optimization process is iterative. The number of iterations required to complete the process
depends on the size of the system being modeled, and the number of pipe segments identified for inclusion
in the optimization process.
As part of the optimization set-up, the User establishes certain conditions that they wish to maintain. The
optimization process attempts to maintain those conditions while minimizing the pipe sizes or costs of the
system. Various types of conditions may be set:
! A pressure limit may be established for the entire system.
! A pressure limit may be established at certain node locations (referred to as condition nodes). Up
to ten (10) locations may be specified, each with a different pressure value.
! The pressure limits may be set to either maximum or minimum values.
! A maximum velocity value may be established.
390
For example, consider a system that contains an industrial customer who has a minimum inlet pressure
requirement of 10 Psig. The node representing that customer could be identified as a Condition Node, and
the Condition Pressure would be set at 10. The system pressure condition is used to establish an overall
limiting system pressure. This condition specifies that no pressure in the system may be either higher or
lower than the specified system pressure, depending on whether the pressure represents maximum or
minimum values. If the Condition Node is not identified, only the overall system pressure is used when sizing
the system.
As an example of how these two conditions are used in the optimization process, consider the industrial
customer described above. In addition to the customer’s pressure requirements, let's add the condition that
the minimum system pressure is 5 Psig. The optimization routine would attempt to find the minimum size
pipes that could supply at least 10 Psig to the industrial customer, while ensuring that no other pressure in
the system is less than 5 Psig.
In all cases the velocity would be limited to at or below the specified limit value.
The general process for determining pipe sizes is as follows:
! Depending on the value of the Reset Pipe Sizes To Minimum option, all of the pipes identified for
sizing will be set to the minimum allowed pipe size.
! The model is solved and the condition pressures are checked until the conditions are satisfied.
During the check process, if the current value is less than the specified value, the specified
processing method is used to identify which pipes to modify.
! The size of the identified pipes are increased one size larger. The model solution and check
process is continued until the all of the condition pressures are satisfied. Once the condition pressure
conditions are satisfied, a similar “solve and check” process is used to check the systems pressures.
! Finally the velocity values are checked and the pipe sizes are adjusted accordingly.
The key to the pipe sizing process, is to determine which pipe to change the size of. The pipes to change are
identified using the selected “Path Processing” method. The various processing methods are described in the
following table:
Path Processing Method... Description...

No Path Processing This method ignores any flow relationships and focuses on
finding the pipes with the highest pressure drop. These pipes are
then identified for a change.
391
Path Processing Method... Description...
Process Along Smallest Flow This method finds the upstream path from the check location,
with the smallest flow rates, and finds the pipes with the highest
pressure drop. These pipes are then identified for a change.
Process Along Largest Flow This method finds the upstream path from the check location,
with the largest flow rates, and finds the pipes with the highest
pressure drop. These pipes are then identified for a change.
Alternate Processing This method alternates using the Smallest and Largest Flow
processing methods.
Flow Processing Only This method use the pipe flow rates to determine the “path”, and
then uses the pipe “resistance” values to determine which
segments to modify. This method generally results in a graduated
size “trunk” and “branch” type system that most designers are
accustomed to.
The Flow Processing Only method can be “tuned” using the

Diameter Path Factor and Length Path Factor values in the
Solution Data. Rasing or lowering one of the values causes it to
have more or less influence on the “resistance” portion of the
processing routine.
The pipe resistance as used by this routine is represented by the

ratio of the length to the diameter, both raised to their respective
“factors”. The product of the flow rate and resistance is used to
select the pipes to be modified.
Flow - Pressure Drop Processing This method uses pipe flow rates to determine the “path”, and
then uses a ratio of the pressure drop and pipe length to
determine which segments to modify. This method generally
results in a graduated size “trunk” and “branch” type system that
most designers are accustomed to.
The Flow - Pressure Drop Processing method can be “tuned”

using the Pressure Drop Path Factor and Length Path Factor
values in the Solution Data. Rasing or lowering one of the values
causes it to have more or less influence on the “resistance”
portion of the processing routine.
When computing the pressure drop / pipe length ratio, the

pressure drop and pipe lengths are raised to their respective
“factors”. The product of the flow rate and the ratio is used to
select the pipes to be modified.
392
The optimization feature provides a very powerful tool for the system designer. However, it cannot replace
the intuition, knowledge, and discretion of an experienced designer. The results of the optimization routine
will provide a good start to the design process. However, these results should not be considered to be a "final
design". The optimization results should always be reviewed and revised as required to complete the design
process.
Note: During the pipe sizing process, only pipe style hydraulic elements where the “allow sizing” option is
selected will be considered for a new pipe size. The size of fitting and valve type elements are not changed.
It is best to exclude these type of elements from the model when using the pipe sizing routine. If they are
included, they will need to be manually changed as appropriate, after the sizing routine is complete. The
sizing routine may need to be re-executed after changing them.
Note: The maximum velocity that can be physically achieved in a pipe segment is equivalent to the speed
of sound under the conditions found in the pipe segment. When sonic velocity is achieved, the flow is said
to be “choked”. At choked flow, the flow rate cannot be increased, without an increase in inlet pressure - an
additional lowering of the outlet pressure does not increase the flow rate. This is similar to what happens in
a regulator at “critical” flow. The most common case of choked flow in a gas piping system would be found
in flare or relief valve stack piping. Vary rarely is choked flow achieved in other portions of a normal gas
piping system.
It would make sense that there needs to be some practical limit for gas velocity in design calculations,
however there seems to be many opinions on what is an appropriate velocity for gas flow. Values range from
as low as 20 ft/sec to about 200 ft/sec. There are two general criteria cited for limiting velocity: One to
reduce noise levels in above ground piping. Two, to reduce the movement and abrasion caused by dust and
debris in the piping system. It is up to the User to select an appropriate limit, however inappropriately
limiting the velocity, tends to increase pipe size and cost of a system, without providing any real hydraulic
design benefits.
393
Using The Query Features...

The Mass Update routine is controlled, the content of the Standard Report is modified, and the GDI can be
color-coded or items can be “flagged” using a User defined query specification. A query specification is
merely a means of telling GASWorkS which records to display or modify. Only records which meet the
specification are used, while records that do not match the specification are ignored. When used with the
Mass Update or color-code routine, the query specification tells GASWorkS which records to change. When
used with the Standard Report, the query specification tells GASWorkS which records to include in the
report.
A specification can be saved and retrieved for later use. When used with the Standard Report, multiple
queries can be sequential implemented.
The following table summarizes the GASWorkS query features:
Desired Operation Applicable Query Operator

Find records equal to a specific Use the equal "=" operator. For example, Size/Type = 4P. This
value would find all records where the Size/Type value equals "4P".
Find records not equal to a specific Use the not-equal "< >" operator. For example, Size/Type < > 4P.
value This would find all records where the Size/Type value is not
equal to "4P".
Find records less than a specific Use the less-than "<" operator. For example, Pressure < 10. This
value would find all records where the Pressure value is less than 10.
Find records greater than a specific Use the greater-than ">" operator. For example, Pressure > 10.
value This would find all records where the Pressure value is greater
than 10.
Find records less than or equal to a Use the less-than-or-equal "<=" operator. For example, Pressure
specific value <= 10. This would find all records where the Pressure value is
less than or equal to 10.
Find records greater than or equal to Use the greater than or equal ">=" operator. For example,
a specific value Pressure >= 10. This would find all records where the Pressure
value is greater than or equal to 10.
Find all records Use the "ALL" operator.
Find records similar to a string value Use the "LIKE" operator. For example, Address LIKE Main St.
This would find the records where the address values contain the
string "Main St".
394
Desired Operation Applicable Query Operator
Find records not similar to a string Use the "NOT LIKE" operator. For example, Address NOT LIKE
value Main St. This would find the records where the address values do
not contain the string "Main St".
Find records with the smallest Use the minimum "MIN" operator. For example, Pressure MIN
values 10. This would find the records associated with the ten lowest
pressure values.
Find records with the largest values Use the maximum "MAX" operator. For example, Pressure MAX
10. This would find the records associated with the ten highest
pressure values.
Find records that start with a certain Use the “STARTS WITH” operator. For example, Nodename
string value starts with “HP”. This would find all node records where the
Nodename starts with the string “HP”.
Find records that end with a certain Use the “ENDS WITH” operator. For example, Pipe Size/Type
string value ends with “PE”. This would find all pipe records where the
Size/Type value ends with the string “PE”.
Note: Not all operators can be used with all data items.
395
Using Attribute Valves...

GASWorkS allows valves to be considered by various methods. Valves may be included in the model as a
"Valve" type hydraulic element, as a "Fitting" type hydraulic element, as an attached fitting, or as an attribute
valve attached to a pipe. An attribute valve is associated with a pipe element, but is not actually considered
as part of the hydraulic model. Attribute valves are used only for display and when performing a "valve" style
trace.
In most cases, the additional restriction which may be associated with a valve may be effectively accounted
for by slightly adjusting the associated pipe's length. Or, by attaching a “valve” type fitting directly to the
pipe segment. Generally, where the pipe lengths are long compared to the equivalent length of the valves,
omission of system valves in the actual model data has a negligible influence on the results of the analysis.
Because of this, system valves are often left out of the hydraulic model. However, it might be desirable to
keep track of a valve's location for non-modeling purposes (such as tracing) - this is the purpose and designed
use of the attribute valve features.
The model creation process can be greatly simplified by maintaining valves as attributes to their associated
pipe, as opposed to including them as actual flow elements in the model. A pipe can have up to two attribute
valves assigned to it - one near the From Node and one near the To Node. When the valve is "added",
GASWorkS determines which pipe end the valve is nearest to, then assigns it as either a From or To Node
valve.
The Attribute Valve data consists of an index file which keeps track of the pipe to which the valve is
assigned, the valve's location, and a twenty (20) character alphanumeric identification number. The valve
data is stored in a file ending in a ".vdx" extension.
The location of an attribute valve is displayed using a "bow-tie" symbol. The symbols can be assigned a User
specified size and color to help differentiate them from "Valve" type pipe element symbols. All of the
symbols are displayed using a common size.
396
Using Diversified Customer Loads...
GASWorkS provides a routine for handling diversified customer loads per The Institution of Gas Engineers
Guide - IGE/GL/1. The following describes how these requirements are implemented in the software.
GASWorkS uses the computation methods described in Appendix A5.1.5 to compute the diversified load
associated with a combination of varied heating type customers. In the GASWorkS implementation each
customer is assumed to represent a unique group of one. Using this assumption the total load for a group of
customers can be reduced to:
This value is computed for each node, considering the customers served downstream of the node. All
customers along a pipe segment are assumed to be served at the downstream node end of the segment.
Implementation Notes...
Using the above relationship as a foundation, GASWorkS implements diversity into its solution algorithm
as follows:
1) An initial set of customer counts is calculated for each pipe segment based on the customers assigned to
each individual segment.
2) A set of node loads are computed from the pipe customer counts using the relationship shown above.
3) The model is solved.
4) A new set of customer counts is computed by finding null flow nodes (nodes where all pipe flows are into
the node). The flow path is then traced towards the source until a branch or a source is encountered. A new
set of pipe customer counts are computed along the flow path by allocating the downstream customer counts
to the upstream pipes at each node, based on a proration of the incoming pipe flows.
5) After the new customer counts are computed for all of the pipe segments, a new set of node flows is
computed. The new values are checked against the old values. If each new value is within the convergence
tolerance of the old value, the diversified flows are “balanced” - the solution and diversity calculation are
complete. If any value falls outside the check value, the process is repeated starting at Step 3 until the
diversified loads are balance or the iteration limit is reached.
397
Model Considerations...
The following should be considered when developing a model for use with the diversity routine.
1) Enter or import the piping network as with any GASWorkS model.
2) Customer data features must be present when using the diversity routine. Use the GDI customer entry
commands to enter customers and indicate their supply main. When adding a customer:
! Select the Diversified Load Application method.
! Select the appropriate heating type from the list that appears.
! Enter the appropriate annual heating value for the Per Unit Load. Select the appropriate
dimensional units for the heating value.
! Customers with similar heating types, located along a common pipe segment, can be represented
by a single customer feature, by entering the appropriate value for the Unit Count. For example, if
there are ten (10) identical customers along a pipe segment - ten (10) individual customer features
may be added along the pipe segment - or one customer with the unit count set to ten (10), could be
used.
3) A model may consist of both diversified and non-diversified customer loads by appropriately setting the
Load Application method.
4) Set the supply pressure values, and known/unknown values as with any GASWorkS model. Once the
model entry is complete, the model can be solved.
5) To implement the diversity routine during the solution process, select the Calculate Diversity option in
the Solution Options list when solving the model. The solution will perform multiple iterations as described
previously until a solution is reached or until the iteration limits are reached. The more complex the piping
configuration is, the more diversity iterations are required to complete the solution. Check the last line of the
solution log to ensure that the solution as been successfully completed.
Previous GASWorkS models, using diversified loads, are not directly compatible with the new diversity
calculations. To use older models with the new software, customer features must be assigned to each pipe
and the appropriate annual heating value must be assigned. After assigning the new customers it is
recommended that the Update External Loads routine be executed from the Customer Data submenu of the
Utilities menu list.
398
Convergence Problems...
Maximum Error Bounces From Small To Large – This error can occur for several reasons, the most
common reasons are listed below.
! The Upper Dampening Factor may be too large, try setting it to zero. The affect of the Upper Dampening
Factor varies depending on the flow equation and on the pressure values. The Upper Dampening Factor is
used to limit the pressure adjustment for nodes where the node error is larger than the Upper Dampening
Factor times the convergence factor. This helps reduce over-shoot and under-shoot of the solution, some
equations converge quicker when this reduction is applied to all nodes. When the Upper Dampening Factor
is set to zero the reduction is applied to all of the nodes.
! If regulators are present, and the outlet pressure of one or more of the regulators is set to unknown, the
bounce may occur because the regulator is constantly switching between regular flow mode and “droop”
mode. Try setting the outlet pressure of the regulator to known. When the outlet pressure of the regulator is
set to unknown, the operating mode of the regulator can be automatically changed by the solution to
accommodate for low inlet pressures, or for high outlet pressures. If the inlet pressure drops below the set
pressure for the regulator, the outlet pressure is reduced using the regulator’s flow equation. If the pressure
of the downstream piping is higher than the set pressure the regulator is turned off.
! The system could be “running out of gas”. This refers to the condition when the calculated pressures are
less than zero. This occurs because the capacity of the system is less than the amount of flow that is trying
to be passed through it. If this condition occurs (and it is not supposed to) try decreasing the design factor,
increasing the pipe efficiencies, or increasing the supply pressures.
Zero Diagonal – Possible Discontinuity From Supply Node(s) – This error generally occurs because a
portion of the system is disconnected from the remainder of the system, and the disconnected portion does
not contain a node with a known pressure. The discontinuity can be the result of a connectivity error, from
a turned off piping element, or from an incorrectly installed regulator or compressor.
! If this error occurs, and the model can be displayed graphically, try the following to resolve the problem:
W Note the indicated node record number.
W Use the Find Node By Record Number command from the GDI Command List to locate the
affected node.
W Use the Trace command to “trace all directions” from the affected node.
W Follow the highlighted pipe segments to determine the point of discontinuity.
399
Using A Command Alias File...
The GDI allows User defined command names to be used to execute a command on the Command Line. A
User defined command name is known as a command “alias”. These values are assigned using the Command
Alias File. The Command Alias File is a specially named ASCII text file which contains the alias and
command assignments. The file can be created using any word processing application that supports the
ASCII text format.
The file must be named “gwcmd.txt” and must be located in the currently set Initialization File directory
(path).
The contents of the file describes the alias to command assignments, one assignment is contained on each
line of the file in the following format:
ALIAS, COMMAND NAME

ALIAS, COMMAND NAME
For example,
+PIPE, ADDPIPE
-PIPE, DELPIPE
The alias can contain most alphanumeric characters except commas. The case (upper or lower) of the alias
or command are not significant.
The Use Command Alias File preference must be selected to direct GASWorkS to load and use the file.
When processing a command entered on the Command Line, the alias assignments are processed before the
standard command names are processed.
400
Program Limitations...
GASWorkS is a very powerful tool for modeling flow in gas piping systems. However, it does have some
limitations. The node and pipe limitations are related to the capacity of the particular version purchased, the
remaining limitations apply to all versions. The limitations of GASWorkS are:
Data Types
The Data Limitations table refers to a variety of data types. In the context of the descriptions contained
in that table, the following data type definitions will apply.
Double precision number - allows up to 15 significant digits. Unless otherwise specified, values of this
type can range from -1.7*10^308 to1.7*10^308.
Integer number - allows up to 5 significant digits. Unless otherwise specified, values of this type can range
from -32000 to 32000.
Long integer number - allows up to 10 significant digits. Unless otherwise specified, values of this type
can range from -2.1*10^9 to 2.1*10^9.
Single precision number - allows up to 7 significant digits. Unless otherwise specified, values of this type
can range from -3.4*1038 to 3.4*1038 .
Data Limitations
The contents of this table list the absolute minimum and maximum values allowed by the various
parameters used in GASWorkS.
Node Capacity - Version and memory dependent.
Pipe Capacity - Version and memory dependent.
Node names must be no more than forty alphanumeric characters in length Special characters are allowed.
Pressure values may be any floating point number in the range from minus one atmosphere, to the
maximum allowed single precision number.
Node Load values may be any valid single precision number.
Pipe Diameter, Wall Thickness, and Roughness values may be any valid positive single precision number.
Pipe Lengths may be any valid positive single precision number.
The value of the Maximum Number of Iterations must be any valid positive integer value.
The Design Factor may be any valid single precision number.
401
Data Limitations
The Convergence Factor may be any valid positive single precision number.
The Upper & Lower Dampening Factor may be any valid positive single precision number.
The Diameter & Length Path Factors may be any valid positive single precision number.
Gas Properties may be any valid positive single precision number.
Temperatures may be any valid single precision number.
Elevation values may be any valid integer value.
Node coordinate values must be any valid double precision number in the range, 0 to 9,999,999.
Customer coordinate values must be any valid single precision number in the range, 0 to 9,999,999.
Valve Attribute Valve Numbers must be no more than twenty alphanumeric characters in length. Special
characters are allowed.
User text may contain no more than 32,000 characters.
Model Restrictions
A regulator or compressor element cannot be preceded or followed by another regulator or compressor.
No more than six pipes may be connected to an individual node.
At least one node parameter (pressure or load value) must be known for each node.
402
How To Reach Us...
You may reach us at the following telephone numbers:
Toll Free (US only): 1-800-391-9391

Telephone: (719) 578-9391
Facsimile: (719) 578-9394
If you receive our answering machine, please leave a message including your name, your company's name,
your telephone number, and a brief description of the information that you require. We will promptly respond
to your request.
Our normal work hours are 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. Mountain Time, Monday through Friday. However, if
you have a problem, please try at any time, we may be in. If we are not, leave a message and will we respond
at our first opportunity.
You may also write or visit us at:
Bradley B. Bean, PE
419 East Columbia Street
Colorado Springs, CO 80907
USA
e-mail: [email protected]
Website: www.b3pe.com
Please include your email address in your correspondence.
403
404
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Appendix
APPENDIX
405

Network Primer
Network Primer...
The examples used in this discussion often refer to distribution type piping systems, however the general
concepts described in this section apply to all types of piping systems. Hopefully the User will be able to
make the analogies between the cited examples, and their particular application. Additional notes are
provided for working with other types of systems, at the end of this section.
About Network Modeling...
The following provides a brief description of network modeling, the benefits derived from modeling, and
some general information concerning gas networks. It assumes that you have a working knowledge of the
design, analysis, and operation of gas systems and the terms normally associated with the field. If you are
not completely familiar with all of the terms or concepts you encounter, you may want to refer to an industry
handbook or guide.
For our discussion here, a model is a mathematical representation of a gas system. It is created by defining
a group of interconnected nodes and pipes. A node represents the beginning or ending point of a pipe. Nodes
are connected by pipes. Load is brought into the system or taken out of the system through nodes. Nodes not
only represent pipe connections, but can also represent customer connections and supply points.
Pipes carry gas between the nodes. The

sum of the pipe flows going into a
specific node must equal the sum of
the flow leaving the node through the
connected pipes, plus the flow leaving
the system through the node. Similarly,
the sum of the flow coming into the
system through a node, must equal the
sum of the flow leaving the node
through the connected pipes. In steady-
state modeling, neither nodes or pipes can store flow.
A further characteristic of steady-state network behavior, requires that the sum of the pressure drops from
one point to another, along any path, must be same. In other words, a node point can possess only one
pressure value.
Flow in a pipe moves from the higher pressure end of the pipe to the lower pressure end. That is flow always
moves in the direction of the lower pressure node. Like a ball rolling downhill, gas flows from high to low.
Flow is created by a difference in pressure and consequently flow causes frictional pressure losses. Generally
as the flow increases the frictional losses also increase. The greater the pressure difference, the greater the
flow rate. And the greater the flow rate, the greater the frictional pressure losses.
407
Network Primer
Because of the nature of the equations that describe the pressure-flow relationship in a gas network, the
pressure and flow values in a gas system cannot always be directly calculated. The values must usually be
determined by recursive calculation. To control this recursive process, an attempt is made to balance the flow
into and out of all nodes in the model. When the imbalance of these flows is within the specified tolerance,
the model is said to be "balanced". However, it is unusual for the solution of a model to result in an
imbalance exactly equal to zero at all nodes. To account for this behavior, a tolerance is used to check the
balance condition.
The “tolerance” represents the amount of imbalance that is acceptable for a particular analysis. The tolerance
is analysis specific and should be based on certain peculiarities of the model being analyzed. When
establishing the convergence tolerance, consideration should be given to several factors:
! The coarseness of the model data, that is, how accurately is the model data known.
! The magnitude of the total flow into the system being modeled.
! And the intended use of the results from the analysis.
An acceptable tolerance is usually less than one percent of the total anticipated flow into the system being
modeled.
A "flow equation" is required to describe the relationship between the flow in the pipes and pressures at the
nodes. Most flow equations require the definition of certain parameters describing the gas in the system, and
the physical properties of the pipes. A friction factor may be inherently assumed by the equation, or may be
calculated depending on the equation format. There are many equations available for modeling the conditions
normally encountered in gas distribution, transmission, and gathering systems. The challenge is selecting the
one that best suits your specific application.
A model is only as good as the data that is used to build it. Analysis based on incorrect values will yield
incorrect results. The analysis results should be evaluated with the proper weight. In most gas distribution
models, customer usage and load distribution will be the most critical parameter in the analysis. With the
physical system configuration being the second most critical group of data.
The Benefits of Modeling...
There are several benefits derived from creating and analyzing computer models of a gas system. Some of
these are:
! The ability to anticipate operating conditions within the system.

! The ability to identify problem areas and trouble-shoot problems before they become serious.
! The ability to efficiently size new and replacement segments to the system.
! The ability to estimate the impact on the system of adding new customers or supplies.
! The ability to analyze "what if" scenarios without physical manipulation of the gas system
or actual operating settings.
408
Network Primer
Modeling of a system helps prevent potentially unnecessary expense by allowing design and operating ideas
to be tested using the model. As opposed to the potentially costly method of testing the ideas in the field.
Computer modeling allows alternatives to be tested and refined before implementing them. It can help avoid
construction of improperly sized facilities, and avoid making modifications to the system or operations that
could adversely affect its serviceability.
About Networks...
A “network” is any system of interconnected or interrelated components. In a network each component, to

some extent, affects every other component in the network. A gas system can be considered as a network.
In a gas system, the components of the network are the pipes, valves, fittings, connections, and regulators
that make up the physical configuration of the system - and the customers attached to the system.
As an example of how individual components of a gas network might affect the other components in the
network, consider the following:
! The outlet pressure of a regulator supplying the system is reduced. To a certain extent, the pressure
in the entire system might be changed - the pressures upstream of the regulator will likely increase
and pressures downstream of the regulator will decrease - if more than one regulator supplies the
portion downstream of the regulator, flows will be redistributed.
! An additional regulator is added to the system, the flow from the other regulators will be changed.
The flow through the pipes will be redistributed to accommodate the change in flow from the
regulators.
! A valve in the system is closed. Flow in the system must be redistributed to accommodate the
changes caused by the valve closure. The flow and pressure in all the pipes will be changed, to a
certain extent. Flow will decrease in the mains to which the valve was attached and increase in mains
that might provide flow around the valve. When flows change in the system, so do the pressures in
the system.
! A large load is connected to the system. The flow in the portions of the system supplying that load
will be increased. The increase in flow will affect the pressures in the system and the flow required
of the supplying regulators.
These few examples demonstrate the fundamental concept of a network - that within a network, every
member of the network is essentially connected to and affected by every other member in the network. A
network can be thought of as a large machine with each component working together with the other
components to make the machine operate.
409
Network Primer
Flow In Gas Networks...
If you refer to the previous definition of a gas network, you will recall that the network consisted of pipes,
fittings, regulators, and customers. Customer usage is normally what causes flow in a gas system. When it
is cold, the customers' furnaces operate quite frequently, creating a demand on the gas system. The flow in
the gas system might be very high to satisfy this demand. When it is warm, generally only pilot lights are
operating, their demand is quite low. Consequently, the flow in the system is very low at that time. Let's look
at this phenomena closer. What happens in this process that actually causes the gas to flow through the
system?
Consider a system that is comprised of a single customer, a single segment of main, and a single supplying
regulator. When the customer's home gets cold, the thermostat in the house reaches a point where it turns on
the furnace. When the furnace is turned on, the gas valve on the furnace opens allowing gas to enter the
furnace. On a conventional furnace the absolute pressure inside the furnace is the same as the atmospheric
pressure. That is the gas is released to the atmosphere. This is true because the combustion chamber of the
furnace is open to the atmosphere through the flue and the inlet air valves. The gauge pressure then, at the
end of this network of regulator, main, and customer is zero. In other words, if a pressure gauge were held
in the combustion chamber of the furnace, the gauge would read zero.
If the network had no source of supply and the furnace continued to operate, the pressure in the main
supplying the customer would decrease over time. Eventually, the pressure in the main would be reduced to
the same pressure as the combustion chamber of the furnace, zero.
This system, however, has a source of supply, the regulator. Initially when the furnace is off, the regulator
is closed. There is no gas coming into the system. As the furnace continues to use the gas from the main, the
pressure in the main begins to decrease. The regulator will eventually sense this decrease and open slightly
to attempt to maintain the pressure in the main. The regulator will continue to open as required to satisfy the
demand imposed by the consumption of the furnace. In theory the amount of gas supplied by the regulator
will eventually equal the amount of gas consumed by the furnace. When this happens, the condition in the
system is said to be at steady-state.
In summary, the demand for gas by the furnace in the customer's home causes gas to flow through the system
to satisfy that demand. When the supply through the system is equivalent to the demand on the system, the
condition of the system is said to be steady-state.
Let's look at the conditions occurring in the system during steady-state flow. The pressure at the end of the
system (the customer's furnace) is zero. Let's assume the pressure at the regulator supplying the system is
twenty. The pressure in the main that connects the customer to the regulator, therefore, varies from twenty
at the regulator to zero at the furnace. This difference in pressures causes gas to flow through the main line.
The amount of gas flowing through the main exactly equals the amount of gas entering the system at the
regulator, and exactly equals the amount of gas leaving the system through the furnace. The flows and
pressures are unchanging (steady), therefore the system conditions are steady-state.
410
Network Primer
When the furnace turns off, the customer end of the system will no longer be open to the atmosphere.
However for a time, a pressure difference will exist in the system and the gas will continue to enter the
system through the regulator, but no gas is leaving through the furnace. During this time, the flow in the main
equals the flow entering through the regulator but does not equal the flow leaving through the furnace (which
is zero). Further, as the gas continues to enter the system the pressure at the furnace end will continue to
increase. The flow into the system does not equal the flow leaving the system, and the pressures are
changing. These conditions are referred to as unsteady, or transient. Eventually, the pressure in the system
will equalize (no pressure difference) and the flow will cease. When this occurs the system will again be in
a steady-state condition.
When gas is flowing it causes frictional pressure losses to occur along the pipe segments. The magnitude of
the frictional pressure losses are affected by several factors. A decrease in pipe size, restrictions in the system
such as valves or debris, and increased roughness of the inside pipe wall cause the magnitude of the frictional
losses to increase. The composition and physical properties of the gas also affects the magnitude of the
frictional losses. For a given flow rate, an increase in specific gravity, the flowing temperature, or the
viscosity generally causes the magnitude of the frictional losses to increase.
Determining Model Loads...
As mentioned in the previous section, the demand or load placed on a gas system is a function of its
customers' usage characteristics. In order to model a gas system, an estimate of the customers' loads must be
determined. This is probably the most critical piece of data that will be used in the model. Unfortunately, this
is generally the least known piece of the required data.
There are two general methods for determining the value of these loads. The first method attempts to
determine actual usage values (generally peak-hour usage values). The other attempts to determine the total
connected load (TCL) for each customer, and then applies a usage (Design) factor to the TCL. Either method
is acceptable if applied correctly and judiciously.
One method which can be used to determine the actual usage of each customer can be described as a
"proration" method. The steps required to determine the customers' peak-hour loads by this method are:
1) Determine the historical peak-hour flow rate for the entire system being modeled. Usually this
occurs coincident with the peak-day event, but not always. If hourly flow values are not available,
obtain the metering charts for the period covering the peak-day occurrence. If the meter is an orifice
meter, find the maximum differential recorded during the peak-day. Using the AGA Report Number
3 (or other applicable reference) calculate the hourly flow rate corresponding to the maximum
differential. If more than one meter run was operational, sum the loads for all of the runs to obtain
a total for the system.
411
Network Primer
If the meter is not an orifice meter, and the meter chart records volume as opposed to differential,
find the thinnest "scallop" recorded for the peak-day period. Divide the scallop volume by its
duration (in hours) to determine an "average" peak-hour. Be sure to correct the recorded volume for
pressure and temperature, as appropriate.
If only daily or monthly demands are available, an appropriate factor may be applied to estimate the
hourly demand. Generally peak-day to peak-hour conversion factors range from 1/12 to 1/18.
2) Determine the average usage of each customer during the peak demand period. The data should
include some type of customer identifier (address, facility ID, premise ID, etc), and the usage or
billing values over the month(s) representing the peak period. Calculate the average usage for each
customer and the portion of the total load used by each customer.
To determine each customer's portion of the total load, sum the average usage values for all of the
customers. Then divide each customer's average usage by the total usage, the result represents the
customer's portion of the total usage.
Note: If the above calculations are performed using a spreadsheet, it may be possible to link the
resulting “database” to GASWorkS and use the external database features to automatically update
the model loads.
3) Finally prorate the total peak-hour value determined in Step 1 to each customer. To prorate the
flow, multiply the total peak-hour value by the prorated usage (determined in Step 2) for each
customer. This result will approximate the peak-hour usage of each customer. When properly applied
to the model, these loads may be used to estimate the peak-hour performance of the system being
modeled.
This method can also be used for off-peak periods by using an appropriate total hourly value.
Note: When using this method, generally the customer loads are input as the usage factors computed
in Step 2, and the Design Factor is set to the peak-hour value computed in Step 1, or another hourly
total as suggested in Step 3.
Another method for estimating customer loads is referred to as the TCL method. The following discusses
the use of this method:
! There are several methods to determine the customers' total connected load. The best method is
to survey each customer location to determine the input rating of each of their appliances. However,
this is not always practical. A compromise method is to visit only the commercial and industrial type
customers and a portion of the residential customers. Collect the individual loads for each
commercial customer visited, then select a random sampling of residential customers. Collect their
loads and calculate an "average" residential load based on the collected data. Apply this average to
the remaining residential customers.
412
Network Primer
! If there is great dispersion of residential construction types and ages, group the residential
customers into classes and calculate an average for each class. For example, homes built before
1940, homes built between 1940 and 1950, or homes built in the 1960's, might represent classes of
residential customers. Another good way to group residential customers is by subdivision or
development. Often homes built by a particular developer will have similar size appliances and
construction types. Of course, if resources permit, the most accurate way to determine the loads of
your customers, is to visit each home and collect the data.
! Once estimated or collected, the customer loads may be applied to the model. However, the loads
will need to be adjusted during the analysis by a usage factor. A usage factor can be estimated by
dividing the peak-hour flow rate by the sum of the customer loads. This factor can then be applied
during the solution by setting the Design Factor equal to the usage factor. The value of the Design
Factor ranges greatly depending on the number of customers being served and the climate in the area
where the system is located.
Regardless of the method used to determine the customer loads, it is time consuming. Try to avoid the
temptation to be lax in your efforts to complete this task. Remember the model will be used to make very
expensive and critical decisions, therefore the model must be as accurate as practical - the loads are one of
the most critical pieces of the model's data. You will find that a little extra effort spent accurately determining
the customer loads now, will be resources well spent in the future.
Creating Gas Network Models...
To accurately model a gas system, it is necessary to determine two fundamental types of data. The first is
to determine the physical configuration of the system. That is, it is necessary to determine the size and length
of each main segment, how and where each main is connected to the other mains, the location of any flow
or pressure controlling devices (regulators, compressors, or closed valves), and the location of the supply and
demand points for the system.
Usually the system configuration can be determined from system maps or system records. If the records are
incomplete or inaccurate, it is often helpful to interview the field personnel responsible for maintaining and
operating the system. Their insight can be quite useful in determining the actual configuration of the system.
Secondly, the system's load (demands and supplies) must be determined. Use one of the previously described
methods to estimate the loads associated with the system being modeled.
Once all of the data is collected, it can be directly used to create the model, or it can be used to create an
intermediate schematic of the system. A schematic is a depiction or drawing showing the configuration of
the piping system. The schematic might be an actual paper drawing, or it might be created using the
GASWorkS Graphical Data Interface or a drawing created using a CAD or GIS system. In the schematic
show each main and its connection to each other main. The schematic does not have to be to scale (however,
it is best if it is), but it should accurately reflect the way in which the system is configured.
413
Network Primer
The detail required of a model varies on its intended use, the complexity of the model, and the data available
to create the model. Rarely is a node placed at every customer location, or at every valve location, or every
pipe size or type change included in a model. The model configuration is defined by its node placement.
When considering how to construct the model and where to place nodes consider the following placement
criteria. Generally a node should be “placed” at the following locations:
! At each location where two or more mains intersect and are connected.
! At each location where a main changes size.
! At each supply point into the system.
! At each main termination.
! At large demand locations. Normally, customer loads can be generalized at the piping connection
nodes. However, additional nodes should be placed at any location where a large customer connects
to the system, or locations where the distance from the closest piping node and the point at which
the customer's physical connection to the system is substantial.
In order to compensate for fluctuations in atmospheric pressure, the elevation of each node will need to be
determined. Or if the total variation in elevation across the system is less than about 1000 feet, determine the
average elevation of the system being modeled and apply the average value to each node.
If the schematic is created using a paper or CAD drawing, include the size and length of main segment on
the schematic as well as any significant node names. If the schematic was not created using the GASWorkS
GDI tools, the data will now need to be either manually entered, digitized, or imported into GASWorkS using
the appropriate method.
Once the system configuration has been entered and checked, the next task is to assign the customer loads.
There are several methods used for assigning customer loads. The methods that we most commonly
recommend are described below.
! Manually allocate loads for customers dispersed along a pipe segment (not using customer data
features):
W Sum the load along each main segment connected to an individual node.
W Divide this sum by two.
W Apply the resulting value to the pipe’s node.
This method works well when working with looped, "two-way" flow configurations. When working
with a "one-way" flow, skeleton type system, you might consider applying all of the load along a
segment, to the downstream node of that segment. This will result in conservative pressure drop
values. To be slightly less conservative, apply 2/3 of the segment's load to the downstream node and
1/3 to the upstream node.
414
Network Primer
!Automatically allocate loads along a main using customer data features:
W Place and attach customer features along the main segments as appropriate.
W Enter each customer’s specific load or enter a “generic” load for the associated customer
type.
W Unless the customer represents a very large load, apply the load to “both” nodes. For
large loads, apply the load to the appropriate From or To node.
Regardless of which assignment method is employed, discretion should always be used when applying the
loads. Large loads may warrant that a specific node be placed at their point of connection. GASWorkS
convention requires that a demand (a flow leaving the system) be indicated by a negative (-) value, and that
a supply (a flow entering the system) be indicated by a positive (+) value.
Now that the physical configuration of the distribution system has been defined and the customer demands
have been determined and allocated, information about the gas that will be flowing through the system and
a few other parameters need to be determined. These items are:
! A gas composition analysis for the gas taken around the period being modeled. Or if that is not
available, the specific gravity of the gas compared to dry air and the absolute viscosity of the gas.
! The average flowing temperature of the gas during the season to be modeled.
! The base pressure and temperature used to state volumes. These values represent the basis for
measuring the gas - they are usually the same as the billing pressure and temperature.
The gas analysis (or properties) can usually be obtained from the gas supplier. If an analysis is available, use
the GASWorkS Gas Properties Calculation routine to compute the required gas property values.
To complete the “mathematical model”, a correct flow equation needs to be determined. The operating
pressure and system characteristics must be considered when selecting the appropriate flow equation. There
are a variety of equations available to model gas pressures and flows. You will need to select the equation
that best suits your specific application. Refer to the “Equation Application Reference” provided later in the
Appendix for discussion and suggestions on selecting an appropriate flow equation.
Finally, the known operating conditions of the system need to be input. In general, GASWorkS requires that
either the pressure or load be known at each node point - but not both. There are exceptions to this rule at
regulators and compressors. Generally the pressure value will be set as known at each node point
representing a supply, and the load value will be set as known at nodes representing a demand - the flow or
pressure is set as unknown as appropriate. Nodes that represent a connection with no flow entering or leaving
a system (node at a pipe size change or tee) are generally set so that the load is known and zero, and the
pressure is unknown. All unknown values are computed during the analysis process.
415
Network Primer
Sometimes, especially at supply points, both the flow and pressure value might be known - the normal
tendency would be to set both these values as known - where as this is possible to do, it generally results in
an “over-constrained” model that will not solve or will yield unusual results. In these cases, it is generally
best to set one of the values as known (usually the load) and let GASWorkS solve for it. This un-constrains
the model and lets it solve, and also provides a check for the model accuracy.
The culmination of the above data represents the basis for the "model". This data is used to develop the
mathematical model used by GASWorkS. As mentioned earlier, the data can be directly entered into
GASWorkS or imported using one of its import routines or using a combination of these methods. Once
entered, the model can then be manipulated and revised as necessary to correct, test and verify the model.
Whenever possible, when working with an existing system, the solution results should be checked against
actual field data - the model should be “calibrated” to accurately reflect field conditions. This can be done
by comparing GASWorkS generated pressure and flow values with field collected data. Always check at
several locations in both the system and the model. A model can always be forced to match a single specific
value at a single specific point. However, the proof of a model is in the ability to match values at several
locations in the system being modeled. To calibrate a model, model results can be forced to match field
conditions by adjusting the pipe efficiencies as necessary to make a match.
Working With Gathering Systems...
When working with gathering systems, a few basic issues should be consider. A gathering system is
essentially a backwards distribution system. It generally has one “demand” point and many supply points,
as opposed to a basic distribution system with one supply and many demands. The supply point on a
distribution system usually is equipped with a regulator, the demand point for a gathering system is generally
equipped with a compressor. Construction of the basic piping model is essentially the same as for a
distribution system - the application of the “loads’ and settings vary however.
For existing systems, there is generally quit a bit of information known about the systems operation - flow
and pressure rates at every well and possibly a flow rate and suction or discharge pressure at the compressor
(demand point) are known. GASWorkS generally requires that either the pressure or load value be set as
unknown at each node. When working with a gathering system, where much data is known, it can be
challenging to decide which values should be fixed (known) and which should be allowed to be calculated
(unknown). In a gathering system, there are two ways to address this issue - set the well pressures as known
and let the flow rates be calculated, or set the well flows as known and let the pressures be calculated. How
the knowns and unknowns are set up at the well nodes, depends on what information is known, and how the
wells are operated (whether flow or pressure control is present).
416
Network Primer
When the well pressures are fixed (known), the flow rates are calculated - the results from an analysis setup
in this manner will provide the estimated flow rates from the wells, while holding the well outlet pressures
at a fixed value. If a new well is added to a model using this configuration, generally the flow rates in the
other wells will be reduced because of the increased downstream pressure, attributable to the new well. This
type of analysis would provide an estimate of how much the existing well production might be reduced by
the addition of the new well.
When the well flows are fixed (known), the pressure values are calculated - the results from an analysis setup
in this manner will provide the estimated pressures at the wells, while holding the well flow rates fixed. If
a new well is added to a model using this configuration, generally the pressures at the other wells will be
increased because of the increased downstream pressure attributable to the new well. This type of analysis
would provide an estimate of how much the existing well pressures would need to be increased to maintain
their previous production.
GASWorkS allows wells to be modeled by two different methods. The most often used method uses a single
node to represent the well location. With this method the node basically represents the well head, or if
processing or control equipment is present, the downstream connection to the equipment, or point of flow
and pressure measurement. The other method models the well as a hydraulic element. This method requires
that the operating characteristics of the well be known or estimated. These factors are usual determined from
a “multi-point” flow test - which is not often available.
At the compressor end of the system, the compressor can be modeled as a hydraulic element, or the system
model can end at the suction side of the compressor. When a compressor element is present, generally the
load on the inlet (suction) side of the compressor is set as known and zero. If the well pressures are set as
known and loads as unknown, the inlet (suction) pressure is generally set as unknown. If the well flows are
set as known and the pressures as unknown, the inlet (suction) pressure must be set as known. The
downstream (discharge) pressure is generally set as known. When entering a compressor element, the From
Node must represent the inlet (suction) side of the compressor, and the To Node must represent the outlet
(discharge) pressure of the compressor.
Often the reason to model a gathering system is to identify “bottle necks”, restrictive pipe segments. The
results produced by GASWorkS can be used to identify these locations by two methods - first and most
obvious, is by reviewing the reported segment pressure drops. The other is to attempt to calibrate the model
by adjusting the pipe efficiencies to force the model results to match field recorded values - usually pressure
values. Pipes that require very low (less than 75%) efficiency values indicate problem areas, usually a result
of liquid build up.
Be careful when comparing pressure values between field measurement equipment and GASWorkS. Often
flow meter or flow computer data are reported in absolute pressure values, all node pressure values reported
in GASWorkS are gauge values.
417
Network Primer
The Weymouth equation has been traditionally used to design gathering systems, however due to its
conservative nature, it does not tend to match field results very well. Depending on pipe sizes and operating
pressures, the IGT-Improved equation tends to match field results with good repeatability.
GASWorkS provides three compressor equations. Two require empirical data from a compressor operating
curve. One, the “Theoretic”, uses only theoretic compression characteristics. The Theoretic equation will
provide good “rule-of-thumb” values when used judiciously. GASWorkS models all compressors as a “black-
box” and does not use any of the compressor characteristics in the hydraulic analysis.
Working With Plant (Fuel Piping) Systems...
When working with plant or fuel piping systems (systems downstream of the gas meter) a few basic issues
should be considered. These type of systems basically represent a small (or not so small) distribution system.
Generally these systems have on source of supply and do not contain internal looping (interconnected
supplies). Construction of the basic piping model is essentially the same as for a distribution system - the
application of the “loads’ and settings vary however.
Instead of “customers”, these type of systems are generally connected directly to the demand (equipment).
For this reason, a node is generally placed at each equipment connection. The rated load of the equipment
is generally known and the supply pressure is nearly allows known.
When modeling a distribution system, it is seldom considered that all of the demands will be in service at
the same time. However, with fuel piping systems, depending on the number and nature of the equipment
that is attached, it is not unusual for all of the demands supplied by a fuel piping system to be on at the same
time. The fewer the number of appliances or equipment supplied by the system, the greater the chance that
all of the devices will be on at same point in time.
When setting up a model of a fuel piping system, generally a node is placed at each appliance or equipment
connection. The load is usually set as known, and the pressure as unknown at these locations. A node is
placed at the supply point, and the pressure is set as known and equal to the delivery value. The appliance
nodes generally represent the connection to the appliance control valve or regulator. The supply node
generally represents the outlet of meter or the service regulator, which ever is further downstream.
GASWorkS provides two pipe flow equations specifically applicable to modeling fuel piping systems - the
IMC-HP and IMC-LP equations. These equations are recognized by most mechanical and fuel gas codes. The
Oliphant equation is often cited as applicable to “plant” piping operating at pressures ranging from vacuum
to 100 psig.
418
Network Primer
Working With Transmission Systems...
When working with transmission systems, a few basic issues should be considered. For this discussion a
transmission system is basically considered as that portion of the overall gas system that carries gas from a
gathering system or group of systems to a processing plant, distribution system, or another transmission
system - or from another transmission line or plant to a distribution system. It characteristically contains
larger diameter pipe, operating at comparably high pressure, has long distances between connections or
interconnections, and may contain one or compressor stations. Construction of the basic piping model is
essentially the same as for any system - the application of the “loads’ and settings vary however.
The steady-state nature of the GASWorkS solution routine is suitable for modeling a transmission system
with those characteristics - steady, non-transitory operating conditions. GASWorkS is not suitable for
modeling transient conditions.
Transmission systems generally have a few sources of supply and a few demand points, often with
compressors between the two. A supply point is generally modeled as a node point with a known pressure
and unknown load. Demand points are generally modeled as a node point with a known load value and the
pressure value set as unknown.
When including compressors, generally the load on the inlet (suction) and outlet (discharge) side of the
compressor is set as known and zero - and the outlet (discharge) pressure is set as known. When entering a
compressor element, the From Node must represent the inlet (suction) side of the compressor, and the To
Node must represent the outlet (discharge) side of the compressor. A pressure must be known between each
section of the model separated by a compressor.
GASWorkS provides three compressor equations. Two require empirical data from a compressor operating
curve. One, the “Theoretic”, uses only theoretic compression characteristics. The Theoretic will provide good
“rule-of-thumb” values when used judiciously. GASWorkS models all compressors as a “black-box” and
does not use any of the compressor characteristics in the hydraulic analysis.
Various flow equations are available for modeling transmission style systems. The operating pressure and
system characteristics must be considered when selecting the appropriate flow equation. There are a variety
of equations available to model gas pressures and flows. You will need to select the equation that best suits
your specific application. Refer to the “Equation Application Reference” provided later in the Appendix for
discussion and suggestions on selecting an appropriate flow equation.
419
Network Primer
Often transmission systems operate at pressure values sufficient to include the affect of compressibility in
the pipe flow calculations. GASWorkS provides several methods for including the effect of compressibility.
Several of the equations require that a gas composition be present in order to support the calculation. These
values are saved in a gas properties file. Use the Gas Properties menu item in the Analysis menu list to create
and save a gas properties file. The file must be named the same as the model it is to be used with. Currently
the most accurate method of representing compressibility supported by GASWorkS is the AGA Detailed
method. The worst method is the GPSA method. Using the GPSA method will yield unconservative results
at pressure ranges over about 400 psig. Ignoring compressibility all together, will yield conservative results.
Sometimes compressibility will be ignored during design analysis, to yield conservative results - but will be
included when trying to match existing conditions. Use of compressibility will slow down the solution
process and will increase the number of iterations required to reach solution.
Many of the pipe flow equations ignore or assume and internal pipe wall roughness value. However, the pipe
wall roughness is actually used by some of the transmission style equations. Recommended values for pipe
wall roughness vary widely. The values included in the standard GASWorkS Pipe Properties Table are as
recommended by the American Gas Association, System Design handbook, Book D-1. The User may revise
any of the standard values as desired. Pipe diameters must be entered as a Size/Type code included in the
Pipe Properties Table, in order for roughness values to be used during the various computation routines.
420
Data Items
GASWorkS Data Items...

GASWorkS uses a propriety database to maintain its files. The database is made up of a number of various
data files (which are described later), with each file containing a set of data fields or items. The basic items
contained in the customer, node, and pipe data files are listed in the following tables.
Customer Data Items

Item Name Item Description Item Type
ID Internal identification number of the customer Numeric - long integer
LINK ID Link identification number of the customer Alphanumeric up to 20
characters
PIPE LINK ID Link identification number of the supplying pipe (main) Alphanumeric up to 20
characters
NODE Load assignment indicator Boolean
LOAD Per Unit Load Numeric - single
precision
LOAD UNITS Per Unit Load dimensional units Dimensional Unit
UNIT COUNT Unit Count Numeric - short integer
LOAD STATUS Load Status Boolean
X X (horizontal) coordinates of the customer’s location Numeric - single
COORDINATE precision
Y Y (vertical) coordinates of the customer’s location Numeric - single
COORDINATE precision
TAP X X (horizontal) coordinates of the service line’s connection Numeric - single
COORDINATE to the main precision
TAP Y Y (vertical) coordinates of the service line’s connection to Numeric - single
COORDINATE the main precision
ATTRIBUTE Attribute connection status Boolean
CONNECTION
STATUS
BRANCH ID Identifies the ID number of a trunk or branch customer Numeric - long integer
421
Data Items
Node Data Items

NODE NAME Descriptive identifier/name Alphanumeric up to 40
characters
PRESSURE Calculated or set pressure value Numeric - single
precision
PRESSURE Dimensional units for pressure value item Dimensional Unit
UNITS
PRESSURE Known/unknown identifier for pressure value Boolean
KNOWN
BASE LOAD Calculated or set load value Numeric - single
precision
BASE LOAD Known/unknown identifier for base load value Boolean
KNOWN
BASE LOAD Design Factor adjustment identifier Boolean
ADJUSTMENT
BASE LOAD On/off identifier for base load value Boolean
STATUS
EXTERNAL Load value from attached customers Numeric - single
LOAD precision
EXTERNAL Design Factor adjustment identifier Boolean
LOAD
ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL On/off identifier for base load value Boolean
LOAD STATUS
LOAD UNITS Dimensional units for base and external loads Dimensional Unit
TEMPERATURE Calculated or set average flowing temperature at the Numeric - single
node location precision
TEMPERATURE Known/unknown identifier for base load value Boolean
KNOWN
ELEVATION Height above sea level at the node location Numeric - single
precision
422
Data Items
Node Data Items

ATMOSPHERIC Calculated atmospheric pressure value associated with Numeric - single
PRESSURE the node’s elevation value precision
SPECIFIC Calculated or set specific gravity value at the node Numeric - single
GRAVITY location precision
VISCOSITY Calculated or set dynamic viscosity gravity value at the Numeric - single
node location precision
HEATING Calculated or set heating value at the node location Numeric - single
VALUE precision
SPECIFIC HEAT Calculated or set specific heat ratio value at the node Numeric - single
RATIO location precision
X X (horizontal) coordinates of the customer’s location Numeric - double
precision
Y Y (vertical) coordinates of the customer’s location Numeric - double
precision
Pipe Data Items

ID Internal identification number of the segment Numeric - long integer
LINK ID Link identification number of the segment Alphanumeric up to 20
characters
FROM NODE Name of From Node of the segment Alphanumeric up to 40
characters
TO NODE Name of To Node of the segment Alphanumeric up to 40
characters
HYDRAULIC TYPE Hydraulic element type Boolean
STATUS On/off indicator for the segment Boolean
FLOW Volumetric flow rate through the segment, at base Numeric - single
conditions precision
FLOW UNITS Dimensional units for flow rate Dimensional Unit
423
Data Items
Pipe Data Items

VELOCITY Maximum velocity associated with the flow through Numeric - single
the segment precision
PRESSURE DROP Linear pressure drop across the segment Numeric - single
precision
COMPRESSIBILITY Average compressibility factor associated with the Numeric - single
segment precision
FACILITY TYPE Facility type assignment Boolean
ATTRIBUTE Attribute connection status Boolean
CONNECTION
SIZE/TYPE Size and type description for the segment. Inside Alphanumeric up to 20
diameter value for pipes if not selected from characters
associated data list.
SET PRESSURE Set pressure for regulator and compressor hydraulic Numeric - single
type elements precision
SET PRESSURE Dimensional units for set pressure values Dimensional Unit
UNITS
EFFICIENCY Hydraulic efficiency for pipes and fittings. Numeric - single
Mechanical efficiency for compressor type elements. precision
FLOW EQUATION Pipe flow equation for pipe and fitting type Equation Name
elements.
DIAMETER UNITS Dimensional units for Size/Type item Dimensional Unit
LENGTH Hydraulic length for the segment Numeric - single
precision
LENGTH UNITS Dimensional units for the length value Dimensional Unit
ALLOW SIZING Allow sizing indicator for pipe type elements Boolean
FITTING COUNT Number of attached fittings for pipe type elements Numeric - short integer
EQUIVALENT Equivalent length of attached fittings for pipe type Numeric - single
LENGTH elements precision
CUSTOMER COUNT Number of customers attached to (supplied by) the Numeric - short integer
segment
424
Data Items
Pipe Data Items

VALVE POSITION Open position for valve type elements Numeric - single
precision
EQUATION Performance equation coefficient for well type Numeric - single
COEFFICIENT elements precision
EQUATION Performance equation exponent for well type Numeric - single
EXPONENT elements precision
Data Type Descriptions

Type Type Description
Alphanumeric up to 20 Represents a group of alphabetic (A - Z) characters and numeric (0 - 10)
characters characters, and some special characters up to 20 characters in length.
Alphanumeric up to 40 Represents a group of alphabetic (A - Z) characters and numeric (0 - 10)
characters characters, and some special characters up to 40 characters in length.
Boolean Represents an either/or type value, such as on/off, yes/no.
Dimensional Unit Represents one of the standard dimensional units supported by GASWorkS.
Equation Name Represents one of the standard pipe flow equations supported by GASWorkS.
Numeric - double Represents a decimal number. See the Program Limitations topic for additional
precision information.
Numeric - long integer Represents a non-decimal (whole) number. See the Program Limitations topic
for additional information.
Numeric - short integer Represents a non-decimal (whole) number. See the Program Limitations topic
for additional information.
Numeric - single Represents a decimal number. See the Program Limitations topic for additional
precision information.
425
Dimensional Units
Supported Dimensional Units...

GASWorkS uses a “standard” set of dimensional units for its internal calculations. When a value expressed
in a different unit is encountered, it is converted internally for use by GASWorkS. The following table lists
the supported dimensional units and the conversion factors used for internal use:
Unit Group Supported Types Conversion Factor

Distance - Diameter, Roughness Centimeter, cm .3937
Feet, ft 12
Inches, in 1
Meters, Metres, m 39.37
Microns .00003937
Millimeter, mm .03937
Distance - Length, Elevation Centimeter, cm .03281
Feet, ft 1
Inches, in 1/12
Kilometers, km 3281
Meters, Metres, m 3.281
Miles, mi 5280
Efficiency, Usage Decimal 1
Percent, % - Percent, % .01
Energy Btu .00001
kWh .03142
MBtu .01
MMBtu .1
Therms 1
426
Dimensional Units

Flow Rate - Pipe Flow, Node Load, Ccf/mo 100/(365.256 / 12 * 24)
Customer Load
Cfd .041667
Cfh 1
Cfm 60
Kilowatts, KW 3.4152
Liters/min 2.1186
M3/d, M3d 1.47125
M^3/hr, M3/hr, M3h 35.31
Mcfd 41.667
Mcfh 1000
Mcf/mo 1000/(365.256 / 12 * 24)
Mm3/d, Mm3d 1471.25
Mm3h 35310
MMm3/d, MMm3d 1471250
MMcfd 41667
MMcfh 1000000
Heating Value Btu/cf 1
Btu/m^3 1 / 35.31
Joules/cf .0009486
Joules/m^3 .0009486 / 35.31
kJoules/cf, kJ/cf .9486
kJoules/m^3, kJ/m^3 .9486 / 35.31
MBtu/m^3 .00002832
MJoule/m^3, MJ/m^3 1000 / (1.0548 * 35.31)
427
Dimensional Units

Pressure - Pipe Pressure Drop, Node Atmosphere, atm 14.7
Pressure`
Bar 14.5
Feet H2O, ft-wc .4335
Inches H2O, in-wc .03613
Inches HG, in-HG .04912
Kg/cm^2 14.22
Kg/m^2 .00142
KPa .145
Millibar, mBar .0145
mm H20 .03937 / 27.707
mm HG .03937 * .491154
MPa 145
Osi .0625
Pascals, pa .000145
Psi 1
Temperature - Node Temperature Celsius, C °C * 1.8 + 491.67
Fahrenheit, F °F + 459.67
Kelvin, K °K * 1.8
Rankine, R 1
Viscosity Centipoise, cpoise, cp .000672
Lbf-sec/Ft^2 32.2
Lbm/Ft-sec 1
Micropoise 6.72E-08
Pascal-sec, pa-sec .672
428
Dimensional Units
Standard GASWorkS Units...

The following table describes the standard or "native" units used by GASWorkS in its solution and
calculation routines. All other units are converted to these native units during the computations, then
converted back to the original units when the computation is complete.
Parameter Type Standard Dimensional Unit

Customer Loads Cfh
Energy Therms
Heating Value Btu/cf
Node Pressure Psi
Node Load Cfh
Node Elevation Feet
Node Temperature Rankine
Other Temperatures Rankine
Other Pressures Psi
Pipe Diameter Inches
Pipe Roughness Inches
Pipe Length Feet
Pipe Efficiency Decimal
Pipe Flow Cfh
Pressure Drop Psi
Viscosity Lbm/ft-sec
429
Pipe Flow Equations
Pipe Flow Equations...

GASWorkS supports numerous industry standard pipe flow equations which are used to calculate the flow
and pressure drop of "Pipe" and "Fitting" type elements. Each equation is unique and may have individual
limitations associated with its use. The following pages describe the various equations supported by
GASWorkS. The User must determine the appropriate equation to use for the application being analyzed.
Unless noted otherwise, the following base units and variable assignments apply to each equation description.
Descriptions for Regulator, Valve, Compressor, Well and various supporting equations are presented later
in the Appendix.
The following variable definitions apply to all of the equations described on the following pages:
Cp = Constant pressure specific heat, dimensionless

Cv = Constant volume specific heat, dimensionless
D = Inside pipe diameter, Inches
)P = Pressure drop across a pipe segment, Psia squared or Psia
)T = Temperature drop across a regulator, Degrees Fahrenheit
e = 2.71828
, = Internal pipe wall roughness, Inches
E = Pipe efficiency, percent / 100
E1 = Pipe inlet elevation, Feet
E2 = Pipe outlet elevation, Feet
Ev = Valve throttling factor
f = Fanning friction factor, dimensionless
G = Specific gravity, dimensionless
HP = Power, Horsepower
k = specific heat ratio, dimensionless
L = Pipe length, Feet
Q = Volumetric flow rate, Cfh
P1 = Pipe inlet pressure, Psia
P2 = Pipe outlet pressure, Psia
Patm = Average atmospheric pressure, Psia
Pave = Average pressure along the pipeline segment, Psia
Pb = Base pressure, Psia
R = Compression ratio, dimensionless
Re = Reynolds number, dimensionless
S = Elevation compensation factor, dimensionless
Tf = Average gas flowing temperature, Rankine
Tb = Base temperature, Rankine
: = Absolute (dynamic) viscosity, Lbm/foot-second
Z = Compressibility factor, dimensionless
430
Pipe Flow Equations
Adjustment For Elevation...

Where an elevation difference exists between the inlet and outlet of a pipe segment, and the normal pressure
difference ()P) is a function of the difference of the squared inlet pressure and the squared outlet pressure
()P = P12 - P22 ), the pressure difference ()P) and length (L) terms in the flow equation are replaced with the
following:
Reference: Industrial Press, Gas Engineers Handbook
AGA-Fully Turb...
The AGA Fully Turbulent flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Gas Processors Suppliers Association, Engineering Data Book
Note: This equation is similar to the AGA-Turbulent equation.
431
Pipe Flow Equations
AGA-Partially Turb...
The AGA Partially Turbulent flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
AGA-Turbulent...
The AGA Turbulent flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Note: This equation is similar to the AGA-Fully Turb equation.
432
Pipe Flow Equations
Colebrook....
The Colebrook (Colebrook-White) flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
IGE3-General...
The IGE3 General equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: (British) Institute Of Gas Engineers Standard - IGE/TD/3
Note: This equation is similar to the IGE3-MP equation.
433
Pipe Flow Equations
IGE3-LP...
The IGE3 Low Pressure equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
IGE3-MP...
The IGE3 Medium Pressure equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Note: This equation is similar to the IGE3-General equation.
434
Pipe Flow Equations
IGT-Improved...
The IGT-Improved flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Gas Age Magazine, May 1967, Gas Behavior In Distribution Systems
IMC-HP...
The IMC High Pressure equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: International Code Council, International Mechanical Code, 1996
IMC-LP...
The IMC Low Pressure equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: International Code Council, International Mechanical Code, 1996
435
Pipe Flow Equations
Mueller-HP...
The Mueller High Pressure flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: American Gas Association, GEOP Series, Book D-1, 1990
Mueller-LP...
The Mueller Low Pressure flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: American Gas Association, GEOP Series, Book D-1, 1990
Oliphant...
The Oliphant equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
436
Pipe Flow Equations
Panhandle-A...
The Panhandle-A flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Panhandle-B...
The Panhandle-B flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Pole-LP...
The Pole Low Pressure equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
437
Pipe Flow Equations
Spitzglass-HP...
The Spitzglass High Pressure equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Spitzglass-LP...
The Spitzglass Low Pressure equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
438
Pipe Flow Equations
Weymouth...
The Weymouth flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Gas Processor Suppliers Association, Engineering Data Book
439
Pipe Flow Equations
Equation Application Reference...

The following table provides application notes and comments for each of the equations supported by
GASWorkS. This table represents only a portion of the universe of equations available for calculating
pressure and flows in gas piping systems. Equations are added to GASWorkS based on User requests. If a
User requires a specific equation and the equation can be documented, we will add it to the software - that
is how we have ended up with so many equations being supported by the software.
Equation Name Application Comments

AGA-Fully Turbulent Applicable to transmission systems with fully turbulent flow conditions.
(AGA-Full) Accounts for relative pipe roughness using rough pipe law. This form of the
equation allows input of the pipe wall roughness value. Depending on the
pipe wall roughness, yields moderately conservative results compared to
other transmission style equations.
AGA-Partially Turbulent Applicable to transmission systems with partially turbulent flow conditions.
(AGA-Partial) Accounts for relative pipe roughness using the smooth pipe law. Moderately
conservative compared to other transmission style equations.
AGA-Turbulent Applicable to transmission systems with fully turbulent flow conditions. Use
a fixed relative pipe roughness with the rough pipe law. Moderately
conservative compared to other transmission style equations.
Colebrook Applicable to transmission systems. Applies the Moody friction factor to the
Fundamental Gas Flow equation, using the Colebrook-White approximation.
Results vary based on value of roughness.
IGE3 - General Applicable to general distribution systems. Developed by the British Gas
Engineers Institute. Recommended for pressures less than or equal to 101.5
psig (7 mBar).
IGE3 - Low Pressure Applicable to low pressure distribution systems. Developed by the British
Gas Engineers Institute. A modified version of the IGE3 - General equation
for use at pressures less than or equal to 1.1 psig (75 mBar)
IGE3 - Medium Pressure Applicable to medium pressure distribution systems. Developed by the
British Gas Engineers Institute. Basically a renamed version of the IGE3 -
General equation for use at pressures greater than 1.1 psig (75 mBar) and less
than or equal to 29 psig (2 mBar)
440
Pipe Flow Equations

IGT-Improved Applicable to distribution systems, though often used for all types of systems
operating between 1 to 500 psig. Yields moderate results. Developed in the
1960's.
The Gas Engineers Handbook notes that this equation is widely used for ten
inch water column to sixty Psig systems for two inch and larger diameter
pipe.
The AGA GEOP text reports that this equation is applicable to distribution
systems where the Reynolds numbers range between 16000 and 3000000
with 2% deviation from the smooth pipe law, and for 3 to 30 inch diameter
pipe operating at inches water column, 1-½ to 20 inch diameter pipe
operating between 2 and 20 Psig, and 3/4 to 120 inch diameter pipe operating
between 20 and 100 Psig.
Reynolds number dependent.

IMC-Low Pressure Applicable to fuel piping systems operating at less 1.5 Psig (10 kPa).
IMC-High Pressure Applicable to fuel piping systems operating at 1.5 Psig (10 kPa) and higher.
Mueller High Pressure Applicable to distribution systems. Yields non-conservative results.
The Gas Engineers Handbook reports that the equation is accurate in “low”
pressure systems for up to eight inch pipe, and in “medium” pressures for up
to two inch pipe.
systems where the Reynolds numbers range between 2000 and 125000 with
2% deviation from the smooth pipe law, and for 3/8 to 6 inch diameter pipe
operating at inches water column, 3/8 to 2 inch diameter pipe operating
between 2 and 20 Psig, and 3/8 to 1-½ inch diameter pipe operating between
20 and 100 Psig.

Mueller Low Pressure Applicable to distribution systems. Yields non-conservative results.
Derived from Mueller High Pressure equation as outlined in AGA GEOP

text.
441
Pipe Flow Equations

Oliphant Applicable to plant piping and gathering systems operating between vacuum
and 100 Psig. Yields conservative results.
Not Reynolds number dependent - diameter dependent.

Panhandle - A Applicable to transmission systems. Yields moderate results. Developed in
the 1940's.
The Gas Engineers Handbook reports that the equation is applicable for large
diameter transmission piping where the Reynolds number varies between 5
and 20 million. And suggests an average efficiency for steel pipelines of .92
for this equation.
The GPSA Data Book reports that this equation is intended to reflect flow of
gas through smooth pipes. When used with an efficiency of .90 the equation
reasonably approximates the partially turbulent general flow equation. The
equation becomes less accurate as the flow rate increases. And, an efficiency
of .92 is often used with this equation.
systems where the Reynolds numbers range between 1300000 and 75000000
with 2% deviation from the smooth pipe law. And 16 inch and larger
diameter pipe operating between 20 Psig and higher.

Panhandle - B Applicable to transmission systems. Revised version of Panhandle-A,
published in 1956. Depending on the flow rate, can be the least conservative
transmission equation.
The Gas Engineers Handbook notes that the equation is applicable for large
diameter transmission piping where the Reynolds number varies between 5
and 20 million. And suggests an average efficiency for steel pipelines of .90
for this equation.
The GPSA Data Book notes that this equation more nearly approximates the
fully turbulent general flow equation. The equation will under-estimate flow
rates at low flow rates, and over estimate flow rates at high flow rates.
Efficiency factors of .88 to .94 are often used with this equation.
442
Pipe Flow Equations

Pole Low Pressure Applicable to fuel and yard line piping operating below 3 Psig. Yields
conservative results.
The Gas Engineers Handbook notes that this equation is widely used for four
to ten water column pressure systems for two to four inch diameter pipe. And
is applicable with effective pipe roughness values of up to ten times that of
clean steel pipe.
Not Reynolds number dependent - constant friction/transmission factor.

Spitzglass Low Pressure Applicable to low pressure distribution systems operating below 3 Psig.
Yields moderate results.
The Gas Engineers Handbook reports that this equation is widely used for
systems operating under one Psig.
The AGA GEOP text reports that this equation was developed from flow tests
on large diameter cast iron pipe operated at inches water column pressures
and partially turbulent flow conditions. And was originally used in flow
calculations in low pressure cast iron systems. The text also reports that the
equation yields extremely conservative results for 16 inch and larger diameter
pipes, and yields unconservative results for pipes sizes less than 16 inch.

Spitzglass High Pressure Applicable to distribution systems operating below 100 Psig. Yields
conservative results.
The Gas Engineers Handbook reports that this equation is widely used for up
to ten inch diameter pipe. And is applicable with effective pipe roughness
values of up to ten times that of clean steel pipe.

Weymouth Applicable to transmission systems, though often used for distribution,
gathering, and transmission. Yields conservative results. Equation published
in 1912.
The Gas Engineers Handbook reports that this equation provides a reasonable
approximation of the general rough pipe equation for diameter equal to ten
inch, and effective pipe wall roughness equal .002 inches. And that the
equation is widely used for three to twenty Psig systems. And suggests an
average efficiency for steel pipelines of 1.10 for this equation.
443
Pipe Flow Equations

The GPSA Data Book reports that for short pipelines and gathering systems
this equation agrees closely with metered volumes. However, the degree of
error increases with pressure.
The AGA GEOP text reports that the applicable efficiency factor for this
equation is 1.00 for thirty-six inch diameter pipe and can range from 1.10 to
2.00 for thirty inch and smaller pipe in transmission service. That the
efficiency factor ranges between 1.1 and 1.2 for two to six inch diameter pipe
in distribution service. And further suggests that the equation is not
applicable to calculations in distribution systems.
Not a Reynolds number dependent equation.
Other References...
American Gas Association, Gas Engineering and Operating Series, System Design Volume, Book D-1
American Gas Association, Steady Flow In Gas Pipelines, Technical Report No. 10
British Gas Engineers Institute, Standard IGE/TD/3, Recommendations On Transmission And Distribution
Practice
Crane Technical Paper No. 410, Flow Of Fluids Through Valves, Fittings, And Pipe
Gas Engineers Handbook, Industrial Press
Gas Processors Suppliers Association, Engineering Data Book, Volume II
Pipeline Rules of Thumb Handbook, Gulf Publishing
444
Pipe Flow Equations
Recommendations...
As can be seen by the number and variety of flow equations listed in the previous table, there seems to be
no certain flow equation that accurately reflects all of the conditions that can be present in a gas piping
system. Obviously there is not one equation that meets all requirements, or there wouldn’t be such a variety
to choose from. For that reason, the User must ultimately compare their specific application to each
equation’s performance and select an appropriate equation. Further, it is extremely difficult to recommend
a flow equation because of the variety of applications that Users might encounter. However, generally we
make the following recommendations - use at your own risk:
Application Equation
Low Pressure Distribution Spitzglass Low Pressure
(less than 3 Psig)
Medium and High Pressure Distribution IGT-Improved
(3 to 100 Psig)
Low Pressure Transmission IGT-Improved
(100 to 300 Psig)
High Pressure Transmission Panhandle - A
(300 Psig and greater)
Vacuum Gathering Oliphant
Low Pressure Gathering IGT-Improved
(less than 100 Psig)
High Pressure Gathering IGT-Improved or Weymouth
(100 Psig and greater)
Vacuum Plant Piping Oliphant
Low Pressure Plant or Fuel Piping IMC Low Pressure
(less than 1.5 Psig)
Medium Pressure Plant or Fuel Piping IMC High Pressure or IGT-Improved
(1.5 to 10 Psig)
High Pressure Plant or Fuel Piping Oliphant or IGT-Improved
(10 to 100 Psig)
445
Regulator Equations
Regulator Flow Equations...

The equations used by GASWorkS to calculate the flow and pressure drop across Regulator type elements
are described on the following pages:
Grove...
The Grove Regulator flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Grove Bulletin No. 900TE/S, Sizing The Grove Model 900 TE
446
Regulator Equations
Grove80...
An additional Grove flow equation known as the “Grove80" equation is also used by GASWorkS for some
Grove regulators. The equation is described as follows...
Reference: Grove Bulletin No. 816A, Natural Gas Capacity Tables For Grove Flexflo Pilot Operated
Regulators
447
Regulator Equations
Rockwell...
The Rockwell regulator flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Rockwell Regulator Bulletin - Model 441-57S
Universal...
The Universal regulator flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Mooney Controls, Sizing - Compressible Gases
448
Valve Equations
Valve Flow Equations...

The equations used by GASWorkS to calculate the flow and pressure drop across Valve type elements are
described on the following pages:
Crane...
The Crane valve flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Crane Technical Paper No. 410, Flow of Fluids Through Valves, Fittings, and Pipe
Grove-Reg...
When modeling wide-open or otherwise upset regulators using the Grove flow equation, GASWorkS uses
the following flow-pressure relationship...
Reference: Grove Bulletin No. 900TE/S, Sizing The Grove Model 900 TE
449
Valve Equations
Rockwell...
The Rockwell valve flow equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Rockwell Publication V-117-R3, Flow Characteristics of Rockwell Plug Valves
RW-Reg...
When modeling wide-open or otherwise upset regulators using the Rockwell flow equation, GASWorkS uses
Reference: Rockwell Regulator Bulletins
450
Valve Equations
Univ-Reg...
Note that the Univ-Reg equation is an approximation of the "standard" Universal Valve Sizing equation.
When modeling wide-open or otherwise upset regulators using the Univ-Reg flow equation, GASWorkS uses
Reference: None
451
Valve Equations
Valve Throttling Factor...

The following table summarizes the values of the Throttling Factor, based on the specified %-Open value.
This relationship actually only applies to venturi type plug valves, however in the absence of information
for other valve types, it is used by GASWorkS as an approximate value for all valve types.
%-Open Value Throttling Factor Value, Ev

100 1.0
90 1.0
80 .55
70 .33
60 .21
50 .12
40 .06
30 .04
20 .03
10 .02
0 0
Reference: Rockwell Publication V-117-R3, Flow Characteristics of Rockwell Plug Valves
452
Compressor Equations
Compressor Power Equations...

The equations used by GASWorkS to estimate compressor power requirements are described on the
following pages:
Empirical1...
The “Empirical 1" compressor power equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: None - Hand-me-down
Empirical2...
The “Empirical 2" compressor power equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: Gulf Publishing Company, Pipe Line Rules of Thumb Handbook
453
Compressor Equations
Theoretic...
The Theoretic compressor power equation used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Reference: McGraw-Hill, De Laval Engineering Handbook
454
Well Equations
Well Equation...
GASWorkS supports only one well equation, it is described below. The equation constants are calculated
from a multi-point fit of the well's performance curve.
455
Support Equations
Support Equations...
GASWorkS uses several equations to support its various flow, pressure drop, and power equations. These
support equations are described on the following pages.
Atmospheric Pressure...
As used by GASWorkS, the atmospheric pressure refers to the pressure that the atmosphere exerts on an
object at a given elevation. Sometimes referred to as barometric pressure, but not the same as the value
reported by the weatherman. As used in most analysis in the gas industry, the “atmospheric pressure”
represents the pressure associated with a “standard” atmosphere, not the actual atmosphere (which changes
constantly). The atmosphere extends from the surface of the earth to the edge of outer space. The
approximate depth (or height) of the atmosphere is 25 miles (132,000 feet). At sea level the atmospheric
pressure is about 14.7 Psia, this is the pressure exerted on an object at sea level. It represents the weight of
the 25 miles of atmosphere above the object. As an object is elevated, the amount of atmosphere above it,
and therefore the weight upon it is reduced. Because the weight of the atmosphere upon the object at its new
elevation is reduced, the amount of pressure exerted on the elevated object is also reduced.
The same holds true for changes in the geographic elevation of a gas piping system. As the elevation of the
system increases, the atmospheric pressure decreases. Gas is a compressible fluid, as such its physical
properties are affected by the amount of pressure exerted on it. As an example, a cubic foot of gas collected
in a balloon at 6000 feet, will contract to a volume less than the original one cubic foot when transported to
a lower elevation. Why? Because it is a compressible fluid and at the decreased elevation, the pressure
exerted on the balloon is greater than its original collection elevation, compressing the gas in the balloon.
The inverse holds true for an increase in elevation. If the balloon were to be elevated, the original cubic foot
of gas would expand because of a decrease in the atmospheric pressure at the new, higher elevation.
Because changes in atmospheric pressure affect the properties of the gas, they need to be compensated for
when modeling a system. GASWorkS uses the node elevation values to calculate the atmospheric pressure
for each node. Where significant elevation changes are present in the system, the elevation for each node
should be determined and applied. Where elevation changes are not significant, an average elevation may
be determined and applied to all nodes.
Unfortunately there are several methods available to estimate the atmospheric pressure at elevated heights
above sea level. Each method provides different values and disagree on the value at sea level. Fortunately,
in pipe flow calculations, the actual absolute value of the atmospheric pressure generally is not critical, so
long as the relative differences between various elevation values are representative. The atmospheric pressure
equations supported by GASWorkS are listed on the following pages.
456
Support Equations
Atmospheric Pressure - AGA Method...

The Atmospheric Pressure as calculated by the AGA method is as follows...
Reference: American Gas Association, GEOP Series, Measurement, Book M-1
Atmospheric Pressure - Handbook Of Chemistry & Physics Method...

The Atmospheric Pressure as calculated by the Handbook Of Chemistry & Physics method is as follows...
Reference: CRC, Handbook of Chemistry & Physics, 73rd Edition
Atmospheric Pressure - ISHM Method...

The Atmospheric Pressure as calculated by the ISHM method is as follows...
Reference: International School of Hydrocarbon Measurement, Practical Methods, Report 4
457
Support Equations
Average Pressure...
Often computations made by GASWorkS require the determination of the average pressure value along a
pipe segment. When required, the average pressure is calculated as follows...
Pipe Flow Velocity...

The pipe flow velocities reported by GASWorkS are calculated as follows...
Reference: None - Derived
Pipe Hoop Stress...

The pipe hoop stress reported by GASWorkS is calculated as follows...
458
Support Equations
Pipe Volume...
The pipe volume reported by GASWorkS is calculated as follows...
Reynolds Number....
The Reynolds Number as used by GASWorkS is described as follows...
Specific Heat Values...

Often computations made by GASWorkS require the use of either the specific heat ratio or an individual
specific heat value. When required, these values are calculated as follows...
Reference: McGraw-Hill, De Laval Engineering Handbook
459
Compressibility Methods
Compressibility Methods...
Natural gas mixtures deviate from the ideal gas laws. This deviation becomes more pronounced at elevated
pressures. The compressibility factor is used to accommodate for these deviations. GASWorkS allows
selection of one of several methods to calculate the compressibility factor when applicable. These support
equations are described on the following pages.
AGA8-Detailed...
The AGA8-Detailed method used by GASWorkS is too extensive to describe here. The method is derived
from the American Gas Association’s Report 8, 1992 revised edition. To use this method a common gas
properties file must be assigned to the model. Select The Calculate Properties item from the Analysis menu
list to create and save the required gas property file. This method requires a complete description of all of
the components found in the gas mixture.
AGA8-Gross1...
The AGA8-Gross1 used by GASWorkS is to extensive too describe here. The method is derived from the
American Gas Association’s Report 8, 1992 revised edition. To use this method a common gas properties
file must be assigned to the model. Select The Calculate Properties item from the Analysis menu list to
create and save the required gas property file. This method requires that the heating value, specific gravity,
and the carbon dioxide component of the gas mixture be identified.
AGA8-Gross2...
The AGA8-Gross2 method used by GASWorkS is too extensive to describe here. The method is derived from
the American Gas Association’s Report 8, 1992 revised edition. To use this method a common gas properties
file must be assigned to the model. Select The Calculate Properties item from the Analysis menu list to
create and save the required gas property file. This method requires that specific gravity, and the carbon
dioxide and nitrogen components of the gas mixture be identified.
460
Compressibility Methods
GPSA...
The GPSA method used by GASWorkS is calculated as follows...
461
Temperature Calculations
Temperature Calculations...
GASWorkS uses several equations to support its various temperature (thermal) calculations. These support
equations are described on the following pages.
Average Temperature...
Often computations made by GASWorkS require the determination of the average temperature value along
a pipe segment. When required, the average temperature is calculated as follows...
Compressor Temperature Gain...

The outlet temperature of a compressor is estimated as follows...
462
Program Files
Inner Wall Convection...

The temperature drop or gain along a pipe segment using the “inner wall convection” method is estimated
as follows...
Reference:
This method predicts the temperature loss or gain along a pipe segment and assume that the pipe wall
temperature remains constant, and that the heat transfer occurs by convection between the flowing gas and
the inner pipe wall.
463
Program Files
Jacobs Two-Phase Soil...

The temperature drop or gain along a pipe segment using the “Jacobs two-phase soil” method is estimated
as follows...
Reference: Proceedings Of Pipeline Simulation Interest Group 1981 Annual Meeting, Thermal - Hydraulic
Modeling Of A Pipeline, E Gordan et. al.
464
Program Files
This equation can be used to calculate flowing gas temperatures for a buried pipeline where the soil above
the pipe contains both frozen and unfrozen soil. When using this method the burial depth, surface
temperature, and soil thermal conductivities are assumed to remain constant along the pipe segment.
Joule-Thomson Temperature Drop...

The temperature drop across regulators and along pipe segments is estimated by the following relationship.
Note that this is an approximate equation and is only valid for natural gas mixtures composed largely of
methane.
465
Program Files
GASWorkS Files...
The following table describes the various files used by GASWorkS. Depending on the nature and features
included in a specific model, and the routines used, some these files may not always be present.
Category File Name Description

Program Files gw90.exe The GASWorkS program file.
gwgdi.dll Contains The GASWorkS Graphical Data Interface
functions.
gws.dll Contains the GASWorkS solution functions.
gwlic.dll Contains the GASWorkS license information.
Model Data Files *.hdr Header data file.
*.cdt Customer model data file.
*.ndt Node data file.
*.pdt Pipe data file.
Non-model Data *.cdb Linked customer attribute data file.
Files
*.fac Facility list and settings.
*.ftg Attached fitting information.
*.gtx User Text file.
*.nts Model notes file.
*.pdb Linked pipe (main) attribute data file.
*.prp Gas Properties file.
*.ugd User graphics file.
*.vdt Attribute valve file.
*.vtx Vertex location file.
466
Program Files

Property (Look-Up) *.cpf Compressor Look-Up table.
Tables
*.fpf Fitting Look-Up table.
*.ppf Pipe Properties Look-Up table.
*.rpf Regulator Look-Up table.
*.vpf Valve Look-Up table.
*.wpf Well Look-Up table.
Support Files *.cat Customer attribute data file settings.
*.chk Data Check error file.
*.dck Data Check settings.
*.dfs Saved default data settings.
*.dft Default data settings.
*.err, *.etp Node error file.
*.exc Solution exceptions file.
*.fck Temporary file used by some file management
routines.
*.grf Graphic settings file.
*.img Background image settings file.
*.pat Pipe attribute data file settings.
*.pfs Preference settings file.
*.prj Project specification file.
*.prp Gas properties file.
*.pvw Model graphic preview file.
*.qry Saved query specification.
*.slg Solution Log file.
*.sum Summary report settings.
*.tmp Used by various routines to store temporary data.
*.trc Trace Results file.
467
Program Files

*.unq.txt Unassigned customer file. Created during execution of
the “Update External Loads” routine
.vew Saved graphic view file.
Screen Initialization gw_cfg.ini Contains GASWorkS settings and default values.
Files
gw_gcfg.ini Contains Graphics Screen settings.
*.ini Contains default values for various GASWorkS
routines.
Back-Up Files *.*.bak Back-Up data file.
468
Look-Up Tables
Standard Look-Up Tables...

The "standard" Look-Up tables provided with GASWorkS provide a basis for building your own tables. The
values contained in the tables may be modified or new items may be added. The various types included in
the standard tables are described on the following pages. The data values associated with each type can be
viewed or printed by selecting the Look-Up Table item from the Report menu list.
Note that items are continually added to the tables as Users request additional items. The data contained in
the actual tables included with your version of the software may vary slightly from the tables described on
the following pages. In spite of these variations, the table descriptions will hopefully provide insight into the
convention used in deriving the various size/type codes.
Compressor Table...
Size/Type Code Meaning

Empirical1 Generic compressor using the “Empirical1" power equation
Empirical2 Generic compressor using the “Empirical2" power equation
Theoretic Generic compressor using the “Theoretic” power equation
Fitting Table...

Elbows
1.5 L-90 Long radius elbow, 90°, 1-½", standard wall, weld end
2 L-45 Long radius elbow, 45°, 2", standard wall, weld end
469
Look-Up Tables

470
Look-Up Tables

Reducers
2 Rx1 Concentric reducer, 2" to 1", standard wall, weld end
3 Rx1.5 Concentric reducer, 3" to 1-½", standard wall, weld end
471
Look-Up Tables

Tees
1.5 T Header leg of a standard Tee, 1-½", standard wall, weld end
1.5 TB Branch leg of a standard Tee, 1-½", standard wall, weld end
2T Header leg of a standard Tee, 2", standard wall, weld end
2 TB Branch leg of a standard Tee, 2", standard wall, weld end
10 T Header leg of a standard Tee, 10", standard wall, weld end
472
Look-Up Tables

473
Look-Up Tables

Valves
1.5 V-Plug Generic plug valve, 1-½" body
2 V-Angle Generic angle valve, 2" body
2 V-Ball Generic ball valve, 2" body
2 V-Chck-B Generic ball check valve, 2" body
2 V-Chck-S Generic swing check valve, 2" body
2 V-Gate Generic gate valve, 2" body
2 V-Globe Generic globe valve, 2" body
2 V-Plug Generic plug valve, 2" body
474
Look-Up Tables

10 V-Ck-B Generic ball check valve, 10" body
10 V-Ck-S Generic swing check valve, 10" body
475
Look-Up Tables

476
Look-Up Tables

477
Look-Up Tables

Pipe Properties Table...

Note that where manufacturer’s tolerances were available, they were used to derived the most conservative
inside diameter values. Some values, particularly for plastic type pipes, will vary slightly from standard
nominal sizes.

PE Plastic Sizes
1/2P-CTS ½" plastic, CTS size spec, SDR-7
1/2P ½" plastic, IPS size spec, SDR-9.3
3/4P 3/4" plastic, IPS size spec, SDR-11
3/4P 3/4" plastic, CTS size spec, SDR-11
1P 1" plastic, IPS size spec, SDR-11
1.25P 1-1/4" plastic, IPS size spec, SDR-10
1.5P 1-½" plastic, IPS size spec
2P 2" plastic, IPS size spec, SDR11
3P 3" plastic, IPS size spec, SDR-11.5
8P 8" plastic, IPS size spec, SDR-11
478
Look-Up Tables

Steel Sizes
1/2S-160 ½" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 160
1/2S-XS ½" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 80
1/2S ½" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 40
3/4S-XS 3/4" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 80
3/4S 3/4" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 40
1S-160 1" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 160
1S-XS 1" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 80
1S 1" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 40
1.25S-XS 1-1 /4" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 80
1.25S 1-1/4" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 40
1.5S-XS 1-½" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 80
1.5S 1-½" steel, IPS size spec, Schedule 40
2.5S-XS 2-½" steel, IPS spec, Schedule 80
2.5S 2-½" steel, IPS spec, Schedule 40
3S-.188 3" steel, IPS size spec, 0.188" wall thickness
479
Look-Up Tables

12S-XS 12" steel, IPS size spec, Weight Class XS
12S 12" steel, IPS size spec, Weight Class STD
480
Look-Up Tables

481
Look-Up Tables

Metric PE Plastic Sizes

25P-11 25mm, SDR 11
32P-11 32mm, SDR 11
63P-11 63mm, SDR 11
90P-11 90mm, SDR 11
90P-17 90mm, SDR 17
125P-11 125mm, SDR 11
125P-17 125mm, SDR 17
180P-11 180mm, SDR 11
180P-17 180mm, SDR 17
250P-11 250mm, SDR 11
250P-17 250mm, SDR 17
315P-11 315mm, SDR 11
315P-17 315mm, SDR 17
Regulator Table...
Only a sampling of regulator makes and models have been included in the “standard” Regulator Table.
Additional models can be added by the User.

FC 1-1098 Fisher Controls, 1"-1098, standard cage, size 40 actuator, red spring
482
Look-Up Tables

FC 99-7/8 Fisher Controls, 2"-99, standard 7/8"
FC 99-9/8 Fisher Controls, 2"-99, standard 1-1/8"
GR 1-83 Grove Model 83, 1"
GR 1.5-83 Grove Model 83, 1-½"
GR 2-900TE Grove Model 900 Top Entry Flexflo, 2", ribbed tube
MN 1-FG Mooney Flowgrid, 1" body, 1" NPT ends
MN 1-FG250 Mooney Flowgrid 250, 1" body, 1" NPT ends
MN 1.25-FG Mooney Flowgrid, 1 1/4" body, 1-1/4" NPT ends
MN 125-250 Mooney Flowgrid 250, 1 1/4" body, 1-1/4" NPT ends
MN 1.5-250 Mooney Flowgrid 250, 1 ½" body, 1-½" NPT ends
MN 2-DP Mooney Dual Port Flowgrid, 2" body
MN 2-SP Mooney Single Port Flowgrid, 2" body
MN 3-FG Mooney CL 150-600 Flowgrid, 3" body
RW 2-44157 Rockwell 441-57S, 2" body, 1-3/4" valve
RW 4-44157 Rockwell 441-57S, 4" body, 3" valve
483
Look-Up Tables

Grove Generic regulator using the Grove flow equation
Mooney Generic regulator using the Mooney flow equation
Rockwell Generic regulator using the Rockwell flow equation
Universal Generic regulator using the Universal flow equation
Valve Table...

Generic Valves
2 B'fly Generic Butterfly Valve, 2" body
1 Ball Generic Ball Valve, 1" body
484
Look-Up Tables

1 Gate Generic Gate Valve, 1" body
1 Globe Generic Globe Valve, 1" body
485
Look-Up Tables

1 Plug Generic Plug Valve, 1 " body
2 Plug Generic Plug Valve, 2" body
486
Look-Up Tables

Rockwell Valves
2 RW-1943 Rockwell model 1943 or 143, 2" body
2 RW-2025 Rockwell model 2025, 2" body
Regulators (wide-open/non-controlling)
1 FC-1098 Fisher Controls, 1"-1098, standard cage, size 40 actuator, red spring
2 FC 99-7/8 Fisher Controls, 2"-99, standard 7/8"
2 FC 99-9/8 Fisher Controls, 2"-99, standard 1-1/8"
1 GR-83 Grove Model 83, 1"
1.5 GR-83 Grove Model 83, 1 ½"
487
Look-Up Tables

2 GR-900TE Grove Model 900 Top Entry Flexflo, 2"
1 MN-FG Mooney Flowgrid, 1" body, 1" NPT ends
1.25 MN-FG Mooney Flowgrid, 1-1/4" body, 1-1/4" NPT ends
1 MN-FG250 Mooney Flowgrid 250, 1" body, 1" NPT ends
1.25 MN250 Mooney Flowgrid 250, 1-1/4" body, 1-1/4" NPT ends
1.5 MN-250 Mooney Flowgrid 250, 1-1/2" body, 1-½" NPT ends
2 MN-DP Mooney Dual Port Flowgrid, 2" body
2 MN-SP Mooney Single Port Flowgrid, 2" body
3 MN-FG Mooney CL 150-600 Flowgrid, 3" body
2 RW-44157 Rockwell 441-57S, 2" body, 1-3/4" valve
4 RW-44157 Rockwell 441-57S, 4" body, 3" valve
Relief Valves
2 RW-257S Rockwell 257S Relief Valve, 2" body
488
Look-Up Tables
Well Table...
The well table contains a few wells which possess fictitious, but realistic, values. Actual well performance
values vary greatly and therefore are not conducive to mass inclusion in the standard tables.
489
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Glossary
GLOSSARY
491

Glossary...
The following table describes some of the terms associated with the GASWorkS modeling environment. If
you cannot find the term you are looking for in these definitions, use the On-Line Help “find” routine to
locate topics containing the confusing term.
Term Definition
Alphanumeric Characters Refers to the group of characters ranging from A to Z, and 0 to 9. The
characters can be combined in any order.
Arc A curved pipe segment.
Atmospheric Pressure The pressure exerted on an object by the atmosphere. Defined in the
"Support Equations" section of the Appendix.
Attribute Data Refers to non-model data associated with pipe and customer data. Non-
model data values do not affect the calculation of the pressure and flow
values in the system.
Balanced Refers to a condition where all of the node errors are within the specified
tolerance (convergence factor).
Base Pressure Refers to the pressure used as the basis for stating a load or flow rate. When
used with a customer load, the base pressure usually refers to the billing
pressure.
Base Temperature Refers to the temperature used as the basis for stating a load or flow rate.
When used with a customer load, the base temperature usually refers to the
billing temperature.
Check Box A box used to specify an option, condition, or
preference. A check mark (U) will appear in the
box when it is selected. The "Allow Size
Calculation" item on the Pipe Data Screen is an example of a check box.
Column Refers to a vertical group of data in a spreadsheet style report.
Command Button A control "button" used to execute a command. Command
buttons appear on data screens, reports, dialog boxes, and
message boxes. The "OK" button found on many message
boxes is an example of a command button.
Convergence Tolerance A setting used to indicate when the solution is "close enough". Sometimes
referred to as the “convergence factor”, or “tolerance”.
493
Term Definition
Copyright Notice The first screen that appears when GASWorkS is executed. Informs the User
of the Copyright status and owner.
Cursor Refers to the screen position indicator for the keyboard or the mouse.
Data Field May refer to an item in a GASWorkS data file, an item in an external data
file, an entry position on a data screen, or a cell in a grid report.
Data File A file used to store the information used by GASWorkS to define and
support its network modeling activities.
Data Screen A displayed form used to enter data.
Dialog Box A form used to display information, provide the User with alternatives, or
provide entry of a few data items.
Diameter Refers to the Size/Type code or inside diameter of a pipe segment.
Distribution Disk Refers to the Compact Disk or other media which contains the source
GASWorkS program files.
Drop-down List Box A list used to display and select data items. Initially the list is "collapsed"
and displays only the currently selected value. The list is activated (dropped
down) by clicking on the arrow symbol next to the box. See "List Box" for
an example.
Element A "pipe" - a hydraulic element connecting two nodes.
From Node The beginning node of a pipe element.
GDI An acronym (abbreviation) for the GASWorkS Graphical Data Interface.
Header Data The common data for the model such as base pressure and temperature, and
solution control values.
Icon A small simple image which represents a command or routine.
Click the icon to execute the associated command. The printer
image used by many of the report routines is an example of a
command icon.
List Box A list of options which are selected by clicking the
mouse on the desired item. List boxes can either be
permanently displayed, or may "drop down" when
selected. The dimensional unit values are commonly
associated with list boxes.
494
Term Definition
Load A flow leaving the system at a node. Opposite of a supply. Generically refers
to the flow entering or leaving the system at a node. A negative (-) value
“load” value.
Property Tables A set of data files that contain common data associated with the various pipe
types used by GASWorkS. Each table contains specific information about
the type it represents. For instance the Pipe Properties Table contains
information on the pipe type elements such as inside diameter, per foot cost,
and SMYS.
Menu Item An item appearing in a pull-down menu list. Selecting a menu item causes
the associated routine or command to be executed, or the associated option
to be selected or unselected.
Menu List A list of functional topics and commands grouped under a common heading.
Message Box A simple form that provides a warning or message to the User. The box is
cleared by clicking its OK command button, or choosing one of its options
(if more than one command button is present).
Model The header, node, pipe, and customer data that defines the system being
modeled.
Mouse Pointer The cursor image which is controlled by movement of the pointing device.
Node The end of a pipe, or connection between multiple pipe ends.
Node File A data file that contains the information associated with the node features
in a model.
Option Button A circular button used to specify a condition or
preference. The "Status" item found on many of the data
screens is an example of an Option Button.
Pipe Same as an "element" - a pipe connects two nodes.
Pipe File A data file that contains the information associated with the pipe features in
a model.
Pipe Type Specifies the element type - for example pipe, valve, or regulator.
Polyline A multi-segment pipe. The end of each segment is referred to as a vertex.
Schematic A line representation of the system being modeled.
Screen A window object used to access various data fields. May also be referred to
as a data screen, form, dialog box, or window.
495
Term Definition
Scroll Bars A horizontal or vertical slider that can be positioned to change a value, or to
browse a report.
Supply A flow entering the system at a node. Opposite of a load. A positive (+)
“load” value.
To Node The ending node of a pipe element.
Two-Point Line A single segment pipe. The pipe extends directly between the From and To
Node locations.
User Graphics A graphic line or symbol feature input by the User.
User Text Text features input and defined by the User.
496
GASWorkS 9.0 ™ Index
INDEX
497

Access Data
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Add
Arc Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 169
Attribute Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 170
Auto Assigned Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 170
Branch Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 170
Branch Customer Command . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 170
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 170
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 170
Duplicate Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 171
Hydraulic Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 171
Legend As Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 171
Multiple Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 171
Multiple Auto Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 171
Multiple Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 171
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 169
Polyline Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 172
Polyline Pipe Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 172
Polyline Service Customer . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 172
Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 173
Service Line Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 173
Unassigned Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 173
User Graphic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 173
User Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 173
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 174
W ell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 174
Adjust Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 174
Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. 491
Analysis
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Appending Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Application Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Arrange Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Arranging Screen Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Arranging Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ASCII Data
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 361, 364
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336, 339
ASCII Import Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336, 339
Assign
Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . . 174
Customer Service Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . . 175
Atmospheric Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . . 112
Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . . 455
Solution Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . . 140
499
Attribute Data
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 315
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 319
Updating W ith SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Attribute Valve Data
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Attribute Valve Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Automatic Save Increment
Preference Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Automatically Open GDI
Automatically Save
Background Image
Bitmap Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Include In Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SHP Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Background Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Base Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Base Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Bitmap
Saving GDI Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Bitmap Scale Factor
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
BMP
Background Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Saving GDI Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Break Flagged Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Bundle Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Bundling Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Calculate
Delta P (Linear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Delta P (Squared) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Efficiency (P Linear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Efficiency (P Squared) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
XY's From Lat/Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
500
Calculating
Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Gas Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Calibrate
Digitizing Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 179
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 491
Checking Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Clear
Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Customer Find Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Customer Item Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Intersection Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Node Find Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Node Item Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Pipe Find Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Pipe Item Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Supply Node Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
User Text Find Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Close
GASWorkS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
GDI Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Graphical Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Color Legend
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Colors
Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Setting By Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Setting By Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Setting Defaults In GDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Columns
Collapsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 112, 118
Restoring Original Width In Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 111, 117
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 111, 117
Command
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Command Alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Preference Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Command Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Command Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
501
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Preference Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 122, 123
Compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
AGA8 Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
GPSA Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Compressor
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Temperature Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Compressor Table
Standard Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Compressor Type Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Condition Nodes
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Condition Pressure
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Connectivity
Checking Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Recalculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connectivity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Construction Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 401
Convergence Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Convergence Tolerance
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Convert
All Arcs To Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Arc To Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Coordinate
Dimensional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Coordinates
Calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 158
Entering In The GDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
In The GDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Copy
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Copy Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Copyright
502
Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Cost
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Creating New Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28
Customer
Attaching Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Undelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Updating Attribute File Using SQL Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Updating External Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Customer Data
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Exporting To ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
Customer Data Report
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Customer Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Customer Symbol Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Customer Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Data
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Flag Data Error Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Mass Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Non-Pipe Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Reporting Check Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Reporting Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setting Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Data Check
Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Data Check Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Data Check Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
503
Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Data Screen
ASCII Import Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336, 339
Attribute Valve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Background Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Bitmap Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Bundle Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Color Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Customer Attribute Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Customer Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Customer XY Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Data Check Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
DBF Import Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Default Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
DXF Import Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Gas Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Graphic Line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Graphic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Graphic Symbol Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Graphical Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Header Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Import/Export Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Import/Export File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Mass Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Model Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Multiple Edit Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Node Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Node Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Node XY Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Path Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pipe Attribute Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Pipe Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pipe Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Plot Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Preference Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Print Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 130
Project Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Property Table Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Query Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Renumbering Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
504
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Set Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
SHP Import Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Solution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
SQL Update Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Stoner Import Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Summary Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Text Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tool Palette Edit Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Trace & Update Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Trace Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Trace Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
XLS Import Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
XY Calculation Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
XY Shift Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Data Screens
Negotiating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
dBASE Data
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368, 370, 373
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
dBASE Import Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
DBF Import Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Default
Colors In GDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Default Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 87
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Delete
All Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
All Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Attribute Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 180
Legend Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 180
Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Saved View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Service Line Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Unused Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
User Graphic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
User Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
505
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Zero Length Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Design Factor
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diameter
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Diameter Path Factor
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Digitizing Tablet
2-Point Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Conformal Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Toggle On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Dimensional Units
Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
International Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Directory
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Display
Attribute Valve Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Color Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Crosshairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Customer Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Flow Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Node Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Pipe Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
User Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Vertex Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Display Reminders
Display Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Divergence Limit
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diversified Customer Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Drive
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Dropdown List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 492
DXF
506
DXF File
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
DXF Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 221
Edit
Attribute Valve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Customer Data By Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Data Using Mass Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
External Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Model Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Multiple Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Multiple Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Multiple Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Pipe Customer Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Equation
Atmospheric Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Average Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455, 456
Average Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Compressibility, AGA8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Compressibility, GPSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Compressor, Empirical1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Compressor, Empirical2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Compressor, Theoretic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Inner Wall Convection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Jacobs Two-Phase Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Joule-Thomson Temperature Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Pipe Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Pipe Flow, AGA Fully Turbulent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Pipe Flow, AGA Partially Turbulent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Pipe Flow, AGA-Turbulent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Pipe Flow, Application Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Pipe Flow, Colebrook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
507
Pipe Flow, Elevation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Pipe Flow, IGE3-General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Pipe Flow, IGE3-LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Pipe Flow, IGE3-MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Pipe Flow, IGT-Improved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Pipe Flow, IMC-HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Pipe Flow, IMC-IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Pipe Flow, Mueller-HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Pipe Flow, Mueller-LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Pipe Flow, Oliphant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Pipe Flow, Panhandle-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Pipe Flow, Panhandle-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Pipe Flow, Pole-LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Pipe Flow, Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Pipe Flow, Spitzglass-HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Pipe Flow, Spitzglass-LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Pipe Flow, Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Pipe Flow, Weymouth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Pipe Hoop Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Pipe Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Regulator, Grove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Regulator, Grove80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Regulator, Rockwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Regulator, Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Reynolds Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Specific Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Temperature Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Valve, Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Valve, Grove Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Valve, Rockwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Valve, Rockwell Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Valve, Universal Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Well, Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Exceptions Report
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Solution Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Executing
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
GASCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SQL Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55
Exiting
GASWorkS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
508
Export
Access Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
ASCII Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
ASCII Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
ASCII Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
dBASE Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
dBASE Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
dBASE Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Excel Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
GASWorkS 7.0 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Node XY Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Quick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Shape Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Stoner Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
XLS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
External Loads
Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Facility Settings
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Default Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
File
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Appending Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Attaching Customer Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Attaching Pipe Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Back-Up, Discussed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Bundling Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Closing Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Copying Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Deleting Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Entering Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Importing/Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Management Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Opening An Existing Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
509
Program Files Described . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Recently Opened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Removing UnRequired Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Renaming Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Restoring Backup Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Restoring Sample Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Saving Model Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 22
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Setting Default Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Sorting Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
UnBundling Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
UnZipping Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Updating Customer Attribute Using SQL Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Updating Pipe Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Zipping Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
File Selection
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 188
Customer By Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Customer By Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DXF Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Item In Look-Up Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 189
Node By Record Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Node In Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 117
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 190
Pipe By Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Pipe By Attribute Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
User Text Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fitting Table
Fitting Type Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Flag
Customer By Item Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Node By Item Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Pipe By Item Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Supply Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Unassigned Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Unbroken Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Flow Arrow Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
510
Flow Arrow Symbol Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
From Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Fuel Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Gas Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 100
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
GASCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
GASWorkS 7.0 File
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Gathering Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
GDI
Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Entering Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Key Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Mouse Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Refresh Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
GDI Command
Add Arc Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Add Attribute Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Add Auto Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Add Branch Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Add Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Add Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Add Duplicate Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Add Hydraulic Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Add Legend As Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Add Multiple Attribute Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Add Multiple Auto Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Add Multiple Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Add Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Add Polyline Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Add Polyline Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Add Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Add Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Add Service Line Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
511
Add Unassigned Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Add User Graphic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Add User Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Add User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Add Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Adjust Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Arrange Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Assign Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Break Flagged Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Calculate Delta P (Linear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Calculate Delta P (Squared) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Calculate Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 176
Calculate XY's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Calibrate Digitizing Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 179
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 176
Clear Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Clear Customer Find Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Clear Customer Item Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Clear Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Clear Intersection Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Clear Node Find Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Clear Node Item Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clear Pipe Find Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clear Pipe Item Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clear Supply Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clear User Text Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Close GDI Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Convert Arc To Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Convert Arcs To Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Copy Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Copy User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Customer Service Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Delete Attribute Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Delete Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Delete Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Delete Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Delete Legend Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Delete Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Delete Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Delete Saved View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Delete Service Line Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Delete User Graphic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Delete User Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Delete User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Delete Zero Length Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Display Attribute Valve Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
512
Display Attribute Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Display Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Display Color Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Display Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Display Crosshairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Display Customer Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Display Flow Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Display Node Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Display Pipe Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Display Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 184
Display User Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Display User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Display Vertex Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
DXF Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Edit Attribute Valve Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit Customer By Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit Customer Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Edit Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit External Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit Multiple Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit Multiple Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Edit Multiple Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Edit Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Edit Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Edit User Graphic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Edit User Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Edit User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Executing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Find Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Find Customer By Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Find Customer By Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Find DXF Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Find Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Find Node By Record Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Find Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Find Pipe By Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Find Pipe By Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Find User Text Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Flag Customers By Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Flag Nodes By Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Flag Pipes By Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Flag Supply Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Flag Unassigned Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Flag Unbroken Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Go To XY Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Highlight Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
513
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Insert Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Insert Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Insert Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Join Adjacent Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Match Customer Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Match Graphic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Match Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Match Node Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Match Node Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Match Node Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Match Pipe Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Match Pipe Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Match Pipe Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Match Pipe Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Match User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Maximize GDI Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Measure Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Move Attribute Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Move Attribute Valve Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Move Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Move Branch Customer Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Move Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Move Customer Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Move Legend Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Move Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Move Node Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Move Pipe End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Move Pipe Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Move Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Move Service Line Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Move Service Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Move User Graphic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Move User Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Move User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Multiply Customer Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Multiply Node Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Node Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Pan Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Purge Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Purge User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reassign Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reassign Pipe ID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reduce Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Regenerate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
514
Repaint Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Report Bad Customer Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Reset Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Reset Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Reset Customer Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Reset Node Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Reset Pipe Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Resize GDI Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Save Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Save Feature Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Scale Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 205
Set Attribute Valve Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Set Attribute Valve Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Set Customer Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Set Customer Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Set Graphic Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Set Pipe Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Set Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Set User Text Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Shift Model Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Snap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Solve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 208
Swap Pipe Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tap Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Toggle Digitizing Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Trace & Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Undelete Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Undelete Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Undelete User Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Undelete User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 209
Update Customer Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
View Trace Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Zoom Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Zoom Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Zoom Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Zoom Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Zoom Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
GDI Command List
515
Preference Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 122, 123
GDI Menu
GDI Toolbars
Attribute Valve Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Construction Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Customer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Model Data Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
User Graphics Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
User Text Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Utility Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
View Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Window Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Go To XY Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Graphic
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Graphic Line Data
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Graphic Settings
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Graphic Symbol Data
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Graphical Data Interface
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Graphics
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Saving Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Viewing Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Header Data
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Header Data Report
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Header File
Using To Access A Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Heating Value
Calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
516
Help
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 401
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Setup Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Highlight Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Hoop Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Arranging Screen Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IMC-LP
Discussed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Import
ASCII Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Customer XY Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
dBASE Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Excel Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Node XY Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Shape Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Stoner PD/XY Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Import And Export Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Initialization Files
Setting Default Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Insert
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Installation
Of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
International
Notes For Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Join Adjacent Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Length Path Factor

Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
License
517
License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 492
Load
Determining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Proration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
System Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Updating External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Lower Dampening Factor
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Mass Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Match
Customer Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Graphic Line Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Graphic Symbol Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Node Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Node Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Node Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Pipe Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Pipe Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Pipe Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Pipe Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
User Text Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Maximize GDI Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Maximum Iterations
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Measure Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Menu
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
GDI Pop-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Quick Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
518
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Microsoft Access File
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Microsoft Excel File
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Miscellaneous
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Model
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Accessing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29
Appending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Bundling Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Checking Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 78
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Compressor Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Creating New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28
Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Editing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fuel Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Gathering Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Hoop Stress Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Import/Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Mass Updating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Network Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Pipe Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Plant Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Regulator Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Removing UnRequired Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Report Solution Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reporting Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Reporting Data Check Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Restoring Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
519
Restoring Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Setting Default File Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Solving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Standard Dimensional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Supply Node Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Supported Dimensional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
System Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Transmission Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
UnBundling Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
UnZipping Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Viewing Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Zipping Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Model Data
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28
Mass Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Model Data Files
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Model Data Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Model Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mouse Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Move
Attribute Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Attribute Valve Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Branch Customer Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Customer Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Legend Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Node Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Pipe End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Pipe Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Service Line Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Service Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
520
Multiple Edit Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Multiply
Customer Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Node Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Network Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Node
Automatically Renumbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Data Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Number Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Renumbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Node Data
Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Node Data Report
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Node Name
Renumbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Node Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Node Snap Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Node Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Node Symbol Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Node XY Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
On-Line Help
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61
Opening
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Optimize By
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Pan Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201
Pass Limit
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Path Factor
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Path Processing
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
521
Path Settings
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Paths
Pipe
Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Hoop Stress Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Reporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Summary Of Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Summary Of Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Summary Of Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Undelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Updating Using SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Pipe Data
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pipe Data Report
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pipe Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Pipe Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Pipe Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Pipe Properties Table
Pipe Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Pipe Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Plant Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Plot Settings
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Pop-Up GDI Menu
Preference Settings
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Retrieve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
522
Setting Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pressure Per Unit Length
Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Pressure Units
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Pressure Values
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Print
Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Model Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Wide Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Print Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 130, 131
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 130
Printer
Dimensional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 130
Printer Dimensional Units
Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Printing
Wide Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 119
Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Program Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Project
Creating New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Project Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting Default Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Purge
Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Removing UnRequired Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Unused Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
523
Query Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Query Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Reassign
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Customer Pipe ID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reduce Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Refresh Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Regenerate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Regulator
Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Regulator Table
Regulator Type Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rename
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Renumbering Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Renumbering Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Repaint Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Report
Changing Column Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 112, 118
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 72
Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Model Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 152
Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 136
Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting Displayed Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 111, 117
Solution Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Solution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 150
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Report Bad Customer Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Report Options
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Reporting
Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
524
Reset
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Command List Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Customer Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Node Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pipe Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Reset Minimum Diameters
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Resize Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Restoring
Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Results
User's Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Reynolds Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Save
Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Feature Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 269
GDI Image To Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
GDI Image To Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Save Increment
Save Model Before Solving
Saving
Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Scale Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Screens
Arranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Arranging Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Scroll
Change Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Scroll GDI Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Set
Attribute Valve Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Attribute Valve Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Customer Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Customer Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
GDI Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Node Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Pipe Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
525
User Graphic Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
User Text Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Set Display Colors
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Set Text Options
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Shape Import Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Shift Model Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
SHP
SHP File
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Software
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Copy Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Executing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Program Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Registration Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setup Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Trademark Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Uninstalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Solution
Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Convergence Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Reporting Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Solution Exceptions
Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Solution Log
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
526
Solution Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Solution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 146
Solve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Solve A Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Sort
Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Node Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Sorting
Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Specific Gravity
Calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Specific Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Specific Heat Ratio
Calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
SQL
Executing Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55
Updating Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55, 322
Updating Attribute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Standard Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 103, 110, 116
Stoner Import Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Stoner PD/XY File
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 152
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Summary Report Options
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Supply Flag Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Supply Nodes
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Swap Pipe Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
System Pressures
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
System Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tap Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Temperature Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
527
Text Data
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
To Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Toggle Digitizing Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tolerance
Node Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tool Palette Edit
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tooltips
Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Trace & Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Trace & Update Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Trace Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Trace Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Trademark Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Transmission Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Undelete
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 200
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 201
User Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
User Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 106, 111, 118, 165, 209, 213
Preference Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 122
Uninstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Update
Customer Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
External Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Using SQL Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55
Upper Dampening Factor
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
User Graphic Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
User Graphics Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
User Text Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Utility
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Utility Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
528
Valve
Attribute, Described . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Throttling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Valve Table
Valve Type Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Velocity
Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
View Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
View Trace Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Viscosity
Calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Well
Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Well Table
Well Type Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Window
Open List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Window Control Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Windows Clipboard
Saving GDI Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
XLS File
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
XLS Import Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
XY Calculation Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
XY Shift Specification
Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Zipping Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
529
Zoom
All Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Model Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
530
531

GW90 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GW90 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GW90 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GASWorkS 9.

419 East Columbia Street, Colorado Springs, Colorado 80907 USA

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Frequently asked questions are also posted on the website.

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

About This Manual...

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

GRAPHIC DATA INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

PROPERTY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

IMPORT & EXPORT ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

IMPORT ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

EXPORT ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

If the software was received on a CD...

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

From An Electronically Received File:

If the software was received electronically (email or download)...

! If a faux extension is present (“.txt” or “.ok”) remove the extension.

General Installation Instructions:

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Software Copy Protection...

Parallel (Printer) Port Hardware Key:

USB Port Hardware Key:

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

! After clearing the notice, depending on certain preference settings, a

! Select the Start button from the Windows Task Bar.

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

The contents of the Control Panel folder will be displayed.

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Customer Load Manipulation

Graphic Data Interface

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Graphic Data Interface

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Graphic Data Interface

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Graphic Data Interface

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Item Minimum Requirements Recommended Options

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

GASWorkS Data Elements...

Pipes connect the nodes and carry flow

Both hydraulic and attribute pipe data

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE

Negotiating Data Screens...

Bradley B. Bean, PE ENGINEERING & SOFTW ARE